Astounding Science-Fiction v30n01, September 1942



ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:
Jamie Rubin, Vacation in the Golden Age

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr., Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The Barrier • novella by Anthony Boucher ∗∗∗
The Twonky • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett]
Nerves • novella by Lester del Rey
Pride • short story by Malcolm Jameson
Starvation • short story by Fredric Brown
With Flaming Swords • novella by Cleve Cartmill +

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Kolliker (x3), Willy Ley (x4), Paul Orban (x7), Charles Schneeman, Frank Kramer (x4)
Weapons and War • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Death Under the Sea • essay by Willy Ley
The Analytical Laboratory: July 1942
In Times to Come
Brass Tacks
• letters

_____________________

This issue of Astounding contains two of this year’s Retro-Hugo nominees, The Twonky by “Lewis Padgett”, and Nerves by Lester del Rey, hence this review (more or less—I’ve also read Boucher’s story for something else I’m reading, the retrospective ‘Best of the Year’ anthology for 1942, The Great SF Stories #4, edited by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov).1
Before I get to the fiction I’d like to mention the cover artist, William Timmins, who appears for the first time (with a scene from Boucher’s story) as a result of Hubert Rogers joining the war effort. Timmins would reappear in the December 1942 issue, and would then provide every cover of Astounding until January 1947, except the July 1944 (Fred Haucke) and December 1946 (Alejandro) issues—a run of 48 covers out of 50 (and he would reappear a handful of times over the next few years). Much of Timmins’ work is unexceptional but he nevertheless produced some of Astounding’s best covers.2

The fiction leads off with Anthony Boucher’s debut in Astounding (although he’d previously appeared in Unknown), The Barrier, an ambitious time travel story that makes much of future linguistic drift:

The first difficulty was with language.
That is only to be expected when you jump five hundred years; but it is nonetheless perplexing to have your first casual query of: “What city is this?” answered by the sentence: “Stappers will get you. Or be you Slanduch?”
It was significant that the first word John Brent heard in the State was “Stappers.” But Brent could not know that then. It was only some hours later and fifty years earlier that he learned the details of the Stapper system. At the moment all that concerned him was food and plausibility.
[. . .]
He pondered the alternatives presented by the stranger. The Stappers would get him, unless he was a Slanduch. Whatever the Stappers were, things that Get You sound menacing. “Slanduch,” he replied.
The stranger nodded. “That bees O. K.,” he said, and Brent wondered what he had committed himself to. “So what city is this?” he repeated.
Bees,” the stranger chided. “Stappers be more severe now since Edict of 2470. Before they doed pardon some irregularities, but now none even from Slanduch.”
“I be sorry,” said Brent humbly, making a mental note that irregular verbs were for some reason perilous.  p. 9-10

Almost immediately after this exchange three Stappers appear through a wall and challenge Brent’s interlocutor for “speaking against Barrier”. The man shows them his identity bracelet. When they stun him, Brent does not waste any time in making his escape up onto a balcony.
He then hides in a nearby room, and an older woman arrives who perplexingly recognises him, as does her brother Stephen who joins them later. When he arrives there is a data dump explaining how this static, and therefore anti-time travel, society came into being. This is not entirely convincing. There is also discussion about the “Barrier”, which is supposed to prevent time travel. As Brent has somehow managed to penetrate it they go to see his time machine. The Stappers (a corruption of “Gestapo”) find them; Brent and Martha escape in the machine, and go fifty years into the past.
The rest of the story involves a small group of people (including younger versions of Martha and Stephen) repairing his time machine and plotting to return to prevent the activation of a second Barrier (the reason they only go fifty years into the past is that Brent’s machine destroys the first one—how he got through it on the first occasion without this happening is, if I recall correctly, wobbily explained).
When they arrive back in the future they infiltrate the Barrier activation ceremony only to see the machine generating it explode, an event caused by an attack of future time travellers. These are quickly subdued by the Stappers and arrested.

Most writers would probably wrap up the story here by sending Brent away on his time machine—Boucher, however, is only about two-thirds of the way through and in the rest of it he tries to outdo van Vogt.
Brent becomes a government interpreter, and interrogates three of the time traveller prisoners (Kruj speaks in an Elizabethan English variant, Mimi the Amazonian in a future-slang type speech, and the Venusian Nikobat in a language that is a meld of all Earth ones) :

Brent picked Tiny Beard as the easiest-looking start. “O. K. You!” He pointed, and the man stepped forward. “What part of time do you come from?”
“A pox o’ thee, sirrah, and the goodyears take thee! An thou wouldst but hearken to me, thou might’st learn all.”
The State linguist moaned. “You hear, young man? How can one interpret such jargon?”
Brent smiled. “It bees O. K. This bees simply English as it beed speaked thousand years ago. This man must have beed aiming at earlier time and prepared himself. . . . Thy pardon, sir. These kerns deem all speech barbaric save that which their own conceit hath evolved. Bear with me, and all will be well.”
“Spoken like a true knight!” the traveler exclaimed. “Forgive my rash words, sir. Surely my good daemon hath led thee hither. Thou wouldst know—”
“Whence comest thou?”
“From many years hence. Thousands upon thousands of summers have yet to run their course ere I—”
“Forgive me, sir; but of that much we are aware. Let us be precise.”
“When then, marry, sir, ’tis from the fifth century.”  p. 23-24

Brent beckoned forward the woman. She strode forth so vigorously that both Stappers bared their rods.
“Madam,” Brent ventured tentatively, “what part of time do you come from?”
“Evybuy taws so fuy,” she growled. “Bu I unnasta. Wy cachoo unnasta me?”
Brent laughed. “Is that all that’s the trouble? You don’t mind if I go on talking like this, do you?”
“Naw. You taw howeh you wanna, slonsoo donna like I dih taw stray.”
Fascinating, Brent thought. All final consonants lost, and many others. Vowels corrupted along lines indicated in twentieth-century colloquial speech. Consonants sometimes restored in liaison as in French.  p. 24

He beckoned to the green-skinned biped, who advanced with a curious lurching motion like a deep-sea diver.
“And you, sir. When do you come from?”
“Ya studier langue earthly. Vyerit todo langue isos. Ou comprendo wie govorit people.”
Brent was on the ropes and groggy. The familiarity of some of the words made the entire speech even more incomprehensible. “Says which?” he gasped.
The green man exploded. “Ou existier nada but dolts, cochons, duraki v this terre? Nikovo parla langue earthly? Potztausend Sapperment en la leche de tu madre and I do mean you!”
Brent reeled. But even reeling he saw the disapproving frown of the State linguist and the itching fingers of the Stappers. He faced the green man calmly and said with utmost courtesy, “‘Twas brillig and the slithy toves did gyre and gimble over the rivering waters of the hitherandthithering waters of pigeons on the grass alas. Thank you, sir.” He turned to the linguist. “He says he won’t talk.”  p. 24

Added to the mix is a Stapper called Boko, who proves he can time-travel by mind control when he closes his eyes for a second and a copy of him appears at the door. Later, a bodiless time-traveller reveals herself (she is initially resident in Martha’s brain but jumps around).
The climatic insurrection scene (spoiler) has Martha’s brother Stephen possessed by this bodiless time traveller, who convinces him to kill himself to end the war. He does so, and all the future time travellers disappear—there is a third Barrier.
This ambitious and novel piece has some interesting ideas but it goes on for too long, and some parts of it are either a bit of a mess or are not entirely convincing.

The Twonky by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore also starts with a time traveller, this one with amnesia, unintentionally arriving in a radio-phonograph3 factory. His job in the future is building ‘Twonkies’ so he uses the material at hand to build one, and then has a nap. His amnesia clears shortly after he wakes up, and he disappears on his time machine, leaving behind the modified phonogram/Twonky behind.
The phonogram is bought by a university lecturer and his wife and, after the latter leaves to visit her sister, things start to get weird: the phonograph starts acting like a robot, lighting the man’s cigarettes, doing the dishes, etc. However, (spoiler) matters take an ominous turn when it stops him reading certain books, listening to certain music, and generally prevents him from doing things it does not approve of.
The couple eventually try to destroy it but come off worse.
Despite its ‘classic’ status4 I found this, at best, an okay gimmick story, and thought it read like a rehearsal for the superior Mimsy Were the Borogroves (Astounding, February 1943).

Nerves by Lester del Rey is a prescient story which tells of an accident at a “National Atomic Products Co. Inc.” plant which, in parts, is eerily similar to some of the real events that occurred at Three Mile Island and Chernobyl (or Fukushima if you are younger). This story is pre-atomic bomb, of course, and the knowledge we now have about nuclear power is considerably different from then—as can be gathered from this early conversation that Doc Ferrel, the folksy head physician of the atomic plant (and narrator), has with one of the other doctors:

“What was it, anyway?”
“Same old story— simple radiation burns. No matter how much we tell the men when they first come in, most of them can’t see why they should wear three ninety-five percent efficient shields when the main converter shield cuts off all but one-tenth percent of the radiation. Somehow, this fellow managed to leave off his two inner shields and pick up a year’s burn in six hours. Now he’s probably back on No. 1 [reactor], still running through the hundred liturgies I gave him to say and hoping we won’t get him sacked.”  p. 55

There’s quite a bit of this ‘slap a bit of salve on your radiation burns and get back to work’ stuff in the story, as well as a fairly cavalier attitude to the catastrophic results of things going wrong, or possibly going wrong:

And besides, once the blow-up happened, with the resultant damage to an unknown area, the pressure groups in Congress would be in, shouting for the final abolition of all atomic work; now they were reasonably quiet, only waiting an opportunity—or, more probably, at the moment were already seizing on the rumors spreading to turn this into their coup. If, by some streak of luck, Palmer could save the plant with no greater loss of life and property than already existed, their words would soon be forgotten, and the benefits from the products of National would again outweigh all risks.  p. 78

But I’m getting ahead of myself. The story begins with Doc Ferrel talking to his junior, Dr Jenkins, about a new process the company is running in reactors 3 and 4 that evening. During this they are informed about an accident—the account of what has happened is rather vague and, when the first casualties come in, they are found to be people that were outside the reactors, injured by exploding debris. Ferrell calls in another doctor.

An exciting second chapter follows, during which Ferrel learns that Palmer, the plant boss, has blocked access to the outside phone lines. More injured men arrive, and they may be contaminated:

Jenkins joined Ferrel on the last patient, replacing Dodd at handing instruments. Doc would have preferred the nurse, who was used to his little signals, but he said nothing, and was surprised to note the efficiency of the boy’s co-operation. “How about the breakdown products?” he asked.
“I-713? Harmless enough, mostly, and what isn’t harmless isn’t concentrated enough to worry about. That is, if it’s still I-713. Otherwise—”
Otherwise, Doc finished mentally, the boy meant there’d be no danger from poisoning, at least. Isotope R, with an uncertain degeneration period, turned into Mahler’s Isotope, with a complete breakdown in a billionth of a second. He had a fleeting vision of men, filled with a fine dispersion of that, suddenly erupting over their body with a violence that could never be described; Jenkins must have been thinking the same thing. For a few seconds, they stood there, looking at each other silently, but neither chose to speak of it.
Ferrel reached for the probe, Jenkins shrugged, and they went on with their work and their thoughts.  p. 62

Jenkins’ wife (a nurse turned newly qualified doctor) makes it into the medical section with reports of the military being mobilised and the city possibly being evacuated. She goes to triage the injured near to the reactor, treating the radiation burn casualties there and sending the shrapnel cases back to Ferrel and his surgical team.
Throughout all this del Rey creates a remarkably convincing and tense narrative, drip feeding bits of his made up nuclear physics in between the medical procedures that are taking place, against a background of an escalating serious accident.
As well as being better informed about nuclear physics than the writer, we also expect our physicians to behave differently nowadays: Ferrel and Blake have a snifter of brandy after several hours of work, and the doctors later resort to shooting up morphine to keep awake! Meanwhile, their ambulance driver gets drunk to cope with the traumatic stress he endures ferrying all those casualties around, and crashes his ambulance.

Matters become even more tense in the next chapter when Palmer (the plant manager) and Ferrel go to one of the atomic converters and organise the men to search through the molten slag for Jorgensen, the only one who understands the process that was running in the plant before the explosion (as well as its risk assessment, the plant may want to review its ‘key man’ and data retention policy).

They find him in an armoured suit in a locker, but he is badly contaminated and stops breathing. Ferrel cracks open Jorgennson’s chest and starts manual heart massage.
Unfortunately, after a cracking start to the story, these events signal a rather padded, potboilerish middle section during which there is much running about and threatening of guards so Ferrel can phone a nearby hospital for an experimental heart and lung machine. There is also a lot of guff about Jenkins thinking he has “cracked” under the strain, Ferrel’s heart to heart with him, and chunks of both men’s backstories.
The last part of the story is a partial return to form: Jorgennson is saved but is of no use to them as his vocal nerves are compromised by widespread radioactive contamination (which, as we have seen previously in this world, affect the nervous system and cause convulsions); Palmer arrives saying the whole place will explode in ten hours and they must evacuate, but Ferrel points to the problem of the contaminated (and also soon to be exploding) men; Hok, the Japanese plant scientist (this in a post-Pearl Harbour America), comes up with a process to transmute the material in their body into something harmless, but it must be done at the plant as it requires I-713. Finally, the underconfident Jenkins comes up with a theoretical solution that will stop the converters exploding, and reveals he is the step-son of a great, and dead, theoretical atomicist.

This has a cracking start but the middle section is padded and the story drags from then on (albeit to a much lesser extent in the final part). This piece should have considerably shortened. That said, you can see why it was so popular at the time.

Pride by Malcolm Jameson is about Tom, a beaten up robot who works in a heavy industry factory:

Everybody, both his fellow workers and the men who operated the great Alberta plant, said Old Tom was slipping—that it was a shame to see a creature let himself go so completely. And it must be admitted that there was something to the gossip. For he never bothered with body oils any more or went to the burnishers. He would go the whole ten-day working period without so much as giving himself a wirebrushing, and on Repair Day he would usually sit quietly on the veranda of the club and take the sun, heedless of the fact that he dripped rust at every move and that wisps of gasket often trailed from the places where his plates were joined.  p. 92

The reason he skips on maintenance is because he is saving all his money and, in the second part of the story, he uses this wealth to have a new robot built. However, Tom will need to donate his own brainbox for use in the new model, which will mean his end. As the story closes Tom refers to this replacement as his son.
This crystallises the story’s problem, which is that Tom behaves like an old man and not a robot. Asimov’s decidedly non-human robots would soon make this type of story seem quite outdated.

Starvation by Fredric Brown (reprinted in his collections as Runaround) isn’t really SF, but is an okay mood piece about the last T. Rex trying to catch something to eat, failing (everything is too fast), and ultimately dying.

With Flaming Swords by Cleve Cartmill is actually my favourite piece in the issue. I know this will cause howls of outrage but I liked it more than the Boucher and del Rey: it is a well done if minor story rather than an uneven but ambitious one.
It starts with this:

You could shock men, I thought, and suffer no consequences. Men were merely slaves. Slaves allowed to serve us, to bring their produce to Eden, to give us their arms and backs and brains.
But these were Saints, here in the big hall. Their massed auras were a blaze of blue against which I narrowed my eyes. We were Saints, with three hundred years of traditional conduct behind us.
And what I had said was not condoned by tradition. I had called them men.
They took it in silence for a few seconds and stared at me, beside the throne of the Patriarch. Then they began to yell, and I felt a sick shame for them. They lost their dignity.
I yelled into their hubbub.
“I invoke the rule of silence!”
The Patriarch raised his glowing arms. Quiet fell. “Against my will,” the Patriarch said, “I command silence. We will hear the rest of Saint Hanson’s heresy.”  p. 109-110

This future world is ruled by the Saints, an oppressive order of men who use humanity as serfs and a source of wives. They are held in religious awe and feared by the rest of humanity, partly because of their blue auras, and partly because they have the power to make men drop dead by the power of their will. As to that latter ability, Hanson knows that what really happens when they raise their hands to the turbans they wear is that they are firing ray guns concealed within. Hanson also knows that a larger version of that ray gun is responsible for the Saints’ altered germ plasm and blue aura:

Here is the truth. Nearly three hundred years ago, a new weapon was introduced into warfare. It was fired only once. The destruction was so great and terrible that nations by common consent outlawed it, for it destroyed friend and foe indiscriminately. Thousands were killed within the radius of its effect. It was silent death, for the gun was a ray gun. But listen. On the edge of that area of destruction, people were affected by that ray. Their germ plasm was affected so that male children born of those individuals were born with an aura.  p. 111

We learn the above later in the story as Hanson is prevented from continuing his speech by another Saint called Wakefield, who suggests that the council shunt the matter into committee because of the febrile atmosphere in the Temple. Hanson feels ostracised and leaves to go home. During the journey he reflects on the advice his human partner Jennings would give him, which is to turn the modulator he has developed on the council (we learn from this passage that, during his research, Hanson has made a device which neutralises the blue aura). We discover more about this world and its history when he arrives home a gives his fiancée, Ellen, a mini-lecture about the situation.
The next part of the plot is not entirely credible: Wakefield visits Hanson, who shows him not only his research but the modulator, and its aura nullifying effect on Hanson’s blood. Needless to say, Wakefield turns the modulator on Hanson, which destroys his aura, and Wakefield then destroys the modulator.
The next day Hanson goes to the council and, as he arrives aura-less, is denounced by Wakefield. Hanson is later excommunicated in a ceremony televised world-wide, and driven from the temple. Outside the common people stone him and he only just escapes.
The rest of the story involves Hanson’s escape to the desert with Jennings and his wife, his involvement with the resistance, and his development of a device that will provide protection against the Saints’ ray guns (and which produces a blue aura around the wearer). They test this on a giant desert terrapin that had previously wandered into their cave:

We placed the box on Methuselah’s broad back. Jennings brought the turban gun.
“Wait!” Magda cried. “Are you certain it’ll work, Bob?”
“No,” I said. “I think maybe, though.”
She got a leaf of lettuce for Methuselah. “Here, fella. If you die, you’ll be happy. He loves it,” she said to me, “if it has a touch of salt.”
Jennings added his farewells. He patted the patterned shell. “So long, mascot.”
I hadn’t seen much of the ugly and somehow awesome creature. I’d been busy. But the Jenningses had made a friend of him.
I touched the button of the little box, and joined in the exclamations. For Methuselah had an aura, bright and blue like a Saint’s.
“There’s a bona fide Patriarch,” Jennings said.  p. 121

After this they plan to confront the Saints at an upcoming ceremony at the Temple, which is going to be televised to the world. The climax at the Temple (spoiler) involves Jennings and Hanson proving immune to Wakefield’s ray gun. Wakefield then dies in a fight with Jennings, and the Patriarch’s aura is neutralised. A hundred men of the resistance arrive and switch on their auras, and the end comes when Magda and the terrapin enter the Temple, also with auras, thus disproving the Saint’s God-given powers. The Patriarch laughs. The conflict is over.

I can understand that the synopsis above is unlikely to convince anyone of the story’s merits and I would not expect it too—the setup and plot are the parts I would label as ‘minor’. What they don’t convey is that I found the strange religious order of supermen intriguing, and that the story is very readable—I was reminded in parts of the slick delivery of Heinlein. The character detail is pretty good for the time as well, particularly the exchanges between Jennings and his wife Magda, and there are a number of observations from Hanson about love and life that ground the story. There are these one-liners, for example, on Hanson’s troubled relationship with his fiancée:

You can take an emotional blow. It won’t kill you. But sometimes you wish it would.
[. . .]
You can be sick with emotion, too. But you don’t die. It just seems that way.  p. 121

And his envy of the Jennings’ relationship:

As this blond giant and his wife bickered in this friendly fashion, I forgot that I was being hunted. Nobody had ever spoken to me like that, and I missed it suddenly. All those years of being set apart rushed over me again. I wanted to be on terms of tender contempt with someone. Perhaps that would be possible with Ellen, now.  p. 118

And, yes, I liked the Terrapin, especially when it glows blue at the end!

I’ve already mentioned Timmins above: this is a Cover of his that puts me neither up nor down. As to the Interior artwork in this issue, my favourites are the Schneeman (for the Jameson) and the Kramer (for the Brown), although I also liked a few of Orban’s for the del Rey.
Weapons and War by John W. Campbell, Jr. is another rambling editorial, this time starting with the topic of shared scientific knowledge and then going on to discuss the problems of scaling up certain industrial processes. I am beginning to get the feeling that when Campbell wrote his editorials he just started typing about whatever was on his mind at the time.

Death Under the Sea by Willy Ley is a science history essay (accompanied by four illustrations/diagrams by the author) which looks at underwater naval warfare, specifically the development and use of mines, torpedoes and submarines through the ages. There is some interesting historical information in this (a lot of the development appears to have taken place during the American Civil War), and I learned where the torpedo got its name from:

The man who coined a name for underwater charges was Robert Fulton. His term was “torpedo” which then did not mean a weapon of naval warfare but simply the electric eel of South American rivers.  p. 45

The Analytical Laboratory: July 1942 puts Simak’s Tools ahead of Will Stewart’s (Jack Williamson) first ‘Seetee’ story Collison Orbit.5
In Times to Come starts by correcting a cover attribution error for the July cover:

A number of kind friends pointed out our slight slip on the crediting of the July cover. Quite right; it was not done by Rogers—but we all make mistakes, and “Cover by Rogers” has been a pretty steady thing for Astounding now. But Rogers is no longer doing covers—he’s in the Canadian army.

It is correctly attributed to Charles de Feo in Brass Tacks.
The rest of the column promises an astronomical cover by von Munchhausen, and stories by Lester del Rey, George O. Smith (the first of the ‘Venus Equilateral’ stories), Murray Leinster, and A.E. van Vogt.

Brass Tacks opens with a letter from Rosella Rands, Washington, D. C., prophesising another war in twenty years, and that they will get all their new ideas for weapons from SF magazines.
Earl C. Smith, Corpus Christi, TX, claims he is a veteran of the SF field, and has a couple of things to get off his chest:

FIRST: Every time an author dreams up a theory on sunspots, cosmic rays, or why, in the final analysis, there is no solidarity—including their theory—does he have to contaminate good reading material by filling page after page with DETAILED EXPLANATIONS? Not that I haven’t an imagination, or that I don’t want an explanation, but, PLEASE, does the author have to convince himself by going to such an extent?
SECOND: Why not give us something different occasionally? The best story I’ve read in any of the current issues was Van Vogt’s “Asylum.” Perhaps I’m contradicting myself on a point here, by liking his story, but I feel the general make-up, the atmosphere, the not bringing out of so many technical details, were points raising his story far above any I’ve read recently.  p. 105

There are also letters from Milton A. Rothman (about a ‘Probability Zero’ story), and Anthony Boucher (about van Vogt’s Secret Unobtainable and the assassination of Reinhart Heydrich). Edward C. Connor, Peoria, IL, didn’t like the van Vogt as because it is set in Germany and concerned the Nazi Party. James Dial, Chicago, IL, ends the comments (on what seems a mixed July issue) with a letter containing this more general observation:

There seems to be one flaw which has grown worse rather than better as time goes on. I speak of the feeble endings of most of your serials and many of your shorts. My idea of a perfect ending is certainly inadequate, but I think that the best I have seen is the one from “Uncertainty.” The suspicion has been growing that perhaps you have been getting work on assignments, and the endings have had to be rushed through. The ending of “Beyond This Horizon” is a case in point. This story has a structure worthy of three serial installments, possibly four, but it ends abruptly, unsatisfyingly, just when the full background has been painted in and the story has attained momentum.  p. 107

This is a pretty good issue, with three good or better novelettes.  ●

_____________________

1. The Great SF Stories #4, edited by Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg (DAW, 1980) contains:

7 • Introduction (The Great Science Fiction Stories Volume 4, 1942) • (1980) • essay by Martin H. Greenberg
11 • The Star Mouse • [Mitkey • 1] • (1942) • novelette by Fredric Brown
32 • The Wings of Night • (1942) • short story by Lester del Rey
50 • Cooperate – Or Else! • [Rull] • novelette by A. E. van Vogt (variant of Co-Operate – Or Else! 1942)
77 • Foundation • [Foundation (Original Stories) • 1] • (1942) • novelette by Isaac Asimov
110 • The Push of a Finger • (1942) • novella by Alfred Bester
150 • Asylum • (1942) • novella by A. E. van Vogt
205 • Proof • (1942) • short story by Hal Clement
222 • Nerves • (1942) • novella by Lester del Rey
295 • Barrier • (1942) • novella by Anthony Boucher
347 • The Twonky • (1942) • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett]
369 • QRM – Interplanetary • [Venus Equilateral] • (1942) • novelette by George O. Smith
403 • The Weapon Shop • [Weapon Shops of Isher] • (1942) • novelette by A. E. van Vogt
442 • Mimic • (1942) • short story by Donald A. Wollheim

Apart from the Brown (from Planet Stories) and the Wollheim (from Astonishing Stories), all the rest are Astounding stories.
I’ll review this volume in due course. By the way, there is a groups.io newsgroup that has been set up to discuss these volumes at The-Great-SF-Stories-1939-1963@groups.io. There are only a handful of active commenters, so it won’t wear you out.

2. There isn’t much information about Timmins on the web but there is a page at Pulpartists.com, and links to his covers on his ISFDB page.
Here are two of my favourites taken from Siren in the Night’s Flickr page for Astounding (very slightly touched up to remove the odd crease, scratch, etc., and resized). This is the best of his conventional work:

And this one is the best of his impressionistic covers:

Also worth a look is the Through a Shattered Lens page, especially the last image, which is a striking cover for The Shadow magazine. An occasionally brilliant artist.

3. A radio-phonograph was a wooden box that combined a radio, record player, and speakers. Here is a page of them on Pinterest.

4. The Twonky’s ISFDB page is here. Note its early reprint appearance in Adventures in Time and Space by Raymond J. Healy & J. Francis McComas in 1946.

5. The Analytical Laboratory with the results for this issue appeared in November:

The score of 1.00 for del Rey’s story is extraordinary (and, I originally thought, probably unprecedented and unrepeated, but see Walker’s comment below). Every reader who voted marked it first or joint-first!  ●

This magazine is still being published as Analog Science Fiction and Fact. Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies.

rssrss

6 thoughts on “Astounding Science-Fiction v30n01, September 1942

  1. Walker Martin

    Paul, I see you made the same mistake as John Campbell when you state in footnote 5 that this was the first and perhaps only, example of a story getting a perfect score of 1.00 in the An Lab. In the December 1964 ANALOG I had a letter pointing out to Campbell that 5 stories had received perfect scores: Feb 1941 An Lab for SLAN by van Vogt; Oct 1941 An Lab for Methuselah’s Children by Heinlein; June 1942 An Lab for Beyond This Horizon by MacDonald; November 1942 An Lab for NERVES by del Rey; Dec 1945 An Lab for WORLD OF A by van Vogt.

    Campbell responded “ooops! My five-fold error!”

    Reply
  2. jameswharris

    Since I agree with your assessments of “The Barrier,” “Nerves,” and “The Twonky,” it suggests I should give “With Flaming Swords” a try.

    I can’t believe all the readers voted “Nerves” #1. Both “Nerves” and “The Barrier” could have been greatly improved by some serious cutting and editing. I think I would have rejected “The Twonky” as being too stupid. It would have been a superior story if a time traveler had worked to manipulate the main character’s behavior instead of a walking phonograph.

    I guess Campbell wasn’t always that great of an editor.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      I’d be interested to see what you think of Cartmill’s story, Jim, but suspect there won’t be enough of a central idea for you. Jamie Rubin couldn’t seem to get into it but, reading between the lines of his review (and around it), he may have been a bit burnt out after reading two years plus of old Astoundings.
      Campbell was more of an ideas man as an editor, I think. Story structure and line editing don’t seem to be have been his strengths. When it comes to the padding in the stories it may have been that Campbell was short of material: the magazine went from an 80,000 words pulp to a 110,000 words bedsheet format in January 1942–just as the war started and a number of his writers starting drifting off to the military and the like. I haven’t looked at this part of Fantasy Commentator #59/60 yet so I’ll find out later if this is mentioned.

      Reply
  3. Pingback: Astounding Science-Fiction v21n05, July 1938 | SF MAGAZINES

  4. Pingback: The Great SF Stories Volume 4, 1942 | SF MAGAZINES

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Apex Magazine #99, August 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews
Sam Tomaino, SFRevu
Stephanie Wexler, Tangent Online
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Amy Sturgis; Editor in Chief, Jason Sizemore

Fiction:
Welcome to Your Authentic Indian Experience™ • short story by Rebecca Roanhorse ∗∗∗+
If a Bird Can Be a Ghost • short story by Allison Mills +
Skinny Charlie’s Orbiting Teepee • short story by Pamela Rentz
The Trip • short story by Mari Kurisato

Non-Fiction:
The Fire • cover by Dana Tiger
Words from Guest Editor Amy H. Sturgis • editorial by Amy H. Sturgis
Interview with Author Allison Mills • by Andrea Johnson
Indigenous Wonderworks and the Settler-Colonial Imaginary • essay by Daniel Heath Justice
Interview with Cover Artist Dana Tiger • by Russell Dickerson

_____________________

I read this issue for a number of reasons: it is short, with four stories of roughly equal length totalling 20,000 words (lately I’ve been busy reading the Hugo nominees as opposed to magazines); it was generously provided by the publisher as part of the Hugo Award finalists reading package;1 it contains Rebecca Roanhorse’s Hugo finalist short story; it was a special guest-edited “Indigenous American Fantasists” issue2 (I’ve always been curious about this sub-genre since reading Craig Strete’s work3 in the mid-seventies); and, finally, I’ve been meaning to look at this magazine for a while anyway—recent issues have had some striking covers.4

The issue opens with Words from Guest Editor Amy H. Sturgis, an editorial that starts with a section about the editor’s indigenous heritage:

I was raised in Oklahoma, the state that once was U.S. “Indian Territory,” by parents who took seriously both our family heritage and the region’s other many cultures. They exposed me not only to history but also to the present-day societies around me. I was fascinated by great figures of the past (and later wrote books about some of them), but I also had contemporary heroes.
[. . .]
It took me by surprise, then, when I began to write and teach about Indigenous subjects as a scholar, to learn that many of my students and even some of my colleagues had locked Native America safely away in the museums of their minds as something both exotic and extinct.  p. 4-5

The fiction gets off to a good start with two good stories. Welcome to Your Authentic Indian Experience™ by Rebecca Roanhorse concerns a man called a Jesse who works as a host in an Indian (the story’s term) VR business that offers tourists various native experiences, and the setup has him providing a session for a client (who he eventually names White Wolf) that does not start well:

You plant your feet in a wide welcoming stance and raise one hand. “How,” you intone, as the man stops a few feet in front of you.
The man flushes, a bright pinkish tone. You can’t tell if he’s nervous or embarrassed. Maybe both? But he raises his hand, palm forward, and says, “How,” right back.
“Have you come seeking wisdom, my son?” you ask in your best broken English accent. “Come. I will show you great wisdom.” You sweep your arm across the prairie. “We look to brother wolf—”
The man rolls his eyes.
What?
You stutter to a pause. Are you doing something wrong? Is the accent no good? Too little? Too much?
You visualize the requirements checklist. You are positive he chose wolf. Positive. So you press on. “My brother wolf,” you say again, this time sounding much more Indian, you are sure.
“I’m sorry,” the man says, interrupting. “This wasn’t what I wanted. I’ve made a mistake.”
“But you picked it on the menu!” In the confusion of the moment, you drop your accent. Is it too late to go back and say it right?
The man’s lips curl up in a grimace, like you have confirmed his worst suspicions. He shakes his head. “I was looking for something more authentic.”
Something in your chest seizes up.
“I can fix it,” you say.
“No, it’s alright. I’ll find someone else.” He turns to go.  p. 16-17

Jesse can’t afford another black mark on his work record and attempts to recover the situation, but fails, and the man leaves.
After work Jesse goes to the local bar for a drink, and is surprised to meet White Wolf on his way out. They talk briefly (during which White Wolf claims that he is part Cherokee) and the man reappears in one of Jesse’s VR sessions the next day. They later become drinking buddies and, in due course, Jesse thinks, friends.
The inflection point in the story comes when Jesse misses not only work due to sickness but his regular Tuesday night meeting with White Wolf. When he is also unable to meet him the following Friday, Jesse sends his wife Theresa to let White Wolf know why he isn’t there. She arrives back later that night, having obviously enjoyed herself (Jesse and Theresa have had their troubles in the past).
The rest of the story (spoiler) charts Jesse’s displacement by White Wolf in not only Theresa’s affections but also with his friends and at work. The final scene has him jobless, at the end of a two-day drunk, and getting thrown out of his home. His trajectory is, of course, a metaphor for what happened (and may still be happening) to the indigenous American people. It is a sobering ending.
Equally as good, in my opinion, is If a Bird Can Be a Ghost by Allison Mills:

Shelly’s grandma teaches her about ghosts, how to carry them in her hair. If you carry your ghosts in your hair, then you can cut them off when you don’t need them anymore. Otherwise, ghosts cling to your skin, dig their fingers in under your ribs and stay with you long, long after you want them gone.

The story, as is probably obvious from above, is about Shelly and her grandmother. The latter is a ghost catcher who deals with ghosts who have not “moved on”.
The first half or so of the story consists of some interesting scene setting:

Grandma did a cleansing for a nice white family to get rid of a mother-in-law once. They paid her three hundred dollars and gave her a lasagna for the freezer. Three hundred is a lot for a ghost. Most of Grandma’s clients pay in knick-knacks and favours and food. Grandma doesn’t charge much because if people know they have a ghost they might pay anything to get rid of them—do anything.
“You’ve got to be responsible,” Grandma tells Shelly. “You can’t charge people through the nose to get rid of a ghost. We’ve got to undercut the frauds so people come to us.”
Mom looks over from putting her hair up to go to work, her uniform shirt all nicely pressed. She points a finger at Grandma.
“You could charge a little more.”
“It’s a nice lasagna,” Grandma says.
Mom shrugs because Grandma’s right. It is a nice lasagna.  p. 38

Later Shelley’s mother dies, and the rest of the story has Shelly searching all over for her ghost but (spoiler) it becomes clear that she has not remained behind and has already moved on. In the meantime, Shelley causes trouble for herself and several ghosts, and her grandmother eventually has to take her in hand.
This is an absorbing piece about letting go of the dead and the past. If I was editing a ‘Best Fantasy of the Year’ anthology it would be on my short list.
The story is followed by the informative Interview with Author Allison Mills by Andrea Johnson, and addresses why (spoiler) Shelly’s mother did not stay behind:

For me, Shelly’s mom not sticking around is her way of taking care of Shelly. Short term, Shelly would be happier if her mom was there, but long term she might be hurt by it. Shelly’s mom knows about ghosts and what their afterlives are like, and that’s not what she wants for herself or her family. When we see Shelly’s mom in the story, she’s trying to keep Shelly from focusing too much on ghosts, and I think coming back to haunt her daughter would be counterintuitive to everything she wanted for her in life. Shelly’s mom loves her, so she doesn’t come back.  p. 65-66

The interview covers other matters, including an interesting section on how copyright applies to recordings of indigenous people:

A common problem with recordings in archives, and why field recordings can seem like material archives should digitize and allow unrestricted access to, is that when a researcher records a traditional song, copyright of that recording belongs to the research, not the people singing it. Western law considers those songs public domain, and so the researcher, who owns the recording, could grant someone permission to take the recording, remix it, and release a single they make money off of without ever having to compensate or ask permission from the original performers. That happened with the 1992 house album Deep Forest.  p. 70

Skinny Charlie’s Orbiting Teepee by Pamela Rentz is about Charlie, who is one of the inhabitants on a spaceship containing emigrants from Earth. Unfortunately for Charlie the spaceship authorities seem to have turned life on the ship into a bureaucratic nightmare, and the story details his struggle to get a sign supplied for an upcoming cultural celebration. He eventually gets some help from Chief Rufus’s right hand man Zane, and events develop from there.
This is lightweight, pleasant stuff, but doesn’t entirely convince.
The Trip by Mari Kurisato is another starship story (this time a generation starship one) featuring a virtual reality engineer/technician called Corie. Unfortunately this one pretty much lost me at the start, when Corie’s partner Amy is introduced:

Why did Amy have cancer? Wasn’t this the future, with flying cars and solar-powered space elevators, where everything had a nanocure pill? Where there were people living on moons and getting off Earth as fast as possible?  p. 113

This passage did not help me get past (a) the incongruity of her disease in this high-tech future or (b) that Amy would have been allowed to go on the ship with Corie in the first place. I could also have done without Corie having breakfast with a VR simulation of her dead mother every morning. (If you are the kind of reader that enjoys mawkish stories featuring heroines who feel sad about things, this will be right up your street). The VR sections also feel like material I’ve read a million times before. That said, and if none of this puts you off, it moves along well enough, and the writer has a certain technical ability (i.e., they can tell a story, I just wish it hadn’t been this one).

I’m not entirely sure what the magazine’s production team have done with The Fire, Dana Tiger’s cover: normally the Apex cover artwork goes all the way to the edges of the page,4 but here there is a white border around the left hand and top sides. A production snafu I suspect, but one you think they might have sorted for subsequent electronic sales.
As for the artwork, it is an attractive and delicate piece which is unfortunately overpowered by the coloured text blocks on the left hand side. (And do we really need all that text on the cover anyway? There is a contents page.) Compare the actual cover below left and the quick edit I did below right:

    

See what I mean?
There is also an Interview with Cover Artist Dana Tiger by Russell Dickerson. Parts of it sound like something from Pseuds Corner:5

APEX MAGAZINE: “The Fire” is made of clean lines and colors, with a nice flow of movement to entice the viewer into more complex interpretations. How do you balance the message you are offering to the viewer with the amount of imagery you paint, and have viewers interpreted it differently than you would have expected?
.
DANA TIGER: The swirling lines and colors attempt to allow an entrance for the viewer to witness the undercurrent or source of power that my people, the Muscogee People, have danced for since the beginning of our time. The fire or “Totkv” is eternal and burns, is honored, fed and respected each year. My message of continuance is conveyed through a balance of delicate lines and soft colors implying movement and rhythm crucial to the flow necessary to maintain the dance. The woman’s place is central and provides an undercurrent of strength, also eternal, in maintaining our ties to where we came from. A viewer is left to contemplate the historical, the mystical and the reality of a people.  p. 136-137

The remaining piece of non-fiction is Indigenous Wonderworks and the Settler-Colonial Imaginary by Daniel Heath Justice, a chapter from a forthcoming book which is rather strangled by its academic jargon:

But even with those hard-won advances, deeply entrenched settler-colonial biases mean that our literatures already aren’t “literary” enough for many whitestream scholars and critics; adding the pathologization of fantasy and the scorn of genre snobbery on top of it is hardly something to be relished. Deficit remains the defining trope for Indigenous peoples in the settlercolonial imaginary. In this construction, “real” Indigenous peoples are always Other, always diminished, always the reduced shadow of our former greatness. So if the “real” is that which is passed away or gathering dust on the museum shelf, the “real” of Indigenous experience must therefore only be about deficit and loss.  p. 77

This passage above (and some of the material that follows it) essentially asserts that “realistic” fiction can only portray indigenous people as outsiders and losers: this is only the first questionable assertion in the essay.
He goes on to suggest that fantasy can “[open] up and [expand] the range of options for Indigenous characters (and readers)”, before examining the genre’s limitations:

Yet we must acknowledge, too, that fantasy carries its own representational burdens that these writers are also working against. The savagism vs. civilization binary that has so deformed colonial understandings of Indigeneity is very much the world-building template in fantasy fiction. Indeed, if any literature can be said to be the safe haven of this intellectually and morally bankrupt concept, it is that nebulous textual archive known variously as genre, adventurer, or heroic fantasy, wherein largely white heroes possessed of courage and, sometimes, strange talents struggle to challenge evil and reaffirm the values of social conservatism and right order—namely, might is right.
Civilization is bad or good; savages are noble or brutish; yet in either case, the conflict between a simplistic primitivism rooted/trapped in the past and a contemporary progressivism of technological complexity is the superstructure undergirding the narrative content of most genre fantasy.
[. . .]
[Until the appearance of Tolkien’s The Lord of the Rings] the genre had largely been dominated by the amoral and violently misogynistic and racialized phallic fantasies of Robert Howard, creator of the Hobbesian barbarian Conan and the Puritan witchhunter and soldier-of-fortune Solomon Kane (and whose own work was influenced in no small degree by H.P. Lovecraft’s literary eugenics).
Yet while the pipe-smoking Catholic don of Oxford University and the tough-talking Texas libertarian would seem, at first glance, to have little in common, their secondary worlds are in some ways complementary, for each presents a cosmos where heroic/tragic acts of righteous conquest affirm the right of chosen men to lay claim to lands, resources, and peoples, a world where manly virtue is ordained and, for a time at least, rewarded (although in Tolkien’s legendarium power accompanied by hubris always collapses in upon itself, with other power only occasionally surviving). There are more women in positions of authority in Tolkien’s work, and far less sexual violence than in Howard’s, and Tolkien was a widely tolerant man whose politics were far from those of Howard’s racial fantasies, but together and in different but sometimes complementary ways the two men’s work influenced the ideological template for the bulk of fantastic literature produced today.  p. 80-81

And there we go . . . from Tolkien and Howard to “the bulk of fantastic literature” in one bound. A ridiculous assertion, but I’d be interested to see the author produce an article on, say, the influence of Conan the Barbarian on magical realism fiction, or on Harry Potter, etc. Or try. He goes on to provide his own “solution”:

“Fantasy” as it’s commonly understood for us is dangerous, because it’s so deeply entangled in settler-colonial logics of dead matter, monolithic reality, and rationalist supremacy. But we can offer our imaginations as something entirely different.
Terminology is just one issue—imaginative orientation is the more significant challenge. And, I think, the one that promises a better way forward.
So here I want to suggest a different term in place of fantasy, speculative fiction, or even imaginative literature, as all are burdened by dualistic presumptions of real and unreal that don’t take seriously or leave legitimate space for other meaningful ways of experiencing this and worlds: through lived encounter and engagement, through ceremony and ritual, through dream. I suggest that “wonderworks” is a concept that offers Indigenous writers and storytellers something very different, and something more in keeping with our own epistemologies, politics, and relationships—in English, admittedly, and limited by its generic applicability, but no less useful, I think, for that.  p. 83-84

“Reinventing” and “wheel” are the words that come to mind.

Overall, and with the exception of the article above, this is an interesting issue. However, I’d note two things in passing. First, I have reservations about magazine special issues being used to showcase specific minorities (Whatever Destroys SF, etc.). I can see why you might want to do this, but I’d personally prefer to see these stories published alongside other ‘mainstream’ SF (like Craig Strete’s stories were in the mid-70s If and Galaxy). Second, this issue has a female editor and four stories by women: if the issue had had a male editor and four stories by men there would have been much rending and tearing of garments. So it goes.  ●

_____________________

1. As part of supporting membership of Worldcon you get the right to nominate and vote for the Hugo Awards—and also receive a good size digital package of material from the finalists to help you make up your mind (which, among other things, includes a lot of short fiction and even a novel or two).

2. “Native American” seems to have changed to “Indigenous American” since I last looked. A couple of the writers here refer to “Indians” in their stories.

3. The Craig Strete stories I saw mostly appeared in Galaxy and If. His ISFDB page is here, SFE page is here and Wikipedia page is here. His first collection The Bleeding Man and Other Stories is available on Kindle (UK/USA).

4. The covers for the recent issues of Apex are here. The full size image for issue #105 is here: that is what I mean by “striking”.

5. A description of Private Eye magazine’s Pseuds Corner can be found here.  ●

This magazine is still being published! Magazines and subscriptions are available at the Apex website, Weightless Books website, and at Amazon UK/USA.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

From Print to the Screen: A Conversation with Curt Siodmak by Eric Leif Davin

 

Originally published in Pioneers of Wonder, Promethus Books.
Reprinted by kind permission of the author. © 1999 Eric Leif Davin.
Photograph courtesy of Curt Siomak.

 

Even a man who is pure in heart
And says his prayers at night,
May become a wolf when the wolfbane blooms
And the autumn moon shines bright.

Curt Siodmak, The Wolf Man (1941)

_____________________

Curt Siodmak may have the longest professional career of any writer in the science fiction field. Not counting a fairy tale he published at the age of eight in a children’s magazine, he has been writing and publishing for over three-quarters of a century, with his first “professional” sale in 1919. And he is still writing and publishing.

Like that of his older brother, Robert, his career began in Berlin in the days of the Weimar Republic. He has written short stories, novels, and plays, but it is as a Hollywood screenwriter that he made his mark. For twenty years, from 1938 to 1957, he regularly churned out original and adapted screenplays, some­times two or three per year. In all, including collaborations, he crafted approximately forty-eight screenplays for films in Ger­many, Great Britain, America, Sweden, France, and Switzerland. Meanwhile, he produced approximately fifteen novels in Ger­many, America, and France, and his total number of short stories is unknown even to himself. Later in his career, Siodmak also directed a handful of Hollywood films, although it was his brother, Robert, who went on to become celebrated for directing such classics as The Spiral Staircase and The Crimson Pirate.1

Robert and Curt were the sons of a well-to-do Jewish banker in Leipzig, Germany (although Robert was actually born in 1900 in Memphis, Tenn., during a business trip by his father and Curt was born in Dresden two years later). Robert graduated from the University of Marburg and began acting in repertory theater, but the hyperinflation of the Weimar years forced him to give that up and become, first, a bank clerk, and then a failed businessman in a series of unsuccessful ventures. In 1925 he managed to find a job in Berlin as a title writer for imported American films. In 1926 Robert became a film editor. In 1929 Robert and his brother, Curt, collaborated with Billy Wilder and Fred Zinnemann—both of whom later became prominent Hollywood directors—in creating the noted feature documentary People on Sunday, marking Robert’s directorial and Curt’s screenwriting debuts.

Curt had hoped to graduate from a German university, but the inflation of the years immediately after World War I again inter­fered. When his father was unable to finance his continued edu­cation in Germany, Curt went to Zurich, Switzerland, where he obtained his B.A. in engineering in 1924. He was already writing short stories, which appeared in top German magazines. One such story, “The Eggs From Lake Tanganyika,” was seen by Hugo Gernsback and reprinted in the fourth issue of his new sci­ence fiction magazine, Amazing Stories (July 1926).2 Thus, though he’d never heard of either Gernsback or his magazine, Siodmak became a “Gernsback author,” a reputation he has retained ever since.

Upon graduation from the University of Zurich, Curt joined his brother in Berlin. There, the vagaries of the financial situation made it impossible to pursue his engineering career. Instead, he drifted into his brother’s film circle and wrote scripts for several of Robert’s films. Both brothers fled the Nazis in the early thir­ties and eventually ended up in Hollywood. Curt was quickly given a job writing a sarong picture for Dorothy Lamour and a succession of such assignments followed for the next two decades. A number of his assignments for Universal Pictures— The Wolf Man, House of Frankenstein, Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man, Son of Dracula, and others—have since become horror classics. This, as he makes clear in the following conver­sation, was entirely accidental. He had no particular affection for or interest in either horror or science fiction—indeed, he never read the stuff. It was merely a job.

This unfamiliarity with the field may explain why Siodmak’s output—though prodigious—is also so derivative. Siodmak never displayed much feeling for or understanding of the field. Even his most noted novel and film, Donovan’s Brain, a 1943 story about a disembodied brain kept alive in a vat, was a crude science fiction cliche at the time. The August 1926 issue of Amazing Stores, for instance, the very next issue after the one that introduced Siodmak to America, featured a cover of two sci­entists recoiling in horror from a still-living head in a lab vat.3

Nor, though Siodmak claims credit for creating the Wolf Man character in 1941, was his werewolf creation without precedent. The Wolf Man was Lon Chaney Jr.’s second horror film and the role for which he is most remembered. Indeed, he was honored with his in-character Wolf Man portrait on a U.S. postage stamp. Werewolves, however, were not new to cinema. As early as 1913 Bison Films had made a silent film, The Werewolf. In 1933 Guy Endore’s classic novel, The Werewolf of Paris, burst upon the world and Endore was quickly snapped up by MGM as a screen­writer to turn his novel into a screenplay. Universal Studios rushed to beat MGM to the screen with their own werewolf story. In 1935 they turned out The Werewolf of London with, not one, but two werewolves, one of them an Oriental werewolf played by Warner Oland, of later Charlie Chan fame. Thus, when Universal Studios returned to the werewolf theme in 1941 with an assignment to Siodmak to write a screenplay, the ground was well-trodden—although now-integral parts of the werewolf legend, such as Gypsy curses and silver bullets, made their first appearance in this film and might have been Siodmak’s ideas. In addition, the script was unusually literate for both a B film—and for Siodmak.

In 1943 Siodmak coscripted I Walked with a Zombie, a true horror classic from the team of producer Val Lewton and director Jacques Tourneur, who also brought us 1942’s Cat People. This was perhaps Tourneur’s best work, almost poetic, complemented by the haunting camera work of J. Roy Hunt and the dialogue of Ardel Wray, based upon an original story by Inez Wallace. Here, also, however, the film, though nightmarishly beautiful, was basically the well-known story of Jane Eyre transposed to the West Indies and it is unclear what, or how much, Siodmak con­tributed to the film.

Even at the time, Siodmak’s films were recognized as plod­ding and predictable, if not outright ridiculous, confirming that his talents were of the stolid workmanlike variety which welded worn-out SF conventions onto mundane formulas. For example, of Curucu, Beast of the Amazon, shot on location in Brazil, Variety said, “Curt Siodmak’s screenplay and direction make for­mula thriller use of the settings.”4 Of Siodmak’s Love Slaves of the Amazon, based upon an unpublished short story of his, Variety said it was:

. . . a simple-minded, poorly-made adventure film of which everyone says, “there must be a market for them somewhere.” It’s being coupled by Universal with Monolith Monsters, and, as part of such a package, probably will sneak by. If there’s anything good to be said about it it’s that the Eastman color is vivid and impressive, picking up some interesting landscapes in Brazil, where this was produced by Curt Siodmak . . . .
Siodmak’s script is so clumsy, the temptation is great to con­sider the whole thing a takeoff on jungle pix that have gone before. His direction isn’t any much better, judging by the per­formances. . . . Siodmak should have to answer to someone why nothing better came out.5

Meanwhile, Damon Knight has pointed to Siodmak’s screenplay for 1954’s Riders to the Stars as, “a splendid example of all that is silliest and most unscientific in SF cinema.”6

Nevertheless, Siodmak has had the last laugh—all the way to the bank. His novels are still in print, at least in Europe, he is financially comfortable, and he now “lives like a king” on a sixty-acre ranch in the wilds of the California outback. If nothing else, the long-distance career of Curt Siodmak proves that there is always a lucrative market for formula.

The great virtue of oral history, such as in the following con­versation, is that it gives a first-person “eyewitness” account of events by someone who was there. The great flaw of oral history, however, is that memory is exceedingly fallible, especially about events which happened decades past. Oral testimony, therefore, always has to be verified, as much as possible, by comparison with the record. This is true of the following conversation, where both the great virtue and great flaw of oral history are both on display. This conversation with Curt Siodmak took place on June 11, 1991. Siodmak was eighty-eight years old at the time.

_____________________

Eric Leif Davin: You were born August 10, 1902, correct?

Curt Siodmak: Ja, I didn’t choose it. I didn’t choose my family and I didn’t choose Dresden, where I was born. If I’d had a choice, I’d have been born two thousand years ago in Greece during the time of Aristotle, not during the time of Hitler.

Are you Jewish?

My father says so and I am his child.

In Slaughterhouse Five Kurt Vonnegut described Dresden before the firebombing. Was that an accurate description ?

I don’t remember. That was over fifty years ago. In your memory things are so different. I had a lovely big palazzo in Italy with a big staircase. I saw it thirty years later and it was a small house with a small staircase. We’re used to big spaces in America. Now I live in California on a ranch. Sometimes we see a jeep on the fire roads and my wife says, “Let’s move out, it’s getting crowded.”
I’ve been back to Europe a few times. I was invited recently by the head of the film museum in Berlin, who was a house guest here on my ranch a few weeks ago. I’m also a new writer they’ve just discovered over there. All my books are being republished and I had a new book out two weeks ago entitled The Riches of Paris. Only published in France. A historical novel about Louis XIV.
All my books have been continually in print. My book Donovan’s Brain has been published five or six times in Ger­many. I was published by Bertelsmann, one of the largest Euro­pean publishers. I was in Munich about two years ago with a book manuscript. They took it away and gave me cash!

I think the 1953 film version of Donovan’s Brain was the first film I saw based on your work.

They didn’t want me to direct that. I had a contract to direct it, but it didn’t happen.

Were you satisfied with what they did?

I don’t look at those pictures. They changed too much, espe­cially adding references to God, so I didn’t look at it. Another version was called The Brain, made by an English company in 1962. They had a cancer cure in it. What is a cancer cure doing in that picture?7
But, the book is still in print; sold about five million copies. I just had three of my books come out in one volume. It’s written from the shifting viewpoint of a young man in the first story, middle aged in the second, and an old man in the third.

So, you’re still active?

What do you mean still active? Of course! They just had a big parade for me in Austria. I’m also a lyricist and song writer. I just wrote a play, The Song of Frankenstein. It’s a comedy. It’s huge over there. It’s in Vienna, then it goes to Berlin, then it goes to London.
I have also written about five hundred pages of my autobi­ography, which I’ve been working on for some time. I threw the first draft away and started from scratch. There was a lady pho­tographer visiting me from Zurich about three years ago. She was interviewing all the people of my circle from the thirties who are still alive. That started me thinking that I should write about my life and about those people, too.8

Can we talk about those early days? I think you must have the longest professional career—wasn’t your first professional sale in 1909? When you were eight years old you published a fairy tale in a magazine called Kinderwelt, ‘‘Children’s World.”

Well, I wrote that fairy tale as a child and I wrote lots of sci­ence fiction. I remember one story, it was a long time ago, 1922. I described a telephone booth which would disassemble people into atoms and transmit them to another booth which would reassemble them into people—a matter transmitter.

What would you say your earliest influences were?

I studied engineering in Zurich, Switzerland, and in Stuttgart Hochschule, which was similar to a community college. I devel­oped a car engine in ’22, similar to the Wankel engine. I studied lasers in the thirties. My father refused to pay for my education because of the tremendous inflation at that time, so I lost my edu­cation. But, I had two friends who invited me to Switzerland, where I met my wife, Henrietta.9 She was an architect in Zurich. I met her at a fancy dress ball. I was then a student at the Uni­versity of Zurich, from which I graduated.

Do you credit that engineering education with your ability to think up science fiction ideas?

Not at all. It’s like a shoeshine boy asking you if you want a shine. How does he know? He looked at your shoes! I go through life and I see things others don’t see because it’s my profession. If you have the talent and you do it often enough, it becomes second nature. You don’t need an engineering background to do that. And you don’t need to read science fiction! I never did read science fiction. I think it’s gibberish. I don’t understand all the technical words they use.

But, you’ve written technical stories about outer space like City in the Sky­!

City in the Sky is possible! But Star Wars is not possible.

I see. Did you always think science fiction was gibberish?

Of course, it was always gibberish. You know, the human mind is so limited. We write about societies on other worlds, and they resemble us so much. You look at the paintings of Brueghel or Bosch10 and all those demons look like men with two eyes and two arms—hard to think of a new shape. The same with societies. You go into outer space and you find fascism or communism or the Roman Empire or feudal Europe. We don’t have much in our brains.
I wrote a few books about space, Skyport and City in the Sky.11 A friend took me to visit engineers at Lockheed because he thought talking with them would help give me ideas. They got their ideas from reading my books!
For instance, instead of launching rockets from the ground to reach orbit, why not have a huge elevator into space, miles high? Launch things from the top and they save so much on fuel!

Didn’t Arthur C. Clarke already write about that in The Fountains of Paradise?12

Who? I don’t know. I never read that.

How did you go from being an engineer to being a reporter and a writer?

I was always a writer. When I went to Berlin in 1924, the inflation made it impossible to make a living as an engineer, so I wrote for the newspapers. My education helped me a lot in my science fiction writing. I didn’t know very much, but I knew a little.
But, while my education helped with my science fiction, I also wrote love stories, all kinds of novels. My last one is a his­torical novel. If the idea is interesting, it doesn’t matter if it’s sci­ence fiction, or not. I’m a writer. I can write about anything.

Was there an active German science fiction community in the twenties?

I wrote a short story called “The Eggs from Tanganyika.” It was published in a German magazine and then I got some money from Hugo Gernsback when he republished it. I found an article in The Smithsonian about four weeks ago which said he wanted stories which used a lot of scientific research.13 But, I didn’t do any research for that story! I’d never heard of Gernsback before he published my story.

Were there any American science fiction magazines repub­lished in Germany?

It took six weeks for the boat to come over! An exchange didn’t exist. Sometimes you got a hardback, but nothing from magazines. How much do you know about German publications? Why should I know what was published in America?

How did you first become interested in film in Germany?

I just got a letter from a friend of mine who’s my age. He reminded me that I made my first film in 1926. Then I wrote books. I wrote Antwortet Nicht.14 Then I wrote something called The Studio Murder Mystery. In those days, newspapers still pub­lished novels in serial form. These were reprinted in smaller and smaller papers, until you got to the village papers, each paying less money. But, you were paid for each publication. The Ger­mans paid very well, not like in America. Here, five weeks after publication your book is forgotten.

Did you have much input into the making of F.P. 1 Does Not Answer?

No, not at all. Someone said, “The writer is the most impor­tant person in Hollywood. Don’t give him any power!”

And that was true in Germany, too?

No, in Germany a writer had standing.

But, F. P. One was made in Germany!

It was made in Germany, but it was shot simultaneously in three languages. It was the studio’s idea. They wanted an inter­national market. The producer for that film had imagination. He worked with Billy Wilder. He protected writers. But I didn’t go onto sets. I didn’t like actors. My brother, Robert, was the one who did that. He discovered Burt Lancaster, Ava Gardner, Ernest Borgnine, Tony Curtis, he picked them out of the crowd. He was a star-maker. He did Spiral Staircase and The Crimson Pirate, which was Lancaster’s first big film. He wanted me to change my name so there wouldn’t be two Siodmaks.

It’s strange to hear you say you don’t like actors, since you went on to become a director.

I went where the money was. How much money does a writer get? I never made money from my writing. A director made lots more money. Now I live like a king and I own sixty acres in the wilds of California. Not because of my writing!

Is that why you don’t like actors? Because they make more money than writers?

What is an actor? Someone found in a drugstore! And if they become successful, they become a son-of-a-bitch! Who are the great actors through the ages? You know only when you know who directed them! And how many films do you remember? But, you know Shakespeare, don’t you? Who acted in his plays? Books you remember! Books go through the ages. Plays go through the ages. But who remembers the actors of yesterday? Hitchcock was right. Actors should be treated like cattle.
I knew Hitchcock. He came to my office in London and said to me, “Siodmak, write me a story about a woman who is a deaf and dumb detective.” That was a very good idea, but unfortu­nately, I couldn’t do it for him, because I left for America.

What was the first film you worked on?

I worked for a small German newspaper in ’26 and was sent to do a story on Fritz Lang’s Metropolis. He didn’t allow re­porters on his set, so I and my wife got jobs as extras in the movie. We didn’t get much money for it, and we ate up what­ever we got.
I never did like that movie. The thing I remember most about it was Brigitte Helm’s costume catching fire during one of the disaster scenes. Helm was very pretty and very young. But, she was more hysterical than talented.15
In 1929 we made a film, we five young men in Berlin. Robert Siodmak, myself, Billy Wilder, Fred Zinnemann, Edgar Ulmer. We wrote a film called People on Sunday. The British stole it and it was made into a film called Bank Holiday. This picture is a classic, it’s in every film museum, including the county museum here in Los Angeles. It was our first picture. It was the first money I made. We just took people on the street and turned them into actors, very cheap. It was the same style as what the French later called “New Wave,” pictures like The Bicycle Thief.16 We did the same kind of film twenty years earlier, but we didn’t get the credit. Truffaut got the credit.

If you didn’t like Metropolis, why are you writing a sequel to it?

A sequel? I’m not writing a sequel to it. Who told you any­thing as silly as that?

Forrest J. Ackerman said so.

Well, it might be because I have a friend who reads scripts in Hollywood and he mentioned the possibility of a sequel. I wrote him back some ideas of how a sequel might go, but that was all.

Did you know Thea von Harbou, the coauthor with Lang of Metropolis?

I never met her. I saw her once. There was a split between her and Lang. He left Germany in the thirties, while she stayed. They were going to make Lang an “Honorary Aryan” and he said he’d think it over. But, he was out of the country immediately after that.
It was a nightmare time, the thirties. I don’t like to think about it. I don’t think the Germans have changed in their atti­tudes toward Jews, even today. In 1985 I went back to Berlin to see how the people behaved, what Germany was like. I stayed in the best hotel in Berlin. I saw what kind of pictures they were showing. My name was still known. It was good for the ego. But the memories made me sick. There I was, standing on the same sidewalk in front of the same theater where I’d stood sixty years before for a screening of my science fiction film The Invisible Agent.17 In the meantime, there’d been a world war, they’d killed my family. It made me feel sick. You Americans don’t know what it was like to live through those times.
But every country’s the same. Here we had the Vietnam War. But we faced it. We have the Vietnam Memorial, we write books about it, we make pictures about it. But the Germans don’t face it. You can’t make a picture today in Germany and show the Nazis.
I met so many people who said they were anti-Nazi. I asked, “Was that in 1945 or in 1942?” They don’t say anything. But this isn’t about politics here.

You left Germany in 1933, correct?

No, I didn’t leave Germany. They threw me out! I got a letter from the German writers’ union telling me I wasn’t permitted to work in Germany anymore because I’m Jewish. In 1936 I re­ceived a letter in England from my publisher in Leipzig, Bertels­mann, now framed and hanging on my wall. It says, “Dear Mr. Siodmak: This is to inform you that all your books have been confiscated by the Gestapo. So sorry. Heil Hitler!” This is the same publisher who published my latest book last week!

Why did you leave England in 1937?

My wife wanted to go to America. She couldn’t explain what it was. She was afraid of the Nazis coming. We tried moving to Switzerland but came back because she was pregnant and wanted to give birth to a British child. So, we moved to Los Angeles. Now we live in the country because she doesn’t like the city anymore. I don’t fight it; she’s always right.

How did you make contacts so quickly when you moved to Hollywood in ’37?

Somebody took me to Paramount. I got a job the first week. My first assignment was writing a picture for Dorothy Lamour, Jungle Princess.18 It was standard in those days for old alcoholic screenwriters to be kept on and they’d assign younger writers to work with them and do the writing. I was given such an assign­ment of writing Aloma of the South Seas.19 I made twenty-eight pictures for Universal. That was another time when you had to really work! My brother also had no job. So, Preston Sturges said he’d get him a job. He called the head of Paramount and said, “I have the most important director in Europe in my office.” So, he was hired.20

How long did it take you to write a screenplay when you were working for Universal?

About ten weeks from scratch.

How long for The Invisible Woman, in 1941, John Barry­more’s last picture?

He was an absolute mess. Couldn’t remember one line. So, I was on the set all the time. I wrote his dialog for him as he walked up and down the staircase and he could read it as he walked up and down. You had to be careful or he’d walk out of camera range. I could tell you stories, but this is on tape.

How about The Son of Dracula?21

It was an interesting idea. Here was a woman in love with a man who would live forever, a vampire.

Was that your idea?

Of course, of course. The directors had no ideas. Actors have no ideas.

Did you come up with the idea for The House of Franken­stein?

Well, of course. I had a little altar in my room. I’d say to it, “My weekly check, my weekly check,” and I’d go back to my typewriter. You have to write a lot of jobs to feed a family. I didn’t want to make art! By chance the times have caught up with me and some people think the things are interesting. But, it was just a job. You didn’t get much money for writing these things, $400 or $500, perhaps $1,000. That was good money in those days, but you had to keep working.

And you originated the idea for Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man, didn’t you?

Of course! And I created the character of The Wolf Man. I wish I had the copyright on him, but Universal owns it. Origi­nally it was just entitled The Wolf Man, and would have had Boris Karloff in it, but he had to make another picture, so we had Lon Chaney Jr. I had two hours to come up with the idea for Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man. I was told, “Here are your actors: Claude Rains, Ralph Bellamy, Lon Chaney.22 You’ll have a budget of $80,000. You begin shooting in two weeks. Good­bye!” So, I quickly wrote a script and was working on it right up to the last moment. I didn’t have the money to hire another writer, so I had to write it myself. There’s a book coming out on the classic Universal monster movies and it publishes my orig­inal shooting script for Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man.
You know, I never made the big pictures. In those days, there was something called “Block Booking.” A theater had to buy three hours of entertainment from the studio, okay? So, most of my films were made just to fill out the block. They’ve become “horror classics,” but that was not of my doing. I was just making a living, that’s all. I wrote sixty producible film scripts. I have two which have never been filmed.

Why were so many of your films horror stories?

They were just assignments given to me.

Did you respect the things you were writing, or did you just consider it trash?

I respected it. If you spit at your work, it will spit back at you. In your life, you are merely the echo of your own energies. I put all my energy into every job I had. I took them all seriously. I did a picture in England called Transatlantic Tunnel. It was the first time the British engaged American actors. Richard Dix, others. It opened up the whole English film industry. It was based on a famous novel by a German, Bernhard Kellerman, Der Tunnel.
Napoleon came up with the idea first, though. I got the job because I could read the original. They asked, “Can you write a script for it in three days?” I said, “Oh, sure.” However, it took six months.23

What’s your method for so much productivity?

I write twenty-four hours a day. When I’m on the phone, walking around, I’m writing in my mind. Basically, you’re like a lighthouse keeper; you’re married to the thing. Writing becomes the world, and the world becomes a dream. I’ve never had a problem with ideas, they just come. I have in my garage two hundred books with my stories, and that’s only a third of my output. A young man came to me and said, “I want to be a writer. How do I get an agent? How much money can I make?” I took him to the garage and told him, “When you have that many books, come back.”

What should I do to reach the age of ninety and still be active, like you?

Be curious. The brain is a muscle. As long as you work with it constantly, it stays young. ●

_____________________

1. Robert Siodmak died in Switzerland on May 10, 1973.

2. This was the story—with a Frank R. Paul illustration for the magazine’s cover showing a giant fly attacking a warship—which cap­tured the young Raymond Z. Gallun’s eye and moved him to purchase his very first science fiction magazine. He was an instant convert to the genre. It has been reprinted in Forrest J. Ackerman, ed., The Gernsback Awards I, 1926 (London: Turret, 1982).

3. Siodmak turned his novel into the original screenplay for the 1953 film of the same name. The film starred Nancy Davis (the future First Lady, Nancy Reagan) and Lew Ayres, World War II pacifist who briefly served time with pacifist SF editor Charles D. Hornig.

4. Variety,
Nov. 7, 1956.

5. Variety, Dec. 4, 1957.

6. Quoted in Peter Nicholls, ed., The Encyclopedia of Science Fiction (New York: Doubleday & Co., 1979), p. 548.
A small selection of other films for which Siodmak wrote the orig­inal screenplays include: House of Frankenstein (1944), in which all the Universal monsters were thrown together to revive the flagging series; Bride of the Gorilla (1951), also directed by Siodmak, in which Raymond Burr is a were-gorilla killed by cops Lon Chaney Jr. and black actor Woody Strode in his debut; and The Magnetic Monster (1953), cowritten with Ivan Tors and directed by Siodmak. The latter film starred Richard Carlson, omnipresent actor in 1950s’ Grade B sci­ence fiction films. Siodmak and Tors wrote the screenplay in hopes of creating a TV series based on Carlson’s character, who was an agent of the Office of Scientific Investigations. Sounds like X-Files.
Some of Siodmak’s adapted screenplays include: Black Friday (1940), cowritten with Eric Taylor, in which Boris Karloff performs a brain transplant; The Invisible Man Returns (1940), cowritten with Lester Cole and Joe May, who directed it. This was Vincent Price’s first starring vehicle; Tarzan’s Magic Fountain (1949), cowritten with Harry Chandlee. Basically Lost Horizon in the jungle, this was the first Tarzan movie to star Lex Barker, who made several sequels; and Earth vs. the Flying Saucers (1956), cowritten with George Worthing Yates and Ray­mond T. Marcus [Bernard Gordon], with special effects by Ray Harryhausen. Based on Maj. Donald E. Keyhoe’s 1953 book, Flying Saucers From Outer Space, although greatly influenced by George Pal’s 1953 film, War of the Worlds. Indeed, except for War of the Worlds, Earth vs. the Flying Saucers is the only 1950s’ SF film to feature a mass invasion of aliens. It contains the famous Harryhausen-engineered scene of a flying saucer crashing into the dome of the U.S. Capitol Building, a scene later spoofed in the TV cartoon series The Simpsons.

7. A British-West German production, it is also known as Vengeance and Ein Toter Sucht Seinen Moerder.

8. Unable to find a publisher, Siodmak self-published his com­pleted autobiography on August 10, 1997, in a signed and boxed edi­tion. Its title, Even A Man Who Is Pure in Heart. . . , comes from the opening lines of The Wolf Man. The publication date coincided with the U.S. Post Office release of the commemorative Lon Chaney “Wolf Man” stamp.

9. Henrietta De Perrot, whom he married in 1931. They had one child, a son, Peter, born in Great Britain and now a well-to-do Amer­ican businessman.

10. Pieter Brueghal (1564?-?1638), Flemish painter known for his paintings of demons and infernal regions. Hieronymus Bosch (1450?—1516), Dutch painter of devils, monstrosities, and other gruesome subjects.

11. Skyport (New York: Crown, 1959). Basically Ayn Rand’s Fountainhead—in the sky. City in the Sky (New York: Putnam, 1974). Basically Grand Hotel—in the sky.

12. Published in 1979, it won the Hugo in 1980 as Best Novel.

13. Daniel Stashower, “A Dreamer Who Made Us Fall In Love With The Future,” The Smithsonian 21, no. 5 (August 1990).

14. F. P. 1 Antwortet Nicht (Berlin: Keils, 1931). Published in America as F. P. 1 Does Not Reply (Boston: Little, Brown, 1933). Filmed in Germany in 1933, for which Siodmak wrote the screenplay. An Eng­lish version was released in 1938 in Great Britain by Gaumont. It is about floating airports—”Flight Platforms”—in the middle of the ocean.

15. Talented or not, Brigitte Helm—only a teenager when she por­trayed both the heroine and the evil robot-vamp in Lang’s classic silent SF film Metropolis—went on to make a string of films in which she almost always had the starring role. She easily made the transition to sound and starred as the Queen of Atlantis in G. W. Pabst’s excellent 1932 film, L’ Atlantide. As with the filming of Siodmak’s F. P. 1, Pabst’s film was shot simultaneously in German, French, and English with different casts, except for Helm, who starred in all three. According to Nicholls, Pabst’s film, “is generally regarded as superior, not only because of its visual flair, but also for Brigitte Helm’s striking performance as the queen” (p. 49). Brigitte Helm’s last film was Ein Idealer Gatte (An Ideal Spouse), in 1935. She died in Switzerland on June 11, 1996, at the age of ninety.

16. In fact, this was a 1947 Italian film directed by Vittorio de Sica, which won a special Academy Award before foreign films had their own category.

17. Invisible Agent was made in Hollywood in 1942 as an espi­onage thriller in which the son of the original Invisible Man volunteers to spy on the Nazis and Japanese for the Allies. Highly unlikely that this war propaganda film would have been screened in Berlin anytime before 1945.

18. Actually, Her Jungle Love, 1938. Starring Lamour and Ray Milland as her lover, this South Seas sarong-film was essentially a remake of Lamour’s sarong-debut, Jungle Princess, which paired her with Milland in 1936, before Siodmak left England.

19. 1941, another Dorothy Lamour sarong film.

20. Robert Siodmak settled in Paris after being expelled from Ger­many in 1933. He left Paris for Hollywood in 1940, just ahead of the German army.

21. Released in 1943, it was cowritten with Eric Taylor and directed by Siodmak’s brother, Robert. It starred Lon Chaney Jr. as “Count Alucard” (“Dracula” spelled backward).

22. Actually, these were the actors in The Wolf Man (1941). Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man (1943) starred Chaney, Bela Lugosi, Lionel Atwill, Ilona Massey, and Maria Ouspenskaya. Siodmak is obviously thinking about The Wolf Man (cowritten with Gordon Kann, which brings into question Siodmak’s claim to have created the char­acter) all the while he is talking about Frankenstein Meets the Wolf Man, for which he was, indeed, the sole screenwriter.

23. The Tunnel (aka Transatlantic Tunnel) was actually cowritten with L. Du Garde Peach and Clemence Dane, a well-known British author. It was released in 1935 and told the story of the construction of a tunnel beneath the Atlantic linking Britain and America. There was a previous 1933 German film, Der Tunnel, based upon the same novel, which linked America with the Continent, bypassing England. The epic grandeur of the German film was lost in Siodmak’s cowritten screen­play, which turned the construction of the Tunnel into a love-story tri­angle centered around the master engineer, his wife, and a vamp.
Napoleon’s idea for a tunnel, which Siodmak mentions, was for an undersea link between England and the rest of Europe—which now exists as the “Chunnel.” This is yet another science fiction idea which has become reality!  ●

_____________________

Eric Leif Davin is a history lecturer at the University of Pittsburgh. He is the author of many books, including:
Pioneers of Wonder (Amazon.co.uk/Amazon.com), Partners in Wonder: Women and the Birth of Science Fiction, 1926-1965 (Amazon.co.uk/Amazon.com), and a new novel The Great Strike of 1877 (Lulu.com).
More information is available at his ISFDB page, Amazon.com page, and website.

Pioneers of Wonder: Conversations With the Founders of Science Fiction  

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Famous Fantastic Mysteries v11n06, August 1950

ISFDB link
Internet Archive link

_____________________

Editor, Mary Gnaedinger

Fiction:
The Time Machine • novel by H. G. Wells ∗∗∗
Donovan’s Brain • novel by Curt Siodmak ∗+

Non-Fiction:
Cover • by Norman Saunders
Interior artwork • by Virgil Finlay (x3), Lawrence (x2)
The Readers’ Viewpoint • editorial by Mary Gnaedinger & reader letters

_____________________

This issue of Famous Fantastic Mysteries got my attention because it contains one of this year’s 1943 Retro-Hugo Award finalists, Curt Siodmak’s Donovan’s Brain. This is another of those novels that I’ve been aware of since the mid-seventies1 but have never got around to reading.

Donovan’s Brain is, as its title probably suggests, a ‘brain in a box’ story, the brain in question belonging to the well-known and wealthy businessman Warren Horace Donovan. The person who puts his brain there is narrator Dr Patrick Cory.
Before that key event we make Cory’s acquaintance when he buys a Capuchin monkey from a Mexican organ grinder passing through town. He takes it home to his laboratory, feeds it, and is bitten for his trouble. The monkey then hides in a box and goes to sleep until the next day:

September 14th.
The monkey was still alive this morning and screamed hysterically when I tried to grab it. But after I fed it bananas and raw egg again, it let me pet its head a moment. I had to make it trust me completely. Fear causes an excess secretion of adrenalin, resulting in an abnormal condition of the blood stream. This would throw off my observations.
This afternoon, the Capuchin put its long arms around my chest and pressed its face against my shoulder, in perfect confidence. I stroked it slowly, and it uttered small whimpers of content. I tried its pulse, which was way above normal.
When it began to sleep in my arms, I stabbed it between the occipital bone and the first cervical vertebra. It died instantly.  p. 56

Cory removes the monkey’s brain and hooks it up in a tank of fluid. He is then visited by the local (alcoholic) doctor, Schratt, whose primary role seems to be that of Cory’s missing conscience:

Schratt sat down heavily. As he thought of what he had seen, he grew pale under the coarse, brownish skin that loosely covered his drink-sodden face.
“You’re the godfather of this phenomenon,” I said to cheer him up, in spite of my knowing he could not be flattered.
“I don’t want any part of anything you are doing, Patrick,” he answered. “You—with your mechanistic physiology—reduce life to physical chemistry! This brain may still be able to feel pain, it may suffer, though bodyless, eyeless and deprived of any organ to express its feeling. It may be writhing in agony!”
“We know that the brain itself is insensitive,’’ I answered quietly. To please him I added: “At least we believe we know that!”
“You have put it in a nutshell,” Schratt answered. I perceived that he was trembling. The success of my experiment had unnerved him. “You believe and acknowledge only what you are able to observe and measure. You recklessly push through to your discoveries with no thought of the consequences.”  p. 57

Early the following morning, and after the monkey’s brain has died, Cory receives a call from Forest Ranger White telling him that a plane has crashed in the nearby hills. White cannot get hold of Schratt, the on-call doctor, so Cory agrees to go in his place.
There follows a grisly chapter describing the journey to the crash scene, the carnage there, and the medical work undertaken. One of the two men Cory attends to is Donovan, whose legs he has to amputate in an emergency operation in the kitchen of the Ranger White’s station. Donovan’s critical condition worsens as they descend the mountain on horseback and, when Cory realises Donovan is going to die, he takes him to his laboratory in town rather than the hospital in Phoenix so he can remove his brain (initially with the aid of his wife Janice):

When the instruments were ready, I picked out the scalpel and made a semicircular incision in the skin just above the right ear, continuing the incision around the back of the head to the upper surface of the left ear. I pulled the scalpel forward until it completely exposed the top of the calvarium. There was very little bleeding from the surfaces I had exposed.
Taking the Gigli saw, I made an incision in the bony vault completely around the skull. To leave the brain uninjured, I was very careful not to cut through the duramater. I then lifted off the entire top of the cranial vault in toto.
The glistening surface of the duramater was still warm to my finger’s touch.
I made the same semi-circular incision in the duramater that I had in the outer skin.
I pulled the dura forward and there lay exposed—Donovan’s brain!
Donovan’s breathing stopped. White asphyxis due to cardiac failure began. There was no time to apply stimulants. That would have taken precious minutes. I had to open his brain while he was still alive.
I made that mistake before with the Capuchin, and I could not take any risk now. I heard Janice at the phone talking to Phoenix. Schratt was on his way back. She repeated the information loudly so I could hear.
If Schratt’s Ford didn’t break down!
Janice came in. She stopped, seeing me at work over the body.
“Come here,” I ordered gruffly. I wanted to give her no time to think. She had studied medicine to please me and have the chance to be closer to me. Concentrated, cool, precise even in emergencies, she was an ideal nurse. But, like Schratt, she deeply resented the work I was doing, for it took me away from her and she was jealous. I was married to my apparatus and scalpels.  p. 61

Schratt appears part way through the operation and replaces Janice as his assistant:

Schratt impulsively hid his face in his hands and stood motionless for seconds. When he uncovered his face again, his expression had changed. He had known what I was going to do as soon as he entered the laboratory. I was violating his creed and ethics, but he did not refuse to help me, though I had no power to coerce him.
The potential frustrated Pasteur had broken through and Schratt’s vocation was stronger than his conscience. I knew that afterwards he would have pangs of remorse, fits of repentance he would try to drown in tequila. He knew it too but he helped me.  p. 61

And after they have finished and put the brain in a fluid tank:

“Better hurry,” Schratt said, pulling off his gloves. “They may come for the body any minute.” His face suddenly looked gray and shriveled. He nodded toward the body.
“Better get him in shape. Stuff some cotton in the skull or the eyes might fall in.”
I filled the skull cavity with cotton bandages and replaced the cranium, taping it with adhesive. I pulled the scalp back over the calvarium, then I bandaged the head carefully and had foresight enough to soak a few drops of Donovan’s blood into the bandages as if a wound from the accident had bled through.
I eagerly turned to see if the brain was still alive but Schratt stopped me.
“We have done all we can,” he said. “Let’s get the body out of here. You wouldn’t want them to see that?” He indicated the brain with a jerky movement of his head. “If we get the body out into the sun, it will decompose fast. I don’t want an autopsy.”
Excitement had fuddled my judgment, and I submitted to Schratt. But he did not seem to enjoy his new authority.  p. 62

Schratt is later pressured into signing the death certificate.
So far this probably seems like a standard ‘Mad Scientist’ story—perhaps with more medical detail than usual—but that observation would inaccurately summarise the work. For one thing Cory is no megalomaniacal madman, but a cool and rational if obsessive individual. Also, the surgical language above informs not only the medical procedures undertaken by Cory but also his dispassionate, objective view of humanity.
This is Cory with his wife, Janice, later in the story (she feels sorry for Schratt who has lost his job because he did not attend the crash site):

“May I sit down?” I asked. I had not been in her room for months.
She nodded and went on in the same quiet voice. “Schratt lost his Job.” She looked at me as if I could have prevented his misfortune.
“I know. What could I do?” I replied.
She nodded again, but not in confirmation of my words. “You did nothing to help him,”
For a moment I was stunned. Was this a rebuke from Janice?
“Did he say so?”
“He’s desperate,” she answered.
“Like most drunkards, he shows signs of [Korsakoff’s] psychosis, if you remember the symptoms from your lectures. Lessening of the power of observation, inability to correlate new experiences with the apperceptive mass, conjectures, retrograde amnesia. . . .”
Her face was sad.
“I’ve invited him to live with us,” she said. “I hope you won’t refuse. He can have the room off the back garden, and he won’t disturb you.”
Her kindness had no limits. She would have filled the house with hoboes if I were willing.
“Now we’re stuck with him for the rest of his life! Pretty smart! I have to buy his discretion. He knows that he knows too much about my activities and he means to cash in on it.”
She did not answer, but she paled and her mouth grew very white.
It was her house. She could do whatever she liked with it. She paid for all the machines and experiments. I was completely dependent on her and she never said a word about it. She may even never have thought of it.
But I wanted to be free!
Janice did not want to fight. Her expression grew soft as she withdrew into a shell where no rough word and no hard blow could reach her. She surrendered her personality and won, as she always did, by refusing to defend herself.
“All right,” I said. “Did Schratt tell you Webster offered me his job? Maybe I ought to have taken it. Maybe I will.”
She smiled kindly, understandingly. She knew my work consumed all my time and thought. Even the fact of our marriage had been dissolved in my work’s acid domination. She knew I could not divert my strength.  p. 67

There is more of this clinical observation when Cory meets Chloe Donovan, Donovan’s daughter:

I knew women like this well from my years at the hospital. [They have to have the admiration of a male before they can be at ease with themselves.]2 They are erotomaniacs, only happy as long as they are sure of a man’s adoration.
Her nose, short and turned up, showed a slight thickening of the lesser alar cartilage, a sure sign that it had been worked on by a plastic surgeon.
I remembered her story. She had been a stout, plain girl with a hooked nose, had married three times in quick succession and always big brutal men. After the third unhappy marriage, which ended in a scandal, she had her nose remodeled and changed her character completely.
She dieted away forty pounds and when she found she had become handsome, she enwrapped herself in a new aura as in a cloak, became elusive with her friends, egocentric to the point of mental unbalance. She gave up her promiscuousness and concentrated on herself in a quiet, narcissistic way.  p. 65

The above passage is from a visit that Cory makes to Phoenix after Donovan’s death, where the hospital authorities interview him. Cory meets with the medical superintendent, and is present when he dismisses Schratt. Cory also notes, when he visits the morgue, that someone has disturbed the bandages on the head of the corpse.
In the meeting with Donovan’s son and daughter, Cory is asked about what their father said before he died (it later materializes that they are looking for a large sum of money) but he tells them Donovan was unconscious, and leaves. He returns home and rigs up a lighting system that illuminates when the brain is awake.
After this fast-paced, visceral, and proto-Ballardian3 start, the focus turns to Cory’s work in trying to communicate with Donovan’s brain. When Schratt visits the lab he suggests communication by telepathy, introducing what will be a prominent plot driver in the novel, but initially the idea goes nowhere. However, while listening to the radio, Cory has an idea to use an amplifier and aerial to increase the strength of the brain’s electrical transmissions. The brain grows and gets stronger and, in due course, starts communicating with Cory, initially by left-handed automatic handwriting (Cory is right-handed). The information provided by Donovan to Cory sets up the rest of the story.
After this very good beginning the novel unfortunately devolves, to a large extent, into a standard mystery plot (multiple spoilers follow). Donovan eventually achieves limited communication and motor control of Cory and gets him to go to LA to do an errand. Later, there is a blackmail attempt by a reporter, and the discovery of an anonymous bank account that provides Cory with the funds to pay him off; Cory also visits Donovan’s old assistant, Anton Sternli, and picks up a safety box key. After this, Cory goes to see a lawyer called Fuller and gets him to defend a low-life convict called Hinds, who murdered his mother and faces the death penalty.

Throughout all this Donovan gets stronger and increases his control over Cory, who seems broadly happy about this, accepting it as part of his experiment. There is another meeting with Chloe, the daughter, and Cory learns of the connection between Donovan and Hinds, and why the former is attempting to get the murderer released. This particular plot thread brings the story to an over-melodramatic climax, with Donovan taking over complete control of Cory and attempting to kill a thirteen year old girl (one of the prosecution witnesses in the case against Hinds) before later trying to murder Cory’s wife Janice.
Schratt forestalls this attempt on Janice’s life by killing Donovan’s brain, something that he planned for some time but had been unable to do because of the brain’s telepathy—if Donovan had realised what Schratt was planning it would have killed him by stopping his heart, as it did another individual—so he had to wait until the brain was distracted.
Interestingly, Schratt reveals in a note to Cory and Janice how he prevented Donovan from reading his mind, and reveals the secret behind a rhyme that appears several times earlier in the story:

To protect myself from giving away my intention to the brain, I use a very simple trick. I remember a silly tongue twister I learned as a child. My mother practiced it with me to cure me of a lisp.
Now I repeat the lines incessantly, whenever the lamp is burning and the brain awake.
“Amidst the mists and coldest frosts he thrusts his fists against the posts and still insists he sees the ghosts!”
While I say this sentence continuously, no thought can possibly enter my brain. I have connected a buzzer with the lamp to warn me if I should ever overlook the light and go on writing when the brain is awake.  p. 118

This passage is from a work published a decade before The Demolished Man, and I wondered if this is where Alfred Bester got the idea.
This climax is, to be honest, the weakest part of the entire novel. Not only is it rather contrived, but it has a couple of plot holes you could drive a bus through (why does Schratt wait for the entire novel before making his move? Why not kill the brain when it was asleep?) Some of the other telepathy detail is a bit odd too, such as Cort tasting nothing when he smokes Donavan’s favourite cigars, or staying sober no matter how much he drinks.
Notwithstanding these criticisms, this is quite a good novel, and one that provides sufficient rewards even for a modern reader. Once beyond the excellent beginning there is much perceptive and philosophical observation to propel one past the shakier parts.

Although I started with the Siodmak novel, the issue actually leads off with the better known The Time Machine by H. G. Wells. This opens at a Victorian dinner party where the subject of time is being discussed. Some of this is conceptually high-end, especially (I suspect) for the period: time as a fourth dimension, remembrance as a form of time travel, etc. However, it is still a huge data dump, and parts read like something from Jules Verne and not H. G. Wells:4

“Now, It Is very remarkable that this is so extensively overlooked,” continued the Philosophical Inventor, with a slight accession of cheerfulness. “Really this is what is meant by the Fourth Dimension, though some people who talk about the Fourth Dimension do not know they mean it. It is only another way of looking at Time. There is no difference between Time and any of the three dimensions of Space except that our consciousness moves along it. But some foolish people have got hold of the wrong side of that idea. You have all heard what they have to say about this Fourth Dimension?”
“I have not,” said the Provincial Mayor.
“It is simply this, that space, as our mathematicians have it, is spoken of as having three dimensions, which one may call Length, Breadth, and Thickness, and is always definable by reference to these planes, each at right angles to the others. But some philosophical people have been asking why three dimensions particularly—why not another direction at right angles to the other three?—and have even tried to construct a Four-Dimensional geometry. Professor Simon Newcomb was expounding this to the New York Mathematical Society only a month or so ago. You know how on a flat surface, which has only two dimensions, we can represent a figure of a Three-Dimensional solid, and similarly they think that by models of three dimensions they could represent one of four—if they could master the perspective of the thing: See?”
“I think so,” murmured the Provincial Mayor [. . .]”  p. 13

The above illustrates another irritation of this chapter in that, in common with a lot of SF, the characters are not only ciphers but here are even labelled as such (the others are the “Psychologist”, the “Very Young Man”, the “Medical Man”, etc.), all of which gives it an unrealistic, stilted feel.
After quite a lot of discussion, the Inventor goes and gets a small device and returns with it, explaining that it is a model before sending it into the future. He then shows them the full size model he has constructed. This setup chapter finishes with a leap forward to the next week’s dinner party, where the Inventor turns up late, dishevelled, and famished. He agrees to tell them his story, but only after he has tidied himself up and eaten.
After they retire to the smoking room, he begins his tale, starting with the physical sensations felt and seen as he travelled forward in time:

“I drew a breath, set my teeth, gripped the starting lever with both my hands, and went off with a thud. The laboratory got hazy and went dark. Mrs. Watchett came in, and walked, apparently without seeing me, toward the garden door. I suppose it took her a minute or so to traverse the place, but to me she seemed to shoot across the room like a rocket. I pressed the lever over to its extreme position. The night came like the turning out of a lamp, and in another moment came to-morrow. The laboratory grew faint and hazy, then fainter and ever fainter. To-morrow night came black, then day again, night again, day again, faster and faster still.
[. . .]
“As I put on pace, day followed night, like the flap, flap, flap of some rotating body. The dim suggestion of the laboratory seemed presently to fall away from me, and I saw the sun hopping swiftly across the sky, leaping it every minute, and every minute marking a day. I suppose the laboratory had been destroyed, and I had come into the open air.
[. . .]
“Presently, as I went on, still gaining velocity, the palpitation of night and day merged into one continuous grayness; the sky took on a wonderful deepness of blue, a splendid luminous color like that of early twilight; the jerking sun became a streak of fire, a brilliant arch In space, the moon a fainter fluctuating band; and I could see nothing of the stars, save now and then a brighter circle flickering in the blue.
“The landscape was misty and vague. I was still on the hillside upon which this house now stands, and the shoulder rose above me gray and dim. I saw trees growing and changing like puffs of vapor, now brown, now green; they grew, spread, fluctuated, and passed away. I saw huge buildings rise up faint and fair, and pass like dreams. The whole surface of the earth seemed changing—melting and flowing under my eyes. The little hands upon the dials that registered my speed raced round faster and faster. Presently I noted that the sun belt swayed up and down, from solstice to solstice, in a minute or less, and that, consequently, my pace was over a year a minute; and minute by minute the white snow flashed across the world and vanished, and was followed by the bright, brief green of spring.  p. 18-19

When he arrives in the future he appears beside the white marble statue of a sphinx, and in the middle of a hail storm. After the weather clears a group of small child-like people come to him and, garland him in flowers, and take him to one of their buildings.

The rest of the chapter provides a description of his surroundings and the people he has met. As well as the latter’s diminutive stature, they are childish in nature, vegetarians, and have a short attention span (I thought for a moment he had arrived in 2018). Interspersed with the (at times rather boring) descriptive matter are a number of philosophical musings about the social and scientific changes that may have spawned this era:

“Seeing the ease and security in which these people were living, I felt that this close resemblance of the sexes was, after all, what one would expect; for the strength of a man and the softness of a woman, the institution of the family, and the differentiation of occupations are mere militant necessities of an age of physical force. Where population is balanced and abundant, much child-bearing becomes an evil rather than a blessing to the State; where violence comes but rarely and offspring are secure, there is less necessity—indeed there is no necessity—of an efficient family, and the specialization of the sexes with reference to their children’s needs disappears. We see some beginnings of this even in our own time, and in this future age it was complete.  p. 24

Radical stuff for its time, I imagine.
Matters take a darker turn when the Inventor realises that his time machine has gone missing. He starts searching for it, alarming and upsetting the natives, but he manages to repair relations by saving one of the women, Weena, from drowning, and later befriends her.
The Inventor also notices ghostly figures in the dawn, and later sees one close up—an albino, ape-like creature, with huge eyes and a dislike for the light. When he later sees one disappear down a huge ventilation shaft, he theorises that this future society has stratified into two forms, and names the two races the Eloi (the surface dwellers) and the Morlocks (the subterranean apes):

“But at first, starting from the problems of our own age, it seemed as clear as daylight to me that the gradual widening of the present merely temporary and social difference of the capitalist from the laborer was the key to the explanation.
“No doubt it will seem grotesque enough to you and wildly incredible, and yet even now there are circumstances that point in the way things have gone. There is a tendency plainly enough to utilize underground space for the less ornamental purposes of civilization; there is the Metropolitan Railway in London, for instance, and all these new electric railways; there are subways, and underground workrooms, restaurants, and so forth.
“Evidently, I thought, this tendency had increased until industry had gradually lost sight of the day, going into larger and larger underground factories, in which the workers would spend an increasing amount of their time. Even now, an East End worker lives in such artificial conditions as practically to be cut off from the natural/surface of the earth and the clear sky altogether.
“Then again, the exclusive tendency of richer people, due, no doubt, to the increasing refinement of their education and the widening gulf between them and the rude violence of the poor, is already leading to the closing of considerable portions of the surface of the country against these latter. About London, for instance, perhaps half the prettier country is shut up from such intrusion. And the same widening gulf, due to the length and expense of the higher education process and the increased facilities for, and temptation toward, forming refined habits among the rich, will make that frequent exchange between class and class, that promotion and intermarriage which at present retards the splitting of our species along the lines of social stratification, less and less frequent.  p. 34

The problems of social mobility in the Nineteenth Century.
We learn more about the Morlocks when the Inventor goes down the one of the shafts and has a close encounter with them in the dark, only just escaping their clutches by using his matches to create light and drive them away.
Next, he makes for the Palace of the Green Pavilion, a building he saw on an earlier expedition. He and Weena fail to reach it before nightfall, and they sleep overnight in a forest:

“Above me shone the stars, for the night was clear. I felt a certain sense of friendly comfort in their twinkling. All the old constellations had gone from the sky, however, for that slow movement that is imperceptible in a dozen human lifetimes, had long ago rearranged them in unfamiliar groupings. But the Milky Way, it seemed to me, was still the same tattered streamer of star dust as of yore. Southward—as I judged it—was a very bright red star that was new to me. It was even more splendid than our own green Sirius. Amid all these scintillating points of light, one planet shone kindly and steadily like the face of an old friend.
“Looking at these stars suddenly dwarfed my own troubles and all the gravities of terrestrial life. I thought of their unfathomable distance, and the slow, inevitable drift of their movements out of the unknown past into the unknown future. I thought of the great precessional cycle that the pole of the earth describes in the heavens. Only forty times had that silent revolution occurred during all the years I had traversed. And during those few revolutions, all the activity, all the traditions, the carefully planned organizations, the nations, languages, literature, aspirations, even the mere memory of man as I knew man, had been swept out of existence.  p. 40

Later that night the Inventor recalls a memory from his underground trip among the Morlocks: the meat he saw on one of their tables was an Eloi . . . . These degenerate workers are eating the degenerate rich.
The next day the pair tour the Pavillion, a ruined museum, and the Inventor picks up a number of useful items: camphor, matches, an iron bar, etc., which sets him up for the story’s climax: on their way back the Morlocks catch up with the pair in the dark so he lights some of the camphor, which eventually results in a hellish forest fire that kills Weena and many of the Morlocks. The Inventor kills more of them on a knoll, as they blindly attempt to take shelter with him.
The Morlocks launch one final attack on the Inventor when he gets back to the Sphinx, where he finds the doors open and the time machine inside. He escapes their trap.
The story ends with a trip to the far future, where the Inventor provides an interesting description of an Earth that is dying:

“I stopped very gently and sat upon the Time Machine looking around me.
“The sky was no longer blue. Northeastward it was inky black, and out of the blackness shone brightly and steadily the pale white stars. Overhead it was a deep Indian red, and starless, and southeastward it grew brighter to where, cut by the horizon, lay the motionless hull of the huge red sun.
“The rocks about me were of a harsh reddish color, and all the trace of life that I could see at first was the intensely green vegetation that covered every projecting point on its southeastern side. It was the same rich green that one sees on forest moss or on the lichen in caves, plants which, like these, grow in a perpetual twilight.
“The Machine was standing on a sloping beach. The sea stretched away to the southwest to rise into a sharp bright horizon against the wan sky. There were no breakers and no waves, for not a breath of wind was stirring. Only a slight oily swell rose and fell like a gentle breathing, and showed that the eternal sea was still moving and living. And along the margin where the water sometimes broke was a thick incrustation of salt—pink under the lurid sky.
“There was a sense of oppression in my head and I noticed that I was breathing fast. The sensations reminded me of my only experience of mountaineering, and from that I judged the air was more rarifled than it is now.  p. 49-50

A couple of the giant crabs attack the Inventor but are unsuccessful.

Overall this, like the Siodmak, is an uneven piece (in among the scientific detail and social commentary there are some quite tedious descriptive passages) but, once again, it has enough nuggets of interest to keep the reader going.

The Cover is by an artist I’ve never heard of before, Norman Saunders. I can’t say I am particularly impressed by its inaccurate and clichéd portrayal of what I presume is a scene from Well’s novel, nor its execution. The original improves on the latter as it isn’t marred by the magazine’s masthead.5
The Interior artwork has a fine, if overly romanticised, title page by Virgil Finlay for the Wells. Lawrence is the artist for the Siodmak.
The Readers’ Viewpoint, essentially the letters column, starts off with a brief introduction by Mary Gnaedinger which namechecks several fantasy collectors and the suggestions they have made for stories in future issues of Famous Fantastic Mysteries (there appears to have been a change of sourcing policy that has prompted these communications), and notes the magazine’s popularity in various fan magazines and polls.
The first letter is from a 15-year-old Bob Silverberg:

Dear Editress:
The stories in the April 1950 issue of F.F.M. were most enjoyable: “The Secret People” and the novelette by Clarke. John Beynon is, of course, the pen name of John Beynon Harris, a British author who flourished in stf until the war.
The change in policy is most welcome. I suggest publication of “The Time Stream” by John Taine. One of the most popular serials ever to appear in Gernsback’s Wonder Stories. Dec. 1931, Jan. Feb.  Mar. 1932 issues.
Also, I recommend a few of the remaining Haggard Stories (“She and Alan,” “ Wisdom’s Daughter” ) and “The Land That Time Forgot,” a rare one by Burroughs, which appeared, for one place, in Amazing Stories Feb. Mar. April 1927.

He goes on mention the issues of the magazine he is looking for, and plugs his fanzine, Spaceship.
A long letters column follows. Most of the letters are in response to what seems a superlative April issue, with raves for the Benyon (Wyndham) novel, and good notices for the Clarke story, and even the Coblentz poem! There are more raves for the Bok illustrations. A few comment that they thought Finlay’s work was subpar.
There are also many suggestions for novels and stories to run, including one from Jim Fleming in Sharon, KA, who requests Donovan’s Brain. Done.
Joseph Jensky, from Hartford, CO, provides a letter that sheds some light on the acquisitions policy change:

Congratulations!
The word is so simple and yet it conveys all your readers’ heartfelt thanks. Your new policy of printing stories from other sources than the publications of the old Munsey group and stories never appearing in magazines before, will be greeted with three loud cheers, I am sure.
[. . .]
If you are to use stories from other mags, use those that are hard to get, such as stories from the old Unusual Stories and Marvel Tales. From Blue Book, Saturday Evening Post, Colliers and other similar slicks, you can really gain some of the finer stories.  p. 124

He goes on to add how he managed to improve magazine’s distribution at his local Greyhound Bus Terminal from no issues at all to eight, and that in three hours five of them had gone. Give that man a job in the publisher’s distribution office and we may not have the magazine crash of the late 50s.
Bruce Lane from Minneapolis, MN, has a complaint about the covers:

I will make another appeal for less flashy covers: if Lawrence must draw pin-ups, can’t he confine them to the inner pages? Every time I buy a copy of F.F.M. I have the feeling that people are making little circles with their fingers to their temples. What’s more, I get plenty of sidewise glances here at home. I’ll grant that a pretty girl does liven up a sometimes dull cover, but can’t she wear enough clothes to keep from being arrested, or freezing?  p. 122

An interesting issue, and definitely one for those interested in the history of the field.  ●

_____________________

1. Perhaps I was particularly aware of Siodmak’s novel because he had a rare SF short story in the third issue of F&SF I ever bought (September 1976). I also have a vague memory of its New English Library SF Masterworks book cover staring out at me, but cannot find any trace of it ever being published in this series.
Siodmak had a very interesting life and career. His Wikipedia page is here, and SFE page here. If you can get hold of it, there is an fascinating interview in Eric Leif Davin’s Pioneers of Wonder: Conversations With the Founders of Science Fiction (Amazon USA).

2. The bracketed text is in the book but not the magazine version. The text differences between the magazine and book versions run to three thousand words of cuts in the former (~50,000 vs. ~53,000 for uncorrected scans).
There are minor edits throughout the book, with the bulk missing from the entries for November 22nd, 28th, 29th, and December 12th (approx. 500, 550, 200, and 150 words cut); there are another 300 words cut from the ending (from May 15th onwards).
Some of these edits should probably have remained in—the passage below shows what is cut (underlined) from a telephone call between Schratt and Cory on November 22nd, a passage that reinforces the idea of the former’s plot to kill Donovan:

I phoned Schratt before I packed to leave for Washington Junction, to tell him I was on the way. The operator had to ring several times before there was an answer.
“I was asleep,” Schratt explained, but his voice sounded wide awake.
“How are you Patrick?”
I told him I would be home next day. He indicated no enthusiasm; I had the impression my return embarrassed him. I was afraid something had gone wrong with the brain.
“Oh no,” Schratt answered hastily. “Everything is fine. I just measured the electric discharge. It increases rapidly in output, close to five thousand microvolts now. The brain has grown twice its original size, too. If this continues, we shall have to have a bigger flask. I have enough brain ash for the serum. You needn’t worry, Patrick!”
He was very eager to dispel my uneasiness, but did not encourage me to return He wanted me to stay in Los Angeles and go wherever the brain told me to. He talked as if he were carrying out the experiment and I were the apprentice.
“But there is no reason to stay here.” I was surprised to find myself on the defensive. “I have found out everything I wanted to know. No use hunting down facts I already have.”
Schratt objected as glibly as if he had thought this out in advance: “But you still don’t know why Donovan ordered you to Los Angeles! Is the brain’s thinking logical or not? Have you found out whether it works according to a preconceived plan? Are its orders just a blurred outburst, void of reason, or is it proceeding systematically toward a fixed conclusion? I think you are obliged to find out whether this apparently exuberant growth of cell tissues destroys the organized process of thinking or augments it. Only then you will know whether the brain alone can carry out the process of thought or the whole central nervous system is interdependent.”
I was at a loss to answer. Schratt had swamped me with questions.
His feverish interest puzzled me and I could not dismiss the suspicion that he assumed this urgency to keep me away.
“By the way,” he went on, “how is Janice? Did you see her? She is at Cedars of Lebanon”
“I’ve talked to her,” I answered, “but haven’t seen her yet.”
“You ought to,” he said. This time there was honest concern in his voice
“I may,” I answered, “but even so, I’ll be back tomorrow.”
He had nothing to reply. We hung up.

Other cuts are more inconsequential, such as this passage about Cory and Janice’s relationship from the end of the November 28th passage, which reiterates previous subject matter:

I asked Janice. Finally, after thinking it over for a day, she came to the conclusion it must be a rhyme to cure people of lisping. That sounds likely, but why should the brain repeat such a line? Janice and I avoid mentioning the brain. She is waiting for me to speak first, but I have not the slightest intention of bringing up the subject. She knows too much already; it disturbs me to see her ponder about it. Whatever comes into Janice’s mind is written all over her face. She would be the worst secret agent in the world.
But I am getting used again to having her around. Actually during the few hours she leaves me with another nurse in her place I feel uneasy, as if something might happen and only she could help me.
When she is not around I sometimes become sentimental about her. I recall the day when I was hitchhiking my way back from Santa Barbara to the hospital and she gave me a lift. How often she waited patiently in her car to chauffeur me around; I had to live on the twenty dollars the hospital paid its interns.
She had always been willing to give me a lift. That seems to be her function in life.
She is patient. She always was. And persistent.
She made up her mind to marry me. She did. She wanted to get me away from Washington Junction—here I am. Now she is waiting to win me back to her.
She knows when to be around and when to leave me alone. She is like a fine voltmeter, recording the slightest variations in current.
How much happiness she could give to some people, instead of wasting her strength on me!
I must talk to her about that one day.

3. By proto-Ballardian I mean (a) the clinical language and viewpoint, and (b) the obsessive narrator and his embrace of, or at least indifference to, the increasing control Donovan exerts over him. (What is it they say about Ballard protagonists: they embrace their catastrophes rather than fight them?)
If J. G. Ballard had been a pulp writer in 1940s America using the ‘Mad Scientist’ trope, you wonder if this is the kind of thing he would be writing, albeit with better prose.

4. From my hazy memories of Brian W. Aldiss’s Billion Year Spree, I seem to recall that Vernian fiction (the US model of SF) is idea driven, Wellsian fiction (the occasional UK model) more focused on social concerns and character. I shall add Aldiss’s book to my reading list and correct this no-doubt mangled paraphrase in due course.

5. There is a good selection of Sanders’ work at the Pulpcovers website. The original cover painting and cover are here; a collection of his work is here.  ●

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

New Worlds SF #148, March 1965

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #31 (March 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
All the King’s Men • novelette by Barrington J. Bayley ∗∗
Sunjammer • reprint novelette by Arthur C. Clarke
First Dawn • short story by Donald Malcolm
Dune Limbo • novel extract by J. G. Ballard —
Escape from Evening • novelette by Michael Moorcock
The Uncivil War • short story by Robert J. Tilley

Non-fiction:
Cover
Interior artwork • by Thomson, uncredited
Symbols for the Sixties • editorial
Voyage to the End of the Universe • film review by Alan Dodd
“That Is Not Oil, Madam. That Is Jellied Consomme” • book reviews by Langdon Jones
Story Ratings No. 146
Letters to the Editor
Amateur Magazines

_____________________

The fiction in this issue leads off with the first of two novelettes. All the King’s Men, by Barrington J. Bayley, takes place on a future Earth where Britain, Brazil and parts of Africa are controlled by alien invaders while the rest of the globe remains unaffected. The story is narrated by Smith, one of the alien King’s advisors, and tells of the events leading to a rebellion, the climax of which occurs in the Atlantic between the opposing alien-directed navies of Britain and Brazil.
The story is principally concerned with describing the intellectual and cultural differences between the aliens and humanity: one example of this is when a human delegation arrives at the court to petition the King for a reduction in the length of the working week (which is sixty hours due to preparations for the looming war). The King listens to their concerns and then deliberates:

He spent a little while in the throne room, peering through thresholds, no doubt, gazing at pools and wondering about the mountainous. Then he returned and offered the petitioners a concession of ten minutes off the working week. This was the greatest check he thought he could allow on his big industrial drive.
They argued angrily about it, until things grew out of hand and the King ordered me to dismiss them. I had to have it done forcibly. Any one of the alien courtiers could have managed it single-handed by mere show of the weapons on his person, but instead I called in a twenty-man human bodyguard, thinking that to be ejected by their own countrymen might reduce their sense of solidarity.
All the humans of the court exuded uneasiness. But they needn’t have worried. To judge by the King and his men, nothing might have happened. They held their positions with that same crystalline intelligence which they had carried through ten years of occupation. I was beginning to learn that this static appearance did not wholly result from unintelligibility, but that they actually maintained a constant internal state irrespective of external conditions. Because of this, they were unaware that the scene that had just been enacted comprised a minor climax. Living in a planar mentality, the very idea of climax was not apparent to them.  p. 15

There are several sections like this which are of interest but the story spends a lot of its time going nowhere, making it slightly dull at times.
Sunjammer by Arthur C. Clarke first appeared in Boy’s Life (March 1964), the magazine of the American Boy Scouts organisation, and it provided a high quality reprint for the New Worlds to use (few if any UK readers would have seen the original publication). There aren’t any illustrations in New Worlds for the story, a tale of interplanetary sailing ships taking part in a race to the Moon and back, but it got the cover on Boy’s Life, and was lavishly illustrated by Robert McCall inside. I’ve included a few of these illustrations below as a respite from my maunderings:

Clarke’s story starts with this:

The enormous disc of sail strained at its rigging, already filled with the wind that blew between the worlds. In three minutes the race would begin, yet now John Merton felt more relaxed, more at peace, than at any time for the past year. Whatever happened when the Commodore gave the starting signal, whether Diana carried him to victory or defeat, he had achieved his ambition. After a lifetime spent in designing ships for others, now he would sail his own.

The rest of the story is a skilful example of lucid and integrated exposition:

[He] was checking the tension in the rigging. The needles of all the dynamometers were steady; the immense sail was taut, its mirror surface sparkling and glittering gloriously in the sun.
To Merton, floating weightless at the periscope, it seemed to fill the sky. As well it might—for out there were fifty million square feet of sail, linked to his capsule by almost a hundred miles of rigging. All the canvas of all the tea-clippers that had once raced like clouds across the China seas, sewn into one gigantic sheet, could not match the single sail that Diana had spread beneath the sun. Yet it was little more substantial than a soap-bubble; that two square miles of aluminised plastic was only a few millionths of an inch thick.  p. 27

There is more detail in a radio interview with Merton:

“Hold your hands out to the Sun,” he’d said. “What do you feel? Heat, of course. But there’s pressure as well—though you’ve never noticed it, because it’s so tiny. Over the area of your hands, it only comes to about a millionth of an ounce.
“But out in space, even a pressure as small as that can be important—for it’s acting all the time, hour after hour, day after day. Unlike rocket fuel, it’s free and unlimited. If we want to, we can use it; we can build sails to catch the radiation blowing from the Sun.”
[. . .]
“Of course, its acceleration will be tiny—about a thousandth of a g. That doesn’t seem much, but let’s see what it means. “It means that in the first second, we’ll move about a fifth of an inch. I suppose a healthy snail could do better than that. But after a minute, we’ve covered sixty feet, and will be doing just over a mile an hour. That’s not bad, for something driven by pure sunlight! After an hour, we’re forty miles from our starting point, and will be moving at eighty miles an hour. Please remember that in space there’s no friction, so once you start anything moving, it will keep going forever. You’ll be surprised when I tell you what our thousandth-of-a-g sailing boat will be doing at the end of a day’s run. Almost two thousand miles an hour!  p. 28

The rest of the story details the various incidents that occur during the race (some sailships manoeuvre to put others in the shade, an updated equivalent of old ocean-going ships becalming each other; other sailships fail due to design problems, etc.). Then, before the race can be completed there is the warning of a potentially fatal solar storm, which means the competitors must be rescued by the escort rockets. This sets the scene for a sense of wonder ending (spoiler): rather than jettisoning the sail to avoid fouling the approaching rescue craft, Merton dons his space suit and abandons ship. Diana, with its sail still deployed, will continue to accelerate past the Moon and out of the solar system.
A very good piece of modern SF.

Regardless of how good or otherwise First Dawn by Donald Malcolm is it was almost inevitably going to be becalmed by the Clarke. In Malcolm’s story, a mole-like alien on a non-rotating planet watches humans build massive rocket engines on its world. Once they are finished building them they start the engines, and the mole’s dark world begins turning towards its first dawn. I wasn’t entirely convinced about the mechanics of this, or the speed with which the world starts turning, but the ending is okay in a poetical sense of wonder way.

Dune Limbo by J. G. Ballard is an extract from his new novel The Drought. It has a very long and quite boring synopsis (see above) that eventually places its protagonist at a series of immense salt drifts beside the coast. After a couple more dull descriptive pages from the extract itself, it finally gets going with scene where Ransom and his tribe steal tidal water (and the associated fish) from another group.
There are some striking passages in this, such as the description of Ransom’s home, a beached ship:

Overhead the sunlight shone on the curving stemplates of the wrecked lightship, giving the portholes a glassy opaque look like the eyes of dead fish. In fact, this stranded leviathan, submerged beyond sight of the sea in this concentration of its most destructive element, had rotted as much as any whale would have done in ten years. Often Ransom entered the hulk, searching for pieces of piping or valve gear, but the engine room and gangways had rusted into grotesque hanging gardens of corroded metal.
Below the stern, partly sheltered from the prevailing easterly winds by the flat blade of the rudder, was Ransom’s shack. He had built it from the rusty motorcar bodies he had hauled down from the shore and piled on top of one another. Its bulging shell, puffed out here and there by a car’s bulbous nose or trunk, resembled the carapace of a cancerous turtle.  p. 60-61

Or this one, which limns the mental space these post-apocalyptic survivors inhabit:

Ransom gazed around the drab interior of the shack. The decline in his life in the five years since Judith had come to live with him needed no underlining, but he realized that this was part of the continuous decline of all the beach settlements. It was true that he now had the task of feeding them both, and that Judith made little contribution to their survival, but she did at least guard their meagre fish and water stocks while he was away. Raids on the isolated outcasts had now become more frequent.
However, it was not this that held them together, but their awareness that only with each other could they keep alive some faint shadow of their former personalities, whatever their defects, and arrest the gradual numbing of sense and identity that was the unseen gradient of the dune limbo. Like all purgatories, the beach was a waiting ground, the endless stretches of wet salt sucking away from them all but the hardest core of themselves. These tiny nodes of identity glimmered faintly in the grey light of the limbo, as this zone of nothingness waited for them to dissolve and deliquesce like the few crystals dried by the sun.  p. 64

In the latter part of this you almost feel the language (“unseen gradient of the dune limbo”, etc.) forcing you into the same mental space as the characters.
After the first couple of pages I rather liked this, and am surprised that Moorcock didn’t serialise the whole novel (I assume that Moorcock would rather have used this than Tubb’s novel which starts next issue).2 I’ll have to reread it.

Escape from Evening by Michael Moorcock is either the second and last ‘Scar-Faced Brooder’ story, or the sequel to The Time Dweller (New Worlds #139, February 1964), depending on your point of view. It starts on the Moon with Pepin Hunchback, a malcontent unsuited to the artificial environment of lunar society, boarding a rocket to the dying Earth so he can live a natural existence.
When he arrives at the Earth city of Barbart he tells the natives that he wants to settle there. However, he cannot fit in and, before long, becomes restless once more. When he hears tantalising hints that the citizens of another city called Lanjis Liho can time travel he decides to go there, hoping he will be able to return to a more suitable Golden Age.
He rather foolishly elects to journey alone to Lanjis Lho—there are blood sucking oozers to contend with, as well as other perils—and, sure enough, has to be saved by the Wanderer (a character from the previous story). Pepin later encounters Tall Laughter, Scarface Brooder’s sister (Brooder was also a  character in the last story, and is now the Chronarch of Lanjis Lho).
Once they arrive at the city, Tall Laughter takes Pepin to see Scarface Brooder so he can ask him about time travel. Brooder tells Pepin it is impossible for him to go back in time, and Pepin leaves, frustrated. Later, in Tall Laughter’s house, she tells Pepin that even if it was possible for him to travel in time he would not be satisfied:

“Your yearning, Pepin Hunchback, is not for the past as it was,” she was saying softly. “It is for a world that never existed—a Paradise, a Golden Age. Men have always spoken of such a time in history—but such an idyllic world is a yearning for childhood, not the past, for lost innocence. It is childhood we wish to return to.”
He looked up and smiled bitterly. “My childhood was not idyllic,” he said. “I was a mistake. My birth was an accident. I had no friends, no peace of mind.”
“You had your wonderment, your illusion, your hopes. Even if you could return to Earth’s past—you would not be happy.”
“Earth’s present is decadent. Here the decadence is part of the process of evolution, on Moon it is artificial, that is all. Earth’s past was never truly decadent.”
“One cannot recapture the past.”
“An old saying—yet your ability disproves that.”
“You do not know, Pepin Hunchback,” she said almost sadly.  p. 90

Tall Laughter goes on to reveal the existence of a disused Time Ship, which Pepin later steals. He finds (spoiler) that the past is a formless limbo and the future an acid trip.
After he is rescued by Tall Laughter and Scar Faced Brooder, there is an explanation of the structure of time that is little better than gobbledygook:

[Tall Laughter said,] “Tell him why he found only limbo in the past.”
“Yes,” said Pepin, turning to stare at the Chronarch. “Tell me.”
“I’ll try. Imagine Time as a straight line along which the physical universe is moving. At a certain point on that line the physical universe exists. But if we move away from the present, backward or forward, what do we find?”
Again Pepin shook his head.
“We find what you found—for by leaving the present, we also leave the physical universe. You see, Pepin, when we leave our native Time stream, we move into others which are, in relation to us, above Time. There is a central stream along which our universe moves—we call this the Megaflow. As it moves it absorbs the stuff of Time—absorbs the chronons, as we call them, but leaves nothing behind. Chronons constitute the future—they are infinite. The reason you found nothing in the past is because, in a sense, space eats the chronons but cannot replace them.”
“You mean Earth absorbs this—this temporal energy but emits none herself—like a beast prowling through Time gobbling it up but excreting nothing.” Pepin spoke with a faint return of interest. “Yes, I understand.”  p. 97

I wish I did.
This story is all over the place. It rambles in multiple directions for thirty or so pages, trots out the above and then sputters to a stop. Having enjoyed its predecessor, I was a bit disappointed with this one.3
The Uncivil War by Robert J. Tilley (the cover designer for a couple of recent issues) is back with a short story that has what I have come to describe as a ‘Big Sigh’ beginning:

“There’s nothing in the star-littered universe,” said the old space-dog, genially, “that sets a body up like a dram of gleeb-juice. True, eh, lad?”  p. 99

It continues in this vein with the man’s pirate/sailor speech contrasting with the mannered tone of the narrator, who is interviewing him. The interviewee tells the reporter about a spaceship on which he served and, in particular, of one journey that involved ferrying diplomats to trade talks.
During this trip an unplanned landing on an unknown planet to effect repairs saw the diplomats going off in an air car, and they stumble upon the planets’ inhabitants. The latter are engaged in conflict with others of their kind, and want to know what side the diplomats are on:

“They are at present waiting for us to identify ourselves as the emissaries of either Mif, the God-of-Strength-through-Deadly-Insult, come to teach them the ultimate insult that will strike the enemy a mortal blow, or those of his opposite number, Fungoo, the dreaded God-of-Treachery-and-Deceit, come to destroy them from within. It seems—”  p. 108

The story then turns into a quest for the greatest insult (spoiler: it is to be ignored).
This is all played for laughs but suffers from several deficiencies in this respect. First, and key, is it is not that funny; second, it isn’t apparent it is a comedy (as opposed to badly written) until a couple of pages in; third, it is too long; and, finally, the comedy is draped over a story that is weak and, in places, confusing (I’m thinking here of when they communicate with the missing diplomats, and how they get back to the ship—but maybe I was skimming by this point). It does, in its defence, raise the odd smile (the last line, etc.) but this doesn’t entirely compensate.

There is an uncredited Cover for this issue and little in the way of Interior artwork (perhaps a result of the change of publishing schedule to monthly). The Thomson piece for the Bayley story is one of his better efforts. The other piece looks like it may be by Gilmore.
Symbols for the Sixties, an uncredited editorial, though probably by Moorcock, starts with this:

In this issue you will find perhaps the widest variety of stories we have published at one time. They are stories representative of most of the forms taken by present-day SF—Clarke’s clear, factual speculation on a possible development in space-travel, Ballard’s fascinating surrealistic allegory, Bayley’s abstract and philosophical view of an alternative system of thought, the baroque Escape from Evening, and good variations on the conventional space story by Malcolm and Tilley. The first four are set on or near our own planet, yet they are all undoubtedly SF. They illustrate an increasing tendency in modern SF to stick close to home and deal with aspects of human life set against humanity’s natural background. The day of the space-story in serious SF seems all but over, the day of planetary exploration is waning and writers appear to be deciding that exploration of the human mind, its capacities and defects, is more rewarding.  p. 2

The beginning of ‘Inner Space’?
The rest of this editorial, a ‘manifesto’ one, has some interesting passages:

[SF] must be reshaped and new symbols found to reflect the mood of the sixties [. . .] too many of today’s stories are using the terms of the thirties, forties and fifties, terms which are becoming increasingly unrelated to present-day society. They feel that a good story, no matter what form it takes, is best when it applies to Now and that a story intended to apply to Now cannot do its job if written in terms applying to Then.
Part of the trouble could be that the young writer studies the work of a past generation and concludes that this is how to write a story. It was; it isn’t now.  p. 2-3

We need more writers who reflect the pragmatic mood of today, who use images apt for today, who employ symbols gathered from the world of today, who use sophisticated writing techniques that can match the other techniques of today, who employ characters fitted for the society of today. Like all good writing, good SF must relate primarily to the time in which it is written; a writer must write primarily for his own generation.
[. . .]
He can learn from his predecessors, but he should not imitate them.  p. 3

We feel that, in many ways, the image of North Country born Fred Hoyle driving a huge Buick convertible through a Californian summer, talking of the significance of quasars, is much more up-to-date that an image of a space-ship bearing a military-technician bending over a bench on which reposes a new secret electronic device for foxing the alien invaders.  p. 3

It ends with a comment about the “sense of wonder” controversy that “occasionally rages in the Guest Editorials and the letter columns”. Whether this refers the absence of a sense of wonder in the reiteration of earlier work, or whether it is absent in new work because of its content, I am not sure.
Voyage to the End of the Universe is a positive film review by Alan Dodd about a film that does not sound at all promising.
“That Is Not Oil, Madam. That Is Jellied Consomme” by Langdon Jones is a three page review of the collection The Weird Ones (Dobson, 1965).4 He reviews each story in some depth, apart from one or two (irritating) examples:

Sentiment, Inc. by Poul Anderson has much the same fault [“There were many interesting ethical problems and emotional situations that are merely skirted round, when they should have been gone into much more fully.”]. This seems a characteristic of a lot of American SF. The really interesting ideas that come out of a situation are often referred to obliquely, if at all. In this story the ‘villain’ turns out—almost predictably—to be a Russian spy. Still, the Soviets are not called ‘Reds,’ which I guess is something.  p. 118-119

What are the “interesting ethical problems and emotional situations” that are ignored in this story? What should be done with them? Give us a clue.
He points to the Mack Reynolds story, The Hunted Ones (Science Fiction Stories, November 1959), as the best in the book before ending with:

The general standard of most of the stories in this collection is equivalent to that of an average SF magazine. I don’t think that this justifies the hard covers or the 15s. price tag.  p. 120

Or the three page review in your magazine.
I commented on Story Ratings No. 146 when I recently reviewed that issue.5
Letters to the Editor has an interesting batch of correspondence. It leads off with a letter from Edward Mackin (of ‘Hek Belov’ fame) who writes in about Moorcock’s recent serial The Shores of Death: he wonders where the rest of it is and provides a plot skeleton.
The next letter, from A. D. P. Cornelius, Cambridge, makes some interesting points about the difference between British and American SF:

Thank you—and the editor of Science Fantasy—for excellent reviews of Brian Aldiss’s Greybeard. Sadly not everyone has your discrimination. I am thinking particularly of certain reviews that have appeared in the United States—and especially of Ron Goulart’s recent review in Fantasy and Science Fiction. When will these literal-minded dimwits cease reading everything that comes in front of their eyes on the level of a boys’ adventure story? Goulart seemed to see the novel purely as ‘yet another cataclysm-novel of the kind the English specialise in’. Didn’t he realise that, as in certain other British novels that begin with some sort of cataclysm, the cataclysm was simply a starting-point to a book which discusses, among other things, the poignant problem of childless old-age?
This, and other reviews, reminded me that it was high time we in this country stopped looking to America for our SF standards. Apart from a few honourable exceptions, the American scene has become barren in the last few years, whereas the British scene has suddenly become alive and dynamic—leading the field. From Swift onwards it has been a tradition among British writers to make use of imaginative concepts and landscapes in order to discuss whatever point they wish about human behaviour in some form or other. H. G. Wells, Wyndham Lewis, C. S. Lewis, Aldous Huxley, George Orwell, Angus Wilson—and Brian W. Aldiss—have all written in this tradition. The similarity between their work and the stuff appearing in American pulps for the last forty years is merely superficial. Anyone with the ability to see past the merely superficial must surely accept that?  p. 123

The editor offers a copy of Introducing SF to anyone who “takes up the gauntlet”.
This is followed by another interesting letter from Elizabeth French Biscoe, Dublin, continuing the recent discussion about Langdon Jones’ I Remember Anita (New Worlds #144, September-October 1964):

I suggest that the story cannot be made right because it is based on an unawareness of one of “those solid principles for the criticism of SF” which are mentioned in the Editorial.
The principle in question is defined by Kingsley Amis in his New Maps of Hell. He says that ordinary fiction can be compared with portrait painting, while SF can be compared with landscape painting. This pictorial comparison explains what puzzles many of us—why SF and sex rarely get on together. While no personal experience (portrait) may be complete without sex, in a landscape sex is detectable only as a pair of distant lovers beneath the trees. It is the trees (non-human forces) that are important.
Consider Gainsborough. He kept his portraits and landscapes utterly separate. When he painted a lady in a big hat she filled the whole picture, but in his landscapes human beings are of the same value as bushes or cows: dots to emphasize the height of his spreading trees.
The tremendous (and as yet unlived) imaginary experiences on which SF is based are the trees beneath which man and his sex life are dots, and if an artist (author) makes his dots too big he gets his picture (story) out of proportion. That is what happened in I Remember, Anita.
By contrast, the proportions are right in Tunnel of Love in NWSF 146. The mystery of the tunnel (not love) dominates the story.  p. 124

Thought provoking, but I’m not sure I entirely agree (where does Frederik Pohl’s Gateway fit into this?)
P. Johnson, Kent, comments on the review columns:

Congratulations on the monstrous book reviews plus the superabundance of reviewers! I notice, however, that SF reviewers have to work on two planes. It reminds me of a mainstream review of SF which described the latest Heinlein novel as a rattling good adventure yarn of its kind, and Miller’s Conditionally Human as not up to the standard of A Canticle for Leibowitz which left you guessing where the Miller stood in relation to the Heinlein. I feel you do the same. You describe The Dark Light Years as a failure, and then slip gear and recommend The Paradox Men. This is an admirable ability, and fulfils the spirit of the Aldiss extract from SF Horizons, but am I wrong in thinking that you preferred the Aldiss ‘failure’ to many other less ambitions successes?
James Colvin lets politics intrude into his reviews . . . and I would feel happier about Colvin if he would use adjectives other than ‘reactionary’ to condemn Anderson and Heinlein . . . p. 125-126

He finishes by saying they should leave Analog to do the science articles.
There is an editorial response:

About The Paradox Men, we don’t think we slipped gear there—Dark Light Years was a failure (we felt) but Paradox Men fulfilled its author’s intention.  p. 126

The column finishes with an earnest letter from Malcolm E. Wright (14), of Basildon. The editor encourages him to send his short stories in to the magazine.
After the Letters there is a review of Amateur Magazines. Two are from future New Worlds authors, Charles Platt and Graham M. Hall.
There is this comment about Ed Meskys’ Niekas #9:

Much larger and more substantial than most of its British counterparts, Niekas 9 contains some good stuff by Anthony Boucher, Philip K. Dick (on The Man in the High Castle), John Baxter and others.
Tolkien fans will be interested in the long glossary of names, terms, etc. used in Middle Earth. Production is clean and readable—again superior to most of the British SF fan magazines.  p. 127

And this on Peter R. Weston’s Zenith #6:6

Still has an excellent standard of production and the material seems to be improving, although the magazine-reviewer appears rooted somewhat in the past. If you’re rooted in the past and proud of it, then you’ll probably enjoy the reviews. This one’s worth watching—it shows promise.

A better issue than usual, thanks to the Clarke and Ballard pieces (not a phrase I expect to be using again).  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall’s review in Vector #31 gives the line-up of authors and then says, “One is tempted to leave the review at that”, but goes on to describe Clarke’s story as “typically excellent”, that Malcolm is “a master of the pen”, and that he finds Ballard’s piece “hard to judge” as he “is an avid Ballard anti-fan”. He adds that “more bumf is written about Ballard than almost anyone else writing SF today”, and that “this piece is easily as good as most of The Drowning World with its unsymbolic symbolism, first-rate imagery and colossal obscurity”. I was a little surprised at these comments as, given the artistic leanings of Hall’s later story Sun Push (New Worlds #170, January 1967), I would have thought he would have been a fan.
He says of the Moorcock story that “it’s hard to say whether it is bad or good” but that he “didn’t like it”. He adds that Moorcock “paints beautiful backgrounds and then neglects his main characters”.
The Tilley “stands on its own feet as a fair yarn”, and ATom’s one illustration is “way above average”.

2. Perhaps the magazine serial rights for The Drought were not available, or perhaps it was something to do with the fact that the first three chapters of the novel were published in Ambit #23, Spring 1965, Ballard’s first publication in Martin Bax’s long running literary magazine.

3. The Time Dweller (New Worlds #139, February 1964) starts with Scar Faced Brooder riding his seal across the surface of an Earth in its twilight years. He has left the city of Lanjis Lho after a disagreement with the ruling Chronach, and is making his way to one of the inland cities. En route he meets another man called the Wanderer. They eat and drink (during which it becomes clear that human body chemistry has changed significantly) and then, after sleeping for a while in the Wanderer’s tent, Scar Faced Brooder moves on to Brabart.
He is taken on a tour of the town by one of the locals:

The Barbartian introduced himself as Mokof, took the Brooder’s arm and led him through the series of squares, triangles and circles formed by the buildings, to come at length to the great central plaza and stare up at the pulsing, monstrous machine of burnished bronze.
“This machine supplies the city with its life,” Mokof informed him. “And also regulates our lives.” He pointed at the disc which the Brooder had noted earlier. “Do you know what that is, my friend ?”
“No. I am afraid I do not. Could you explain ?”
“It’s a
clock. It measures the hours of the day,” he broke off, noting the Brooder’s puzzlement. “That is to say it measures time.”
“Ah ! I am with you at last. But a strange device, surely, for it cannot measure a great deal of time with that little circular dial. How does it note the flow . . .?”
“We call a period of sunlight ‘day’ and a period of darkness ‘night.’ We divide each into twelve hours—”
“Then the period of sunlight and the period of darkness are equal ? I had thought . . . ”
“No, we call them equal for convenience, since they vary. The twelve divisions are called hours. When the hands reach twelve, they begin to count around again . . .”
“Fantastic !” the Brooder was astounded. “You mean you recycle the same period of time round and round again. A marvellous idea. Wonderful! I had not thought it possible.”
  p. 91-92

This cognitive dissonance forms the crux of the story.
Later, he is arrested for eating at a prohibited time and imprisoned, but is asked the next day to repair their clock. On examining it Scar Faced Brooder realises it will shortly fail in a lethal blast of radiation, and this forces him to learn to time travel, after which he repairs the mechanism. After this he returns home to tell the Chronarch about his ability to time-travel.
The final scene involves another conversation with the Wanderer, where Scar Faced Brooder realises that humankind’s journeys in space are coming to an end and will be replaced with journeys in time.
Although this probably doesn’t sound that attractive a proposition when reduced to its constituent parts, the time concept and exotic far future setting make for an interesting piece.

4. The editorship of The Weird Ones is the subject of some uncertainty according to its ISFDB page.

5. The story ratings for this issue were published in #150:

No great surprises there. The Moorcock presumably did better than it should have because of its length.

6. Niekas #9 is available on Fanac.org here. Unfortunately their page for Zenith/Speculation doesn’t have a copy of #6, just (thanks to John Boston) #9 and #12.
In Zenith #9 there is a response (in the magazine review column Brickbats and Roses) to the New Worlds comments that their magazine reviewer (Terry Jeeves) “appears rooted somewhat in the past”:

Firmly rooted in the past as I am, and needing no acting-assistant-under-paid-deputy to scratch by back when it itches, I am not pandering to the gallery when I say that I welcome ANALOG’s return to the digest size.  p.3

There is more argy-bargy about various subjects in the letter column, Point-Counterpoint, as well as various comments about the magazines of the time, both pro and con. Jim Groves says, “New Worlds and Science Fantasy are now the worst of the magazine crop”.
Ivor Latto gives a considered view of the differences between New Worlds and Science Fantasy:

It isn’t quite fair to say that New Worlds is superior to Science Fantasy; the relative quality of the stories published is much the same. But Moorcock’s crusading zeal has certainly given NW a new lease of life, not entirely because of the stories he publishes, but also because of the way his philosophy is backed up in editorials, articles, and reviews. Either Bonfiglioli has no similar urge to convert, or he has been persuaded to accept NW as the dominant half of the Compact twins.
Maybe the publishers feel that they can’t afford to fund reviews, articles and letters in both mags. Whatever the reason [probably Bonfiglioli’s reportedly relaxed attitude to work] SF certainly suffers for it in a certain purposelessness. It’s always been like that, for some reason, a weak sister to NW in its departments, although usually superior in the stories it prints.  p. 19

There is more about Moorcock and New Worlds and how they are probably, in their own way, seeking after a “Sense of Wonder”.
Peter Weston replies:

The trouble is that science fiction fans are ‘hooked’ on the type of SF current in a particular period, and when the bias of SF storytelling changes, the readers don’t change. This is the reason for the dissatisfaction expressed by some readers because of ‘modern’ SF. They cannot assimilate a diet lacking in the essential vitamins supplied by ‘1950’s SF’.
But there is hope yet….many readers are attracted to the style of ‘action SF’ introduced in such magazines as Space SF, Infinity, and SF Adventures, and they really should try the Galaxy twins Worlds of If & Worlds of Tomorrow. The latter magazine especially is, in the editor’s opinion, the best SF magazine (of its type) on the market today. The January & March 1965 issues are really excellent, introducing also a new writer, Larry Niven, a real ‘find’.  p. 19

Peter Weston also comments more generally about the current magazine scene in his editorial (as part of his argument that the SF field—circa 1965—is in the middle of a “Golden Age”):

Magazines have lost ground in the battle to keep their reader’s interest, but they are to a large extent now on the upswing in readability and science-fictional appeal (even to older fans). Analog, since the reversion to the small size has shown a staggering increase in the quality of material, Galaxy, long much-abused, is now producing roughly one good issue in two, while companion magazines If and Worlds of Tomorrow are producing science fiction that is among the best ever written. There is still rubbish in good measure, but Editor Pohl’s policy of straightforward action with a respectably science fictional treatment, is paying remarkable dividends. The recent trend towards amorphous and meaningless stories may have been greatly overrated; certainly this looks to be one of the ‘blind alleys’ explored by speculative fiction.  p. 2

Worth a look.  ●

rssrss

2 thoughts on “New Worlds SF #148, March 1965

  1. Rich Horton

    I really like “All the King’s Men”. Very strange in a very useful way, which is kind of Bayley’s thing.

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Shoreline of Infinity #12, Summer 2018

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Noel Chadwick; Deputy Editor, Russell Jones

Do Not Pass GO • short story by Helen Jackson
Aeaea • short story by Robert Gordon
Jammers • short story by Anton Rose
Paradise Bird • short story by J. S. Richardson
Sand and Rust • short story by W. G. White +
Sleeping Fire • short story by Elva Hills
The Square Fella • reprint short story by Duncan Lunan +

Cover • by Siobahn McDonald
Interior artwork • by Jackie Duckworth, Tsu Beel, Jessica Good, Mark Toner, Sydney Jordan
Pull Up a Log • editorial by Iain Maloney
The Beachcomber Presents • comic strip by Mark Toner
SF Caledonia: Crossing the Starfield • essay by Chris Kelso
Moon: Flash Fiction Competition
Interview: Ada Palmer
• interview by Eris Young
Noise and Sparks: Who’s Afraid of the Big Bad Genre • essay by Ruth E. J. Booth
Reviews
Multiverse
• poetry by Caroline Hardaker, Ken Poyner; art portfolio (x3) by Elizabeth Dulemba
Spot the Difference • puzzle by Tsu Beel

_____________________

Shoreline of Infinity is a Scottish SF magazine that started in Summer 2015, founded by, according to the masthead,2 Editor Noel Chadwick and Art Director Mark Toner. I bought a copy of #2, and since then I’ve been getting regular emails when a new issue came out. That said, I never got around to reading the issue I bought or buying any others: the covers3 on #7 to #11 put me off a little to be honest, but it was mostly apathy. When the email announcing the publication of the ‘twelfth’ issue arrived (actually the fourteenth, don’t ask) I looked at the Cover, looked at it again, and then found myself on the site buying a copy.4 This striking piece did exactly what it should do—sell the magazine. As Shoreline normally does a series of covers by one artist we will hopefully see more work by Siobahn McDonald.

Before I start talking about the fiction I suppose I should note that I wasn’t expecting much from this semi-pro magazine (it pays low rates), but I found a couple of items of interest.

Do Not Pass GO by Helen Jackson, unfortunately, isn’t one of them. It is a rather unbelievable story about a banker asking a time-travel agency employee called Joanna to plant a board game called Property is Best in the eighteenth century. The aim of this is to introduce generations of children to the benefits of capitalism, and therefore improve the reputation of Bankers.
Joanna goes back in time, meets with a woman called Elizabeth Magie, and passes on the idea. However, when Joanna returns to the future she finds that banks have been replaced with co-operative societies, and things are different in many other ways too (elderflower cordial in her fridge and not Chardonnay, etc.). She goes back in time again, and on this occasion misplaces the board game, returning to see an angry banker annoyed at comments about “Monopoly money”.
Apart from the fact that none of this ever convinces, it feels like something written after a chattering classes dinner party in 2008 (something not helped by a reference to the bankrupt Toys R Us chain of stores).

Aeaea by Robert Gordon5 has a man waking up in a body that isn’t his, and doing a manual engineering task while watched by robot guards. The next day he finds himself in a different body with a different job, and so on. Most of the rest of the story follows the standard ‘person in an enigmatic situation figuring out the nature of their reality’ template, and this is well enough done with the unravelling of the puzzle proceeding in an engaging way amid a convincing atmosphere of oppression.
Unfortunately it all rather falls apart at the end when (spoiler) the narrator and the other imates revolt, initially stopping work and then organising an escape. A computer then appears and implores them to stay, but fails: they to break out into an apocalyptic landscape and are rescued by a shuttle from a nearby spaceship. There is some further exposition about the ship being lost, the absence of star maps etc., but the planetbound computer is never convincingly explained, nor is the body switching, nor why a star going civilisation has humans doing manual manufacturing work overseen by robot guards.
This is worth reading for the first three-quarters or so but it’s broken by the ending.

Jammers by Anton Rose opens on a gritty urban estate of the future, in a society of low fertility rates and camera surveillance.

Max’s first jam was on the camera inside the tenement single-room apartment he shared with his mother. Every single-room apartment had one installed, and their metallic eyeballs followed the residents, documenting every movement. Always recording.
The camera never really bothered Max. He knew what privacy meant in theory, but he had never known it, which meant he never felt its absence. But his mother remembered earlier times, and she regaled him with stories dripping thick with nostalgia. Max often found her crying, and shouting at the camera perched above them, the unknown surveyor.  p. 40

After learning to code and hacking into the camera system in the tower block he lives in, Max graduates from running errands for the local Mr Big to working for another gangster. The latter’s team specialises in the car-jacking of automatic cars and the robbery of the occupants.
The final act (spoiler) involves a car-jacking where the passenger is that rarest of things, a pregnant woman. As the group prepare to cash in by selling the child, Max faces a moral dilemma.
This one isn’t entirely convincing (the continual camera surveillance goes nowhere) but there are some signs of promise here.

Paradise Bird by J. S. Richardson is a short vignette about a hermaphrodite asteroid dweller and a visiting male spaceman. It reads like the synopsis of a longer piece, and the editor should have sent this back and asked for that story instead.

One of the two highlights of the issue is Sand and Rust, by W. G. White, which is about a long desert caravan of people who follow a huge machine called the Chaperone in the hope that it will eventually lead them to a promised land called the Halt. Once in every fifty years the machine stops and the ‘First Rider’, the leader of the caravan, must offer themselves to the machine as a sacrifice.
The current First Rider is Enoch, who briefs his successor before he gives himself to the machine:

“Where did it come from?” Kimberly stared at the Chaperone, her raven hair whipping around her shoulders with the winds.
The colossal machine blinked into the night, huge spotlights rotating on its crown.
Hell, Enoch almost said. Or someplace equally sinister. “Did your father not teach you, child?” He rocked back on his chair and sipped on one of Nash’s homebrews. The alcohol burnt his throat as it went down, but worked to dull his senses. A sober man walking into the mouth of a lion was not brave, he was a fool.
“He said we built it.”
“Our forebears did, aye. Or so the rumour goes, at least. They discovered the Halt you see, girl. They discovered Heaven. But God didn’t like that. No, God didn’t like that one bit, so He sent a blight to destroy us before we could get there. The Halt’s for the dead, He says. It’s no place for the living.” Enoch stood and hobbled to the front of his porch. At long last, the Chaperone had stopped. “Perhaps He was right to keep us away, but where’s left for us to go now?” said Enoch. “He made us forget where it is, but the Chaperone knows. The Chaperone takes us there in defiance of God’s word. The Chaperone leads us to Nirvana and we follow, no matter the cost. That’s what they say, anyway. Honestly, girl, if that monster knew where it was going shouldn’t we be there by now?”
“Maybe. Why does it stop?” Kimberly leaned over the railing and swung as low as she could without falling off.
“Knowledge comes at a price. It needs a First Rider to fuel it, to keep it going. Every fifty years, like clockwork, it demands its recompense. One day, dear girl, you’ll be standing where I am now, wondering where your life has gone and what awaits you within that beast.”  p. 66-67

Enoch then goes to the machine. When he enters it he finds that (spoiler) it is a mining machine which has been following a route along the bottom of a dried up Pacific Ocean. He also finds a note from the previous First Rider urging him to kill himself, and let the caravan people maintain their faith. The last line implies that this is what Enoch does.
This is an interesting piece, and has at its core a neat idea, but I would rather have seen the longer novelette this is the start of: one that provides the details of the caravan people’s daily life (what do they do for water, etc.?), and the future shock they experience when told the truth.6 White can write though, and his characterisation, progression, and prose are all pro level (although I wouldn’t have called the new First Rider “Kimberly” or described her hair as “raven”. Do they have ravens in this desert world?) I look forward to his future work.

Sleeping Fire by Elva Hills is about a woman called Reas, who is selected to go to one of the sky cities, and meets a man called Benjamin on her way there. When they arrive they are used as donors to treat the long-lived inhabitants. Eventually (spoiler), they rebel, steal a “regen” ship and escape to Benjamin’s village on the surface below. Benjamin is wounded during the escape so Reas puts him in the regeneration chamber before the shuttle crash-lands. The story ends with Benjamin suspended in a halfway state in a damaged regen unit.
This is too fast paced and has too much action for its length, which makes it difficult to care about what happens to any of the characters.

The last story, The Square Fella by Duncan Lunan (Glasgow Herald, 1st April 1989), previously appeared in his own anthology of Scottish SF called Starfield (The Orkney Press Ltd., 1989). This book is the subject of an introductory essay: SF Caledonia: Crossing the Starfield by Chris Kelso, which tells of his discovery of this item in a Glasgow bookshop before going on to describe the contents. There is a note at the end of the article stating that the anthology is to be reprinted by Shoreline of Infinity in June 2018.7
As to the story7 itself, Lunan’s tale tells of a group of scientists who are in the middle of organising a rocket launch from their world when they are interrupted by a hostile representative of the Church. During one conversation, it becomes apparent that their world is not like ours. One of the scientists describes their world to the Church representative:

“Here is our world, as we perceive it: a great bowl, with the life-giving sea at its centre. As we travel away from the sea, the slope grows ever steeper and the air more thin – as you notice.” The visitor had subsided into a chair and was visibly short of breath. “We are only twenty-five miles upslope. Ten miles from here, you could not remain conscious without breathing apparatus. Seven hundred and fifty miles up, we now know, the atmosphere becomes negligible and there is no vestige of life. By long tradition, the four great mountains on the ridges above us are the corners by which the Gods hold up the world, like a great sheet.
“If they released their hold, the sheet would flatten, the air and water spread out, and life would be extinguished. But can we believe that — how can we believe it — when we learn that the ridges are four thousand miles above us; the mountains seventeen hundred and fifty miles higher still; so that most of the Bowl is barren and lifeless.”
“What alternative is there? Are you an atheist, sir, do you argue that the existence of life in these favoured conditions is an accident?”
“No, no, that’s too absurd to consider. But what we must consider is that the world is not shaped as we see it.”  p. 95

The scientists’ previous work has led them to a theory that they are just one of several bowls on the surface of a huge spherical world, and the rocket’s flightpath is planned to fly once around it and land on the other side of their own bowl.
When it seems that the Church is planning to use the military to prevent the expedition, the rocket is quickly launched, and the rest of the story tells of pilot’s flight into orbit and what he sees (spoiler: their bowl is one of the sides of a vast cube). Although the show and tell of the second part isn’t quite as good as the setup this is still an intriguing piece and, if there had been a magazine market for them at the time, you can imagine it having been the first story in a popular series.

I’ve spoken about the Cover above and would add that I thought the Interior Artwork and general design was also of a good standard (and better than some other pro and semi-pro mags). There is also three page comic strip, The Beachcomber Presents by Mark Toner:

I’ve never been that keen on comic strips in SF magazines to be perfectly honest but, for the most part, this is an innocuous enough piece about people literally living in bubbles discovering that there are others who are not like them. After they meet these people, it ends with a pious line about embracing the “wonders of diversity”.
Spot the Difference is quite a difficult puzzle by Tsu Beel which I enjoyed completing more than I should have (I’ve blurred out the bottom picture so if you want to do it, buy the magazine):

There are several other non-fiction pieces as well as the one I’ve already mentioned. Unfortunately they don’t get off to a good start. At the very beginning of the magazine is Pull Up a Log by Iain Maloney, an editorial by their departing Reviews Editor, and it starts with a historically myopic passage:

In issue 8½, I wrote about Scottish dystopias, looked into the rising tide of pessimism that was sweeping the nation’s artists and readers. We live in interesting times and the outlook for many is bleak, and our science fiction – as science fiction always has – reflects this. Climate change. Populism. Dictators with nuclear weapons. Terrorism. Disease and mass extinctions. Cheery stuff.  p. 3

There appear to be generations of people out there who are unaware that they are living in the best of all possible times. Even if their personal circumstances may not be optimal there have been many recent boons for humankind: huge increases in life expectancy, big reductions in death due to famine, etc. etc. Perhaps they should drag themselves away from social media and read the history of the last hundred years.
Further on there is this:

. . . there’s just so much damn good science fiction out there we need an Asimovian timescale to read it all. And the diversity of it all. Science fiction is no longer the preserve of the spherically-challenged white man in an “I Believe” t-shirt: women, BAME writers, LGBTI authors, SF in translation. It’s all over the book shops and all over our screens.  p. 3

I wasn’t aware that the SF field ever was the “preserve” (according my dictionary an “exclusive area of activity”) of “the spherically-challenged white man”, or at least not since Clare Winger Harris turned up in 1926.2 As it happens the last magazine I read was the October 1942 issue of Unknown Worlds and it features the by-lines of Jane Rice, Babette Rosmond, Ruth Stewart Schenley, and C. L. Moore, as well as artwork from Manuel Isip, a Filipino and one of that magazine’s (and Astounding’s) regular artists (as was his brother and fellow artist Rey Isip).
Further, by the time I started reading SF magazines in the mid-seventies there were many female writers (including multiple award and multiple-award winners), and at least a handful of black ones (including another multiple-award winner), and the first Native American writer I was aware of, Craig Strete. If there weren’t any identifiably gay writers it was, if memory serves, because not many were openly out at the time.
I also owned two anthologies of translated fiction by Maxim Jakubowski, as well as an earlier volume of Soviet SF, possibly others. Alien (1979) had Ripley, a strong female protagonist. I could go on at great length (and usually do).
I realise that my comments probably look like over-zealous nit-picking for what is probably a casually written piece, but this kind of ill-informed stuff gives a distorted view of the field’s history.
Oh, and if the writer is so committed to the diversity he champions he may want to reconsider the language he uses. Would he refer to a “fat black woman” as casually as he does a “spherically-challenged white man”?
Moon: Flash Fiction Competition is a self-explanatory notice.
Interview: Ada Palmer by Eris Young is an interesting conversation with the writer and historian with nuggets like this:

The way we decide who should be envied or admired shifts historically. In medieval times what you admire in a woman – piety, how much time she spends interacting with the church – is not what our celebrity magazines admire about women. When I talk to people who comment on XYZ attribute of a positive future, whether it’s Terra Ignota or another, being implausible, they’ll often cite, human nature is X – often with a component of, people will always selfishly want to get rich. And the answer is, so long as getting rich is an enviable state, some people will. There will still be people who will work really hard to get what’s enviable, but what’s enviable will not necessarily always be the same.  p. 107

Noise and Sparks: Who’s Afraid of the Big Bad Genre by Ruth E. J. Booth is a short but interesting article about how mainstream writers fear their novels being pigeonholed as SF (I think—it is responding to another article I haven’t read).
There is a readable Reviews section, but some of them could do with being a bit shorter (the ones that are closer to a single page seemed the right length).
Multiverse is the title given to a section of poems and illustrations. There are two poems by Caroline Hardaker: I didn’t understand the first one, and the second did not do anything for me (this latter effort seemed a morbid piece about her grandmother and organ/body donation). Ken Poyner’s poem was a mystery to me too.
There are three illustrations by Elizabeth Dulemba. This is my favourite of the three (although the second runs it close):

In conclusion I would say that there is enough here of interest to make this issue worth your time.  ●

_____________________

1. There do not seem to be any reviews at the places I would expect: SFRevu, TangentOnline, etc. Are any review copies sent out?

2. The masthead shows multiple office holders:

3. You can see the covers at the magazine’s ISFDB page. I liked #2-#6 as well as this one.

4. What really happened when I went to the Shoreline site to get a copy was that their Paypal payment page asked me to enter my name, address, email, telephone number, inside leg measurement, etc.: I revolted and sent an email of complaint to the magazine asking why they needed all this detail. The editor kindly replied with a copy of the magazine and has since modified the system. Having been back I still don’t know why they need your name and email address for Paypal payments (don’t they get this from them?) or a 12-character password for a shop account (are they running a nuclear reactor off the back end of their server?) but, if still not one-click, it is a lot better than it was and didn’t prevent me from buying a subscription.

5. Gordon’s story has a number of em-dash errors. In one sentence the copy editor has managed to get the first dash correct and the second one wrong:

One – I inhabit a technological simulation- a virtual reality.  p. 25

I would have thought that the copy editors would have had a global search and replace function set up to replace these.

6. White’s story is the type that caused me most angst when I was editing myself (Spectrum SF, 2001-2003) as it one that I would have wanted major revisions on. In this kind of situation you would tell the writer that there was definitely a publishable story somewhere in their submission, detail the major revisions you wanted and add that, although you couldn’t guarantee to accept the result, you’d read it with a sympathetic eye, be prepared to work on it with them, etc., etc.
What I think the writers really heard when they got their baby back was, “If you cut off its legs and sew them on where the ears are, I may read it again. If I can be bothered.”

7. The ISFDB page for Starfield. The reprint is available at the Shoreline of Infinity site (print only it seems). This is a scan of the cover from my 1989 edition (review in the future hopefully):

8. There are more typos in Lunan’s story (probably introduced at the OCR stage—I hope the reprint of Starfield has been more carefully proofread). On p. 94 “corners” is “comers”, there is an open and not a closed quotation mark after an em-dash two-thirds of the way down on p. 96, and, perhaps the most unfortunate error, “It was the last chance to burn him with his knowledge.” on p. 104 appears as “It was the last chance to bum him with his knowledge.” Perhaps that last one isn’t a typo but part of the diversity agenda in the editorial.  ●

This magazine is available at Shoreline of Infinity, Amazon UK/US (print), Amazon UK/US (digital).

 

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Unknown Worlds v06n03, October 1942

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:1
Fred Smith, Once There Was A Magazine— p. 40-41 (Beccon Publications)
Stefan R. Dziemianowicz, p. 136-8 The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (Starmont, 1991)

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Kay Tarrant

Fiction:
The Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag • novella by Robert A. Heinlein [as by John Riverside] ∗∗∗+
The Frog • short story by P. Schuyler Miller
Magician’s Dinner • novelette by Jane Rice
Letter to an Invisible Woman • short story by Hannes Bok
Are You Run-Down, Tired— • short story by Babette Rosmond and Leonard M. Lake [as by Babette Rosmond Lake]
The New One • short story by Fredric Brown +
The Lie • short story by Richard Louis
The Goddess’ Legacy • short story by Malcolm Jameson +
Compliments of the Author • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Henry Kuttner]

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by Frank Kramer (x10), Kolliker (x3), Smith (x4), M. Isip (x2), Orban (x7)
Of Things Beyond • editorial
Poetry • by Ruth Stewart Schenley, Arte Harbison, Marvin Miller
—And Having Writ— • letters

____________________

This issue leads off with one of the 1943 Retro Hugo novella finalists, The Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag by Robert A. Heinlein (run under the ‘John Riverside’ pseudonym for some reason). This long weird tale starts with Hoag at the doctors, where he is trying to find out the nature of a reddish substance found under his nails. Doctor Potbury tells him it isn’t blood but refuses to offer Hoag any more information, and brusquely tells him to get out. Once Hoag is outside he suffers several other unpleasant encounters with various people, and eventually seeks sanctuary at an anonymous hotel. Once in his room he realises that he can’t remember what he does for a living. Hoag leaves the hotel that morning to go home, but does not arrive until six in the evening. As he washes even more of the red substance from under his nails, he realises he cannot remember what he has been doing during the day.
Hoag then goes to see a hard-boiled husband and wife detective team, (Teddy) Randall & (Cynthia) Craig:

Randall helped him off with his coat, assuring himself in the process that Mr. Hoag was not armed, or—if he was—he had found somewhere other than shoulder or hip to carry a gun. Randall was not suspicious, but he was pragmatically pessimistic.  p. 14

Randall interviews Hoag, who recounts his missing days, a previous stay in a rest home, incurable amnesia, etc. Hoag tells Randall he wants to be watched continuously during the day, so that Randall can report back on what he does during his blackouts. Randall feigns reluctance but agrees when a large fee is offered. After Hoag leaves them, the couple find that he has managed to avoid leaving any fingerprints where he sat, or on the glass he handled, and they find that the hospital he told them about does not exist.
The next day Randall tails Mr Hoag to a tower block, and Cynthia tails them both. During this Cynthia sees Hoag speak to Randall before they enter a tower block.
When Randall reports back later to Cynthia, he tells her that he tailed Hoag to a jewellers on the thirteenth floor, saw him at work there, and that the red substance is jewellers’ rouge. When Cynthia asks Randall about the conversation outside the tower block, he tells her he remembers nothing of the sort. When the couple decide to investigate Hoag’s place of work, they find the tower block has no 13th floor (only a 12th and 14th), and that there is no jewellers business in the building. Disturbed, they decide to give up the case but, before they can do so, Hoag visits them at home that night. He tells them about the garlic he wears to ward off an unknown and indescribable presence, and that he thinks he is being watched from mirrors.

That night Randall has a waking dream where a man in the bedroom mirror summons him to a board meeting on the 13th floor of the tower block the couple visited earlier that day. After he is introduced to the men at the table, their Chairman tells him about “The Bird” and “The Sons of the Bird”:

“In the Beginning,” Stoles stated, “there was the Bird.” He suddenly covered his face with his hands; all the others gathered around the table did likewise.
The Bird—Randall felt a sudden vision of what those two simple words meant when mouthed by this repulsive fat man; no soft and downy chick, but a bird of prey, strong-winged and rapacious—unwinking eyes, whey-colored and staring—purple wattles—but most especially he saw its feet, bird feet, covered with yellow scales, fleshless and taloned and foul from use. Obscene and terrible—
Stoles uncovered his face. “The Bird was alone. Its great wings beat the empty depths of space where there was none to see. But deep within It was the Power and the Power was Life. It looked to the north when there was no north; It looked to the south when there was no south; east and west It looked, and up and down. Then out of the nothingness and out of Its Will It wove the nest.
“The nest was broad and deep and strong. In the nest It laid one hundred eggs. It stayed on the nest and brooded the eggs, thinking Its thoughts, for ten thousand thousand years. When the time was ripe It left the nest and hung it about with lights that the fledglings might see. It watched and waited.
“From each of the hundred eggs a hundred Sons of the Bird were hatched—ten thousand strong. Yet so wide and deep was the nest there was room and to spare for each of them—a kingdom apiece and each was a king—king over the things that creep and crawl and swim and fly and go on all fours, things that had been born from the crevices of the nest, out of the warmth and the waiting.
“Wise and cruel was the Bird, and wise and cruel were the Sons of the Bird. For twice ten thousand thousand years they fought and ruled and the Bird was pleased. Then there were some who decided that they were as wise and strong as the Bird Itself. Out of the stuff of the nest they created creatures like unto themselves and breathed in their nostrils, that they might have sons to serve them and fight for them. But the sons of the Sons were not wise and strong and cruel, but weak and soft and stupid. The Bird was not pleased.
“Down It cast Its Own Sons and let them be chained by the softly stupid— Stop fidgeting, Mr. Randall! I know this is difficult for your little mind, but for once you really must think about something longer than your nose and wider than your mouth, believe me!
“The stupid and the weak could not hold the Sons of the Bird; therefore, the Bird placed among them, here and there, others more powerful, more cruel, and more shrewd, who by craft and cruelty and deceit could circumvent the attempts of the Sons to break free. Then the Bird sat back, well content, and waited for the game to play itself out.
“The game is being played. Therefore, we cannot permit you to interfere with your client, nor to assist him in any way. You see that, don’t you?”
“I don’t see,” shouted Randall, suddenly able to speak, “a damn thing! To hell with the bunch of you! This joke has gone far enough.”  p. 24

The Sons of the Bird then show him Cynthia in a mirror and warn him to leave Hoag alone.
Randall wakes up the next morning thinking the episode was a nightmare, and suggests to Cynthia that they both go with Hoag to his work.
Most of the rest of the story deals with the various plot interactions of Hoag, Randall & Cynthia, and The Sons of the Bird, both in and out of the mirror world.
The climax comes when (spoiler) Hoag is eventually dosed up on scopalimine by the couple so that they can question him. At this point a different personality emerges. He writes a list of things he wants the couple to get for him, and tells them to meet him at a certain place. When they later rendezvous, Hoag explains to the couple that, essentially, their reality is an art work and he is an art critic sent to assess it. He also tells them that The Sons of the Bird are revenants from an earlier version of the work, and they are to be eliminated. Hoag leaves, but not before telling the pair to drive South. They are not to stop: reality will be undergoing a transformation:

A few blocks later Randall saw a patrolman standing on the sidewalk, warming himself in the sun, and watching some boys playing sand-lot football. He pulled up to the curb beside him. “Run down the window, Cyn.”
She complied, then gave a sharp intake of breath and swallowed a scream. He did not scream, but he wanted to.
Outside the open window was no sunlight, no cops, no kids—nothing. Nothing but a gray and formless mist, pulsing slowly as if with inchoate life. They could see nothing of the city through it, not because it was too dense but because it was—empty. No sound came out of it; no movement showed in it.
It merged with the frame of the window and began to drift inside. Randall shouted, “Roll up the window!” She tried to obey, but her hands were nerveless; he reached across her and cranked it up himself, jamming it hard into its seat.
The sunny scene was restored; through the glass they saw the patrolman, the boisterous game, the sidewalk, and the city beyond. Cynthia put a hand on his arm. “Drive on, Teddy!”
“Wait a minute,” he said tensely, and turned to the window beside him. Very cautiously he rolled it down—just a crack, less than an inch. It was enough. The formless gray flux was out there, too; through the glass the city traffic and sunny street were plain, through the opening—nothing.  p. 58

I found this reality altering finale quite sophisticated (for the time) but I realise that, for some readers,2 this may turn the entire piece into a huge shaggy dog story.
An intriguing and readable tale, if an occasionally uneven one.

The Frog by P. Schuyler Miller gets off to an interestingly discursive start with a passage about precocious children, which leads on to the machinations of a wizard’s apprentice, a nasty piece of work called Shagsu. A large part of this story involves him mistreating and generally torturing a frog god required by his master. At the end (spoiler) the biter is bit.

Magician’s Dinner by Jane Rice starts off in her usual lively style:

I have just this minute finished reading an article entitled, “How to Stay Happily Married.” The authoress, though I strongly suspect there should be an “a” before those two “s’s” instead of an “e,” says plain, right out that the reason she has stayed happily married for umteen years is a simple one. She has, forsooth, never had any secrets from her husband.
Before I get into this any deeper I would like to bet any and all takers a case of Scotch against a bottle of sarsaparilla that he isn’t happily married. She may trot about humming merrily and being the essence of sweetness and light but I’ll wager he gets a three-inch layer of goose bumps every time he closes the garage doors and starts his trek to the back porch, thinking as he stumbles along—head sunk on his chest—“Oh, Lordy, what is she going to tell me now?”  p. 65

The story is about Clare, who is organising a dinner for her and her stage-magician husband’s friends. When she faces insurmountable problems Little Allie, a long dead family cook from her childhood, materialises and takes over. Matters proceed in a relatively ordered way until Clare realises that all the requirements for the dinner come from the past:

I leveled an agitated forefinger at the punch bowl. “That,” I squawked, “is the punch bowl my mother used to borrow from my aunt Lena when we had the family reunions.”
“Yes’m.”
“And ten years ago my cousin Robin tipped it over and broke it.”
“Yes’m.”
“Into a thousand pieces.”
“Yes’m.”
“What, in the name of Heaven, is it doing HERE?”
“There wasn’t nothing else big enough.”
“But it was broken and swept up and thrown in the ash can!”
“Yes’m.”
“But it couldn’t be here.”
“No’m.”
“But it is.”
“Yes’m.”
“How . . . how did you . . . did you get it?”
“ I materialized it.”
“I don’t foll— Wait, you mean you said, ‘Abracadabra,’ and it . . . it appeared?”
“No’m. I didn’t say nothing. I just materialized it.”
“Out of thin air!”
“No’m.”
“Out of what?”
“Out of what it was.”
“What was it?”
“Your aunt Lena’s punch bowl.”
“But how, Little Allie? Where?”
“Where? You mean where was it to materialize?”
“Yes.”
“I’m not much account at explaining things, Miss Clare.”
“Try.”
“It’s like this, Miss Clare.” Little Allie drew her brows together in profound concentration. “If something was, it can’t ever not have been, could it?”
“No.”
“And if it can’t ever not have been then it has got to have been a something that was a is once, ain’t it?”
“Yes.”
“And once it has been a is it can’t ever not have been a not be, can it?”
“No.”
“Well, that’s all.”
“But it was broken.”
“Yes’m.”
“But once it was broken, don’t you see, it became a was.”
“Yes’m.”
“Then how—”
“Miss Clare,” Little Allie interrupted, sighing at my lack of intelligence, “to be a was it has to be a is first—there’s no getting around it—and if it was a is no matter if it is a was it is a is where it was and it always will be a is even when it is a was as long as this here punch bowl of your aunt Lena’s has been a is that was.” She halted triumphantly. “I reckon that’s clear, ain’t it?”  p. 73-74

Initially, the dinner is a success, but matters spiral out of control when one of the guests suggests a séance. She is unaware that Little Allie the cook has also assembled, for advice on the visiting guests’ dining preferences, the spirits of their various dead cooks and servants . . . .
Structurally, and in terms of suspension of belief, some of this is slightly shaky (the ghost of Little Allie just turns up out of the blue, for instance), but there are compensating factors. Apart from Rice’s lively style, there is the word play above as well some amusing observation:

The wives continued to arrive and soon the house rang with that peculiar sonance that arises whenever two or more women are gathered together. Like a Chinese talkie run backward, or a group of delirious linguists speaking phonetics from which all the vowels have been painstakingly deleted, or a flock of extremely nervous poultry.
I’m not poking fun at my sex and don’t think it for a minute. We can’t help our group noises any more than men can help theirs and they have a brilliance of tone that is unequaled, except by a bunch of hungry grizzly bears mulling over the badly battered carcass of a mountain goat.  p. 72

Finally, there is an effectively creepy last scene where, during the séance, Clare is transported to the land of the dead:

I can’t describe it. It was like the hush before a dawn. Or the queer, deep, pervading quietness that makes oneself seem the very heart and core of one of those slow, heavy snowstorms that leave the shrubs puffy and white and the tree boughs bent with their cottony burdens and the whole world breathless with spent strength. It was a silence that could be tasted, thick on the tongue as clotted cream. A silence, one felt, that could be fingered like the rich pile of velvet or closed to like Stygian portieres weighted with dust and forgotten yesterdays and the musty smell of dead wood fires. A smothering, stilled silence. The silence of shrouds and tombs and the silence of earth. The earth of grass roots and blind worms. It grew and it grew and it grew like some gigantic black tulip or a pressure gauge going up and up and up[.]3  p. 77

An uneven piece, but one with some impressive parts.

Letter to an Invisible Woman by Hannes Bok is a vignette, in the form of a short letter, about a man falling for a woman who can slow down time (and give the impression that she has disappeared, etc.). It is an okay, if slight and undeveloped piece: I’m a little surprised that Campbell didn’t ask Bok to turn it into a longer story.
After this début piece there is a short teaser for Bok’s novel in the next issue, The Sorcerer’s Ship.

Are You Run-Down, Tired— by Babette Rosmond and Leonard M. Lake concerns a man who finds a wizard who dispenses vitamins and not magical cures. The man later develops a vastly improved physique and stamina, can see in the dark, etc. The one drawback is that his appetite for food substantially increases, which becomes a problem for his new girlfriend at the office. . . . This has (spoiler) a grisly and nonsensical end.

The New One by Fredric Brown starts off with a well done data dump that sets up the story’s premise about how human thought creates mythical beings, as explained by a fire elemental parent to his child:

“But what, papa, if [humans] conceive of a new mythological being? Would he come into existence down here?”
“Of course, kid. That’s how we all got here, one time or another. Why, look at poltergeists, for instance. They’re newcomers. And all this ectoplasm you see floating around and getting in the way, that’s new. And—well, like this big guy Paul Bunyan; he’s only been around here a century or so; he isn’t much older than you are. And lots of others. Of course, they have to get invoked before they show up, but that always gets done sooner or later.”
“Gosh, thanks, papa. I understand you a lot better than I did Ashtaroth. He uses big words like transmogrification and superactualization and what not.”
“O. K., kid, now run along and play. But don’t bring any of those darn water elemental kids back with you. The place gets so full of steam I can’t see.”  p. 87

The rest of the story is about Wally Smith, a man who has struggled with pyromania throughout his life. The reason for his compulsion is supernatural of course—fire elementals from the realm of thought exert influence over him at key moments, and have big plans for him later in his life. Wally has, for the moment, his compulsion under control:

He’d seen a movie newsreel that showed the new flame throwers. If he could get one of those things to operate—
But that desire was subconscious; he didn’t know that it was a big part of the reason he wanted to get into uniform. That was in the fall of ’41 and we weren’t in the war yet. Later, after December, it was still part of the reason he wanted to get in, but not the major part. Wally Smith was a good American; that was even more important than being a good pyromaniac.
Anyway, he’d licked the pyromania. Or thought he had. If it was there, it was buried down deep where most of the time he could avoid thinking about it, and there was a “Thus Far, No Farther” sign across one passage of his mind.
That yen for a flame thrower worried him a bit. Then came Pearl Harbor and Wally Smith had it out with himself to discover whether it was all patriotism that made him want to kill Japs, or whether that yen for a flame thrower figured at all.
And while he mulled it over, things got hotter in the Philippines and the Japs moved down Malaya to Singapore, and there were U-boats off both coasts and it began to look as though his country needed him. And there was a fighting anger in him that told him the hell with whether or not it was pyromania—it was patriotism even more, and he’d worry about the psychiatry of it later.  p. 88

Wally eventually ends up working in a war munitions factory that manufactures TNT (telegraphed earlier in the fire elementals’ conversations about him). Later, he has an ominous conversation with another worker about what would happen if the factory went on fire, and they speculate about the huge conflagration would spread throughout the surrounding area. Shortly after this conversation Wally literally struggles with his demons. Although he tries to resist, Davreth the fire demon exerts control over him, and an attempt at fire setting is described in an effective passage narrated in the second person:

Here it comes. The match was in his hand; his hand was striking the match. The Same. As the first flame he had ever seen, dancing on the end of a match in his father’s hand. While Wally’s stubby little fingers, all those years ago, had reached out for the thing on the end of the stick. The thing that flared there, ever-shapechanging; yellow-red-blue wonder, magic beauty.
The flame.
Wait until the stick has caught fire, too, wait until it’s well ablaze, so stooping down won’t blow it out. A flame’s a tender thing, at first. “No!” cried another part of his mind. “Don’t! Wally, don’t—”
But you can’t stop now, Wally, you can’t “don’t” because Darveth, the fire demon, is in the driver’s seat. He’s stronger than you are, Wally; he’s stronger than any of the others in that nightmare world you’re looking into. Yell for help, Wally, it won’t do you any good.
Yell to any of them. Yell to old Moloch; he won’t listen to you. He’s going to enjoy this, too. Most of them are. Not all. Thor’s standing to one side, not particularly happy about what’s going to happen because he’s a fighting man, but he isn’t big enough to tangle with Darveth. None of them are, over there.
Fire’s king, and all the fire elementals are dancing a dervish dance. Others watching. There’s white-bearded Zeus and someone with a head like a crocodile standing beside him. And Dagon riding Scylla—all the creatures men have conceived, and conceiving—
But none of them will help you, Wally. You’re on your own.  p. 95

Needless to say (spoiler) Wally manages to save the day by mentally yelling for help, and conjuring up a mythical being who arrives to rout the fire elementals. That deity is, of course, Uncle Sam.
This last part is a bit corny, to be honest, but it’s a pretty good read otherwise.

The Lie by Richard Louis is about a man making a deathbed confession to incriminate an innocent man. The last line is a tacked on one that makes no sense, and the whole thing reads like a Probability Zero piece for Unknown.

If there are passing references to the war in other stories (such as Frederic Brown’s), it is front and centre in The Goddess’ Legacy by Malcolm Jameson. This starts in wartime Greece with the narrator observing a Greek waiter paying a bribe to a Gestapo officer:

The part played by Herr Scheer in the furtive transaction was no mystery at all. He was simply a murderous, blood-sucking leech of the type all too frequent in Europe these days. I had known him for some time as the traveling representative of an optical house in Berlin and as such had often had business dealings with him. But with the coming of the troops of the occupation forces he promptly dropped the mask and showed himself in his true colors. Anton Scheer had been the advance man of the dreaded Gestapo. It was from his long-prepared secret lists that hundreds of victims for arrest and spoliation were selected, and from those same lists that the few Hellenic Quislings were appointed to puppet administrative posts. Now that he was the resident chief of Hitler’s secret operatives, his cruelty and rapacity knew no bounds. It was also common knowledge that his zeal for his beloved Fuehrer and Fatherland was not untinged by keen self-interest. In other words, Herr Scheer could be “had.” Enough money, discreetly conveyed, would unlock the tightest prison gates.  p. 100-101

The narrator knows the waiter, called Mike of the Acropolis, from his moonlit visits to those same ruins, and the story goes on to detail Mike’s interaction with the corrupt Nazi and Italian occupiers. These latter subsequently (spoiler) fall foul of his Mike’s Goddess, Pallas, and a well-known mythological monster.
This smoothly written story demonstrates an intimate knowledge of Greek mythology and also chillingly illustrates the realities of Axis occupation (a bleaker view than I expected). Given these attributes I’m surprised this one didn’t appear in the slicks.

Compliments of the Author by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore has a shake-down artist called Tarbell accidentally killing a magician, thereby coming into possession of a special book that gives the owner ten ‘lives’, or warnings of imminent peril. The magician’s familiar, a cat, tells Tarbell he will need them as it is going to kill him.
Between this novel setup and a good last line Tarbell uses up his lives in a number of stock pulp situations: there are scenes in a newspaper office, a high stakes card game, and a stockbroker’s office. The one non-standard scene is where Tarbell goes through a door and finds himself in a surreal landscape with three demons.
This is entertaining if fairly standard pulp fare.

There is a huge amount of Interior artwork in this issue, probably the most I’ve seen in any of the issues of Unknown I’ve looked at so far. All of it, bar a two-page piece by Orban for the Kuttner/Moore novelette is spot, quarter, or half page work. None of it is bad but none particularly grabbed me either. I note in passing that the Jameson story has a spoiler illustration—makes a change from spoiler blurbs I guess.4
Of Things Beyond, Campbell’s editorial, begins by talking about the sciences and shortly afterwards the “nonsciences”. There is then a section on hypnotism before it ends with this:

Telepathy exists. There are too many of those accidental, freak occurrences, plus the studied, mathematical evidence of scientific experimenters, to make it possible to doubt. Meteor falls were reported for centuries before science would admit that meteors existed, and did fall. No one who saw a meteor fall could point to a falling meteor and say, “There, that is what I saw.” But when tens of hundreds of reports come in—something real lies behind them.
Clairvoyance exists—and has been reported too frequently for doubt.
It seems fairly probable that levitation is possible. What gravity is, we don’t know—only that an indefinable, but tangible and measurable something pulls us downward. There have been a considerable number of reported, detailed instances of controlled levitation, of men who lifted and floated in air, or lifted weights without material Prevision and prophecy has been reported, and checked, a goodly number of times. Some men can, somehow, not controllably and at will, however, see the future.
What other powers lie among the immaterial sciences—no one is even trying very hard to find out!  p. 6

An early sign of years of Campbellian nonsense to come.
There is Poetry by Ruth Stewart Schenley (this one has an affecting finish), Arte Harbison (I didn’t get it), and Marvin Miller. The latter is a gloomy one where the narrator reflects that, if he was sure there was no afterlife, he would kill himself. I think we can take it from this that Marv wasn’t a party animal.
—And Having Writ— has a couple of positive mentions of Boucher’s The Compleat Werewolf (another of the 1943 Retro Hugo finalists) and a complaint about a story called Census Taker (by Frank Belknap Long in the April issue) that is missing from the contents page. Campbell replies, “We forgot to make sure the census of stories checked the contents page.”
Finally there are number of ‘wartime’ advertisements, but these are just an excuse for companies to flog the stuff they sell:

Quite a good issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Fred Smith’s review of this issue, in Once There Was A Magazine— (Beccon Publications), states that The Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag is “not quite peak Heinlein” but “is a page-turner full of rather startling ideas”. He adds that the “original plot [. . .] would not be susceptible to close scrutiny!” Of the novelettes he thought the Kuttner was the better, finding the Rice “strictly lightweight”, but admits that the latter is “a nice contrast to some of the more grisly stuff!” He thought that Brown’s short story was the best of that group, finding the rest “fairly minor”, before adding that Jameson’s piece is “slightly more substantial”.
Smith has this comment to make on the pseudonym used for the Heinlein piece:

Robert A Heinlein at this time used the pseudonym ‘Anson MacDonald’ when writing science fiction which did not fit into his planned ‘future history’ and it was slightly surprising, therefore, that he used his own name for his first Unknown pieces. It was even more surprising then that his second novel for the magazine should have been published under the byline ‘John Riverside’ considering how popular he had become and what a ‘draw’ his given name would be.  p. 40

Stefan R. Dziemianowicz, in The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (Starmont, 1991), says of the Heinlein piece, “Although there are several paper tigers running through the story—e.g. seemingly important clues turn out not to be not so important by the end—and although Hoag’s realization dawns on him a little too abruptly for it not to seem merely convenient, the story has impressive philosophical underpinnings.” Of the others, the Frederic Brown piece is the only one he really seems to rate: “One of the few witty war stories to appear in the magazine that wasn’t rendered obsolete with the armistice.” I presume he means “surrender”. He seems to have also liked the Rice: “Touching and amusing, though one has to appreciate Rice’s talent for spinning a fantasy story out of almost nothing fantastic.” Of the others, the Miller has “an unremarkable idea”, the Bok is “forced”, and the Jameson is “very formulaic”.
Dziemianowicz gives the length of Hoag as 40,000 words (and my OCR gives 40,300, so it is probably only just a novel).
I also learned from his review that Babette Rosmond “became editor of Doc Savage in 1944 and The Shadow in 1946.”

2. When I originally read The Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag millions of years ago I noted that “the nature of reality part at the end doesn’t work as well as the [rest].” The other thing that I noticed from those old scribblings is how little of Heinlein I’ve read: half a dozen novels and about a collection’s worth of short stories. I think giving up half way through Stranger in a Strange Land put me off him.

3. This passage from Rice’s story finishes with the line “and I thought wildly, “This is how it feels in a dive bomber.” See what I mean by uneven?

4. The cover image above is a colour-shifted and manipulated version of the December copy (after changing and filling in the background texture I copied and pasted the text and date). I did this as there are no decent images on the internet. If anyone can provide a decent scan of a very good or fine issue, front and back, I’d appreciate it (uncompressed tiff format image, 300 dpi, no preprocessing by the scanner, and lean on the issue so it is perfectly flat, thanks).  ●

rssrss

3 thoughts on “Unknown Worlds v06n03, October 1942

  1. Walker Martin

    I first read my set of UNKNOWN back in 1969 and I still have the note book with my comments. Since then I’ve reread many of the stories and changed my mind about my original ratings. My favorite story by far is Kuttner’s “Compliments of the Author”, followed by Heinlein’s “Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag”. The rest of the stories did not impress me and I found them mediocre.

    Most of the issues of UNKNOWN I’ve enjoyed more than this one but your comments indicate that perhaps I was too tough in my ratings.

    Concerning the Heinlein novella, my notes say “Knight and Miller don’t like this; they think of it as a potboiler. Panshin calls it a favorite of his.”

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      Hi Walker,
      Thanks for your comments about the stories, and those of the others. Although I liked the Heinlein, I wouldn’t necessarily disagree with Knight and Miller’s “potboiler” comment.
      I don’t think you are being that tough with your ratings—your comments seem to match the footnoted reviews more closely than mine.

      Reply
  2. Pingback: The Great SF Stories Volume 4, 1942, edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg | SF MAGAZINES

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Uncanny #18, September/October 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews
Rebecca DeVendra, Tangent Online
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas; Managing Editor, Michi Trota

Fiction:
Henosis • short story by N. K. Jemisin ∗∗
Clearly Lettered in a Mostly Steady Hand • short story by Fran Wilde
Though She Be But Little • short story by C. S. E. Cooney
Down and Out in R’lyeh • novelette by Catherynne M. Valente
Fandom for Robots • short story by Vina Jie-Min Prasad
At Cooney’s • novelette by Delia Sherman
Ghost Town • reprint short story by Malinda Lo

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Ashley Mackenzie
Poetry • by Jo Walton, Brandon O’Brien, Ali Trotta, Gwynne Garfinkle
The Uncanny Valley • editorial by Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas
My Voice-Over Life • essay by Sophie Aldred
Let Me Tell You
• essay by Cecilia Tan
I’m Not the Only One: Why Wonder Woman Doesn’t Need to Stand Alone in Order to Stand Tall • essay by Sarah Kuhn
Resistance 101: Basics of Community Organizing for SF/F Creators and Consumers— Volume Four: “Don’t Let Him Catch You With Your Work Undone”—Activism for the Long Haul • essay by Sam J. Miller and Jean Rice
Changeable Skins, Consummate Catchphrases • essay by Sabrina Vourvoulias
Interview: C. S. E. Cooney • by Julia Rios
Interview: Delia Sherman • by Julia Rios

_____________________

Henosis by N. K. Jemisin is an initially promising story with a time-sliced narrative (Chapter 4 if followed by 2, then 1, then 5, etc.). It starts with a popular writer on his way to an award ceremony when he realises the doors of the limousine are locked. He then notices that the driver is not his usual one and, after questioning him, the writer realises he is being kidnapped to stop him winning an award.
There follows a discussion about writers’ legacies in general and, specifically, the looting of Vonnegut’s grave for his body parts (which presumably puts the story either in a parallel world or the future).
The resolution (spoiler) has the writer losing the award while the winner is taken away to be dismembered. There are some interesting parts to this but it doesn’t really work.
Clearly Lettered in a Mostly Steady Hand by Fran Wilde has the narrator leading someone through a strange exhibit:

We’re keeping the lights low. Any brighter hurts our eyes, bounces off the mirrors. You can still see the finer details, if you lean really close. We’ve left the glass off the fronts, just for you. Touch the sutures, the pins, if you like. Try to push aside the velvet skirting to see the workings below. We’re all like dolls here, with some spare parts. Interchangeable. May I take your hand?
That’s right. Good. Let me catalog our alphabet of differences for you. Here are the heads, the horns, the holes where they tried to let out headaches. Here are the spines, curved like serpents. Here, the jars of jellies with heads too big to be human. A pair of burly palms like beetle’s claws, skin tight over bone.
Here are the doubles and triples, the cephalics, their two legs supporting so much thought. The twins, wrapped around one another like trees. Here is the stone baby, we found him in the trash. See his marble skin, worn away where someone had been touching him too much? We’ve been teaching him his letters.  p. 20

I have no idea what the point of this is (and I read it twice), and am amazed that it got through to the Hugo finalists ballot.
Though She Be But Little by C. S. E. Cooney is an original fantasy about what happened to Emma Anne after the sky went silver (although it is a story that takes a little getting in to). We find out about her, and Captain Howard (who was originally her neighbour Margo before the “D’argenting” but is now a pirate), and the scary Loping Man. Emma fears for her safety if the latter finds her, and this plays out in the second half of the story. The passage that follows, where Emma talks to two stuffed animals who are now ‘alive’, will give you a flavour of the story:

When the sky turned silver, Potter Hill became . . . Something else. Just like everything.
She craned her head over her shoulder, glancing back at the smokestack. The entrance to her hideaway was too high to climb to without assistance from the three-legged chair haphazardly stashed in a nearby bush. Both Captious and Bumptious had poked their noses out of the hole to stare at her with their plastic eyes. They never moved when she was looking.
“You really ought to take us with you,” advised Captious with a look of cunning. “You know the Loping Man is lurking.”
“What can you do?” Emma Anne asked.
“Protect you!” Bumptious asserted stoutly. He was good at assertion.
Emma Anne ignored him. “Anyway. He won’t be around right now. The Loping Man’s not into daylight hours. He’s more crap…” She paused. The word she wanted was vanishing at the edges. “Crap…”
“Craptastic?” guessed Captious.
“No, creep… Crep…”
“Creepissimo? Creepilicious! Creepo-mijito?”
“No! Stop! I know it… It’s… He’s… He’s crepuscular!” She paused, grinning. “You know… Like deer? And rabbits?” Weasel and tiger stared as only stuffed animals can stare. They often chose to desert their sentience as a kind of consequence whenever they thought Emma Anne was getting above herself.  p. 26-27

Parts of this read like Peter Pan on acid, but I mean that in a good way.
While we are talking about literary comparisons, Down and Out in R’lyeh by Catherynne M. Valente feels, I think, like William Burroughs channelling H. P. Lovecraft:

Pazuzu was my eerie from the minute I gibbered out of the spawn-sac and into this trashbin world. Out of one bitch, into another. He ate his mom when he was little, so me and Shit pretty much adopted him into the Niggurath brood. Who would notice one more? Even if he was a Ghast and not a whatever-the-fuck-we-are? Mama Shub strangled Zuzu as lovingly as any of us. These days he’s another regular denizen of Shit’s couch. He kind of looks like a walking, talking, noseless scab on kangaroo legs. Straight up fœtid, was Pazuzu. All the squirmy young shubs hungered him. But my man didn’t have a cultist then. Didn’t care about getting off. Mostly what Zuzu slavered after was to get squamous and hunt himself some gloons. Not THE Gloon. Not the guy named Gloon. You don’t hunt that dank little piece of slug-ass. Not that Elgin marble-looking motherfucker. The slug-god Gloon slithers out the eyes of that effulgy Greek statue it rides around in like a john sliding out of a rented prom limo and it hunts you. Naw, Zuzu hunts posers. Barely larval yuppie scum with Old One pedigrees who gibber around trying to look like Gloon and talk like Gloon and corrupt the mortal world like Gloon when they’re nothing but a bunch of shoggo fuckboys who couldn’t corrupt a goddamn gumdrop without daddy’s protective runes. They’re so fucking dun that when we call them gloons, they think it’s a compliment. But I get Pazuzu. Always have. He kicks those kruggy pukes in the face and feels like he’s making a difference in the world. He isn’t, but, you know. Let a scab dream.  p. 43-44

The story as such is about a group of the younger ones out and about in R’yleh one night, before (spoiler) they burn down Cthulhu’s house.
Although I thought this an okay piece it will be impenetrable to some because of its style and Cthulhu Mythos references. It could have initially done with much less of the former, and a more obvious narrative arc (it’s late on in the story before anything much happens). It could also have done with a few more scenes like this one, where the younger ones walk (or slither) past Cthulhu’s house:

We three eeries gawped up at His porch, the columns, the stonework, the yawning height and depth and intellect-shearing ostentation of that naffgoth wedding cake of a house. That neighborhood was so eel even Azathoth and Hastur got priced out in the Neolithic Era. We hissed at the flowers. No one but no one in R’lyeh could afford a garden—but all around the C-Man’s squalor, millions of black lilies and sicksilver roses writhed and runnelled and strangled each other, gibbering up into empty cottages and walk-ups all around the joint, puking out the windows, living rent-free in houses me and mine could only dream of.
A big, blousy fart-bubble belched up from Cthulhu’s veiny chimney. Oily colors wriggled on its surface as it rose up through the oceanic ultramarine night. We watched as it burst into a polluted rainbow beneath the black lozenges of ships moving silently through the airy, idiot mundworld.
“Best squamous going, I heard,” Shax gurgled. I’d almost forgotten she was there. I’m not much of a cultist when you get right down to it. I know that about myself. I’m trying to work on it.
“Iä, me too, I heard that,” Zuzu growled, still stung, pride still snakestomped. “Only you gotta be 100 percent goat. Quiet like a misko in a library. If you disturb the man’s slumber, it’s bad fhtagn news. He’s cranky when he first wakes up.”
So that’s how we ended up on a rickety rooftop huffing Cthulhu’s farts. Highly recommended; would huff again.  p. 55

An interesting, if not quite successful, experiment.
The highlight of the issue is the other Hugo nominee, Fandom for Robots by Vina Jie-Min Prasad. This concerns Computron, a robot who has just discovered a Japanese anime show called Hyperdimension Warp Record:

Computron feels no emotion towards the animated television show titled Hyperdimension Warp Record (超次元 ワープ レコード). After all, Computron does not have any emotion circuits installed, and is thus constitutionally incapable of experiencing “excitement,” “hatred,” or “frustration.” It is completely impossible for Computron to experience emotions such as “excitement about the seventh episode of HyperWarp,” “hatred of the anime’s short episode length” or “frustration that Friday is so far away.”
Computron checks his internal chronometer, as well as the countdown page on the streaming website. There are twenty-two hours, five minutes, forty-six seconds, and twelve milliseconds until 2am on Friday (Japanese Standard Time). Logically, he is aware that time is most likely passing at a normal rate. The Simak Robotics Museum is not within close proximity of a black hole, and there is close to no possibility that time is being dilated. His constant checking of the chronometer to compare it with the countdown page serves no scientific purpose whatsoever.
After fifty milliseconds, Computron checks the countdown page again.  p. 62

After binge-watching the entire series, Computron discovers the series’ associated fanfic forums and is sucked into that world:

While “fanfiction” is meant to consist of “fan-written stories about characters or settings from an original work of fiction,” Computron observes that much of the HyperWarp fanfiction bears no resemblance to the actual characters or setting. For instance, the series that claims to be a “spin-off focusing on Powerful!Cyro” seems to involve Cyro installing many large-calibre guns onto his frame and joining the Space Marines, which does not seem relevant to his quest for revenge or the retrieval of the hyperdimensional warp unit. Similarly, the “high school fic” in which Cyro and Ellison study at Hyperdimension High fails to acknowledge the fact that formal education is reserved for the elite class in the HyperWarp universe.
Most of the fanfiction set within the actual series seems particularly inaccurate. The most recent offender is EllisonsWife’s “Rosemary for Remembrance,” which fails to acknowledge the fact that Cyro does not have human facial features, and thus cannot “touch his nose against Ellison’s hair, breathing in the scent of sandalwood, rosemary, and something uniquely him” before “kissing Ellison passionately, needily, hungrily, his tongue slipping into Ellison’s mouth.”
Computron readies his styluses and moves the cursor down to the comment box, prepared to leave anonymous “constructive criticism” for EllisonsWife, when he detects a comment with relevant keywords.

bjornruffian:
Okay, I’ve noticed this in several of your fics and I was trying not to be too harsh, but when it got to the kissing scene I couldn’t take it anymore. Cyro can’t touch his nose against anything, because he doesn’t have a nose! Cyro can’t slip his tongue into anyone’s mouth, because he doesn’t have a tongue! Were we even watching the same series?? Did you skip all the parts where Cyro is a metal robot with a cube-shaped head?!

ellisonsWife:
Who are you, the fandom police?? I’m basing Cyro’s design on this piece of fanart (link here) because it looks better than a freakin metal box!! Anyway, I put DON’T LIKE DON’T READ in the author’s notes!!! If you hate the way I write them so much, why don’t you just write your own????

Computron is incapable of feeling hatred for anything, as that would require Doctor Alquist to have installed emotion circuits during his creation. However, due to Computron’s above-average procedural knowledge, he is capable of following the directions to create an account on fanficarchive.org.  p.65-66

The rest of the story is a really funny, deadpan account about Computron’s further online interactions with other fans, attempts at writing fan fiction, and eventual collaboration with a human on a comic book.
Parts of this are excellent but it comes off the boil a little at the end (and it doesn’t have the ‘knock it out of the park’ ending I was hoping for). Still, it is a very good piece overall, and deserves its place in the Hugo Award finals.
At Cooney’s by Delia Sherman is about a woman who travels in time from 1968 (where she has an unrequited love for another woman) to the prohibition era (where she has an encounter with a cross-dressing woman). This story has some good characterisation and scene-setting but no real plot (she slips back in time and then forward again in a fairly arbitrary way).
Ghost Town by Malinda Lo (Defy the Dark, 2013) is a slightly predictable but effective and atmospheric Halloween ghost story about two young women going to check out a haunted house where two women died. It turns out (spoiler) that McKenzie, the young woman who has invited the narrator, has lured her to a cruel hazing:

The moonlight shines through the window, which is hung with lace curtains. The room has a rusted metal bedframe in it, the mattress long gone. A chipped pitcher and basin rest on a bureau that’s missing half its drawers. A rocking chair is pushed into the corner, the woven seat eaten through in the center. McKenzie trains her flashlight on the wall over the bed. A word is scrawled there, red letters dripping down the peeling wallpaper.
DYKE.
A shock jolts through me, hot and cold all at once. I become aware of a dim buzzing in my ears as I stare at the word. The whole effect is, I have to admit, very well done. The drips look just like blood, and it ties in perfectly with the story McKenzie just told me, although I know that the word isn’t about Ida and her maybe-girlfriend Elsie. It’s for me.  p. 97-98

The next part of the story shows the narrator turning the tables on her tormentor, and the rest of the narrative telescopes back in time to show the set up.
This is an effective piece until the last few paragraphs which are slightly disorientating (spoiler: after the scene above the narrator takes the tormentor down to the basement where the ghost of one of the women who died in the house delivers an effective scare. However, the last paragraphs show two ghosts in the house, one of who appears hostile to the narrator. This last part somewhat muddies the water.)
One other point: this is the second story in a row about a gay person coming out or struggling to come out. Apart from the fact that there are only so many stories about this subject that anyone wants to read (and I’ve read many more of these than I’m interested in1), why would you put one straight after the other in the magazine?

The Cover by Ashley Mackenzie has a neat idea but is, to me, one of the magazine’s blander offerings.
There is the ususal Poetry. I appreciated the sentiment of Too Much Dystopia? by Jo Walton, but as a poem I found it a little wooden. I didn’t care for the O’Brien or Trotta poems (I didn’t understand the former), but thought the Garfinkle okay.
The Uncanny Valley, the editorial by Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas, starts with a section about the editors’ family’s imminent house move. This is then followed by a page and a half of award wins and nominations for the magazine and its contents (you can barely move for awards nowadays, so a page and a half is pretty concise). The last section is a page of waffle about the contents, but just before that there is this:

One more thing.
Fuck Nazis. Fuck racism. Fuck misogyny. Fuck antisemitism. Fuck Islamophobia. Fuck homophobia. Fuck ableism. Fuck all of the fascist white supremacist hate groups and the politicians who represent them, especially the American fascist conman president and his entire corrupt, treasonous regime.  p. 8

I suppose the glib response to this is that, yes, moving house can be stressful. More seriously, I find it profoundly depressing to find this kind of partisan political rant in a SF magazine, especially one expressed in such an intemperate and vulgar manner.
The best of the articles is My Voice-Over Life by Sophie Aldred (perhaps best known in the SF field as the seventh Doctor Who companion, Ace), which is an interesting piece about her career as a voice over artist. It starts with this:

Once upon a time, there was a little girl who loved to read stories to her brother. She liked to put on funny voices for all the different characters and found that she was rather good at mimicking accents and odd vocal characteristics. Sometimes her brother would beg her to stop reading as he had had enough; sometimes she listened. The little girl also liked listening to the radio programmes that her Mummy had on in the kitchen while she was making supper for Daddy who came in hungry and tired from the office (it was the 1960’s after all). Although she didn’t understand any of the so-called jokes, she loved a man called Kenneth Williams, whose strangulated vocal gymnastics she tried to imitate, and another one called Derek Nimmo, who you could tell was rather vague and very posh just by the tone of his voice.
There were also some precious LPs for the record player. Johnny Morris read Thomas the Tank Engine stories and made up different distinctive voices for all the engines that sounded somehow just as she’d imagined they’d speak. She and her brother practically wore out a series of brightly coloured Magic Roundabout 45’s, learning every word to replicate the stories as Florence, Brian the snail, and Dougal the dog, for the delight of Auntie Flo (who smoked 60 a day, had fascinating nicotine stained fingers and a raspy laugh) and Uncle Nigel (who wore a three-piece suit and a gold watch on a chain) when they came for Christmas sherry.  p. 112

This shows that, as well as acting, singing, and directing, she can write as well.
The rest of the articles made my eyes glaze over to a greater or lesser extent. Let Me Tell You by Cecilia Tan starts with “show don’t tell” and works its way to imperialism in fiction (I think—with most of these I started skimming); I’m Not the Only One: Why Wonder Woman Doesn’t Need to Stand Alone in Order to Stand Tall by Sarah Kuhn starts with the subject of the title and segues into her Asian American identity. Resistance 101: Basics of Community Organizing for SF/F Creators and Consumers— Volume Four: “Don’t Let Him Catch You With Your Work Undone”—Activism for the Long Haul by Sam J. Miller and Jean Rice has a ridiculously long title which has little to do with the contents (mostly Miller’s interview with another activist, which is little more than a list of political platitudes).
Changeable Skins, Consummate Catchphrases by Sabrina Vourvoulias does not start promisingly:

I usually find outrage columns super easy to write, and as an older woman who didn’t start writing in speculative fiction until 50, I have a deep well of indignities to draw upon.  p. 137

You cannot conceive of the magnitude of the sigh I emitted on reading that.
That said, it turns out to be a piece about ageism that isn’t as bad as those opening lines would suggest, and it was one I could mostly follow, although I’ll have to admit that some of the cultural references (the Overwatch RPG) and the language (“Quiltbag”) lost me (apparently it’s an LGBT+ “co-ordinate term”).
One of the potential problems of us living in our own little echo chambers these days is the development of a specialised vocabulary that outsiders won’t understand, and probably won’t bother to look up.
Interview: C. S. E. Cooney by Julia Rios is a bit off the walls at the start (it’s essentially two friends gibbering at each other) but they eventually calm down and the piece has some useful information about the writer’s other work that encouraged me to seek it out.
Interview: Delia Sherman by Julia Rios goes over the coming out stuff that is in Sherman’s story again.

There is some good fiction in this issue but, as before, the political stuff is a massive turn off (almost to the point of making me avoid further issues—or at least until the temper tantrums are over).  ●

_____________________

1. This comment applies to all solipsistic stories. Everyone has their struggles in this life: I don’t particularly want to read about yours as I am, ironically, more interested in my own.  ●

Uncanny is available from Google Play, Amazon UK/US, and Weightless Books.

rssrss

1 thought on “Uncanny #18, September/October 2017

  1. Pingback: Links (2018-06-27) | Featured Futures

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

New Worlds SF #147, February 1965

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #31 (March 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
The Power of Y (Part 2 of 2) • novella serial by Arthur Sellings
More Than a Man • short story by John Baxter
When the Skies Fall • short story by John Hamilton
The Singular Quest of Martin Borg • novelette by George Collyn
The Mountain • reprint short story by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Box • short story by Richard Wilson

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Jakubowicz
Interior artwork • by Maeve Gilmore, James Cawthorn, uncredited
A Rare Event • editorial
Biological Electricity • science essay
Can Spacemen Live with Their Illusions? • science essay by Science Horizons
The Cosmic Satirist
• book reviews by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Silver Collections • book reviews by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Did Elric Die in Vain? • book review by Alan Forrest
Hardly SF • book reviews by Hilary Bailey
Letters to the Editor

_____________________

The second instalment of The Power of Y by Arthur Sellings (a novel about a world where “Plying”, the limited identical reproduction of objects, is available) has Afford getting out of the sanatorium and going on a somewhat farcical journey (he is trying to lose any tail he may have) that ends at a safe house in the countryside. His Aunt Clarissa, Guy Burroughs, and Joanna are there. A disgruntled late arrival is Tom Mitchison (Afford’s minder, appointed by Aunt Clarissa). The group discuss the situation and note a surprising discovery: the President’s assistant is a disguised man called Rockstro, one of the two inventors of plying (both are reported to have died).
After this the novel partially turns into a synopsis, as a lot of the action happens off-stage and is then talked about in later meetings, such as when Burroughs turns up at a Chinese restaurant days later and lays out the plot to Afford and his aunt. He tells them that an old lab assistant of Klien’s (the other inventor) has told him about the plying of a dog, and how the copied creature was a docile and easily manipulated creature. Burroughs concludes from this that the real president is alive and a prisoner in the Europa Palace, and that they must break in and rescue him.

The rest of the novel is mostly fast-paced, if unlikely, action. Afford and Burroughs spend several days tunnelling into the Palace. When they finally break in (spoiler) they find the President and take Rockstro prisoner. There is a gunfight on the way out and they blow the tunnel. They get the President to the safe house and tell him about the plot.
The final twist occurs when the President disappears shortly afterwards, seemingly from a locked room with guards outside. Then the copy of the president gives a radio broadcast and, in the middle of his speech, he disappears too. Rockostro explains in a data dump what has happened: they haven’t borrowed copies of the objects from other spaces but from other times.

They go to the palace, and find it under military control: the plotters are arrested, and all ends well.
The second half of this novella is not as good as the first: a story told with a certain lightness of tone turns into an unlikely adventure, where the chess pieces are formulaically moved around the board. The plying gimmick is completely unconvincing too.2
More Than a Man by John Baxter starts with two captains in the Terran Navy who are on the surface of an alien planet preparing themselves for a mission. Once they are suitably disguised they go to the nearby town and arrange for a private audience with the sovereign. When they are alone we discover the latter is a robot, and it is then serviced by the two men.
On the way to their next job we learn of a previous space war with the opposing Hegemony forces:

He remembered Dubhe well enough, though he had been only a child at the time. It wasn’t something that any Earthman, especially a Navy officer, could hope to forget. Beyond that star a frozen graveyard of ships stood as a permanent reminder of the suicidal futility of blow-for-blow battling in space.
It had been the first and the last space battle. After Dubhe, both sides limped home and reconsidered their strategy. Out of that reconsideration had come the Hegemony’s all-enveloping net of colonial outposts and the Earth’s plan of robot subversion. So perhaps Dubhe had not been such a total loss after all.  p. 53

During their next job (on a different planet) they struggle to find the tribal chief they are looking for until some of his tribesmen appear at their camp. They get to him and find he is malfunctioning due to gunshot wounds. One of the navy captains goes for spares, the other stays. When the tribesmen say their leader must accompany them on a raid, the remaining Terran captain changes his features and goes in the leader’s place. The punchline seems to be that he will find out if the robots are “more than men” (an idea briefly floated earlier in the story).
This story has a tired setting, is overlong, and it doesn’t have the early focus on the robot/man idea that its conclusion requires. All of which leaves the ending feeling like a non-sequitur.
When the Skies Fall by John Hamilton starts off with three men seemingly talking over each other but, eventually, a religious discussion develops and this leads to a comment about the date of Armageddon. One of the men pencils this in his diary for a week hence, and then the other asks whether the knowledge of this date could cause it to change. The last scene (spoiler) is the unravelling of reality.
This story’s initial obliqueness is discouraging but the last scene is effective:

Dixey, still sitting to their left at the side of the room, had not been listening and was the first to hear an odd sound: over and above the mellow singing from downstairs sweet rippling chords from some musical instrument could be discerned—it took little reflection to recognise it was a harp.
All three listened to the rise and fall of the strings, quietly enchanted by the freshness and elegance and coolness of the air-borne notes. The singing below stopped—they too listened to the music which issued from a delicate flutter of unseen fingers. It was like the summer brook of Time rippling and playing over the stones of the centuries, washing them softly away.
Some time later the flow of music faded and Dixey coughed, almost apologetically. There followed a silence and then a strange muffled sound—as of a deck of cards falling, and the new silence was deeper than before, than ever before. It was the silence of a tomb.
Instinctively all three were drawn slowly to the window, and all three gasped or sighed from deep within their souls. Nothing. Void. Blank. The trees, the houses, the street, the sky—the world was gone.
The scene that met their eyes was a blank domino, a painting washed clean.
Dumas’ voice muttered something about being wrong.  p. 66

The longest piece of short fiction in the issue is George Collyn’s novelette The Singular Quest of Martin Borg. It is described in the blurb as a “marvellously funny spoof” but is, in reality, an overlong, plodding story, and a bit of a chore to read.
It begins with a drug dealer and an exotic dancer/concubine meeting on a spaceship. After their brief encounter the dancer gives birth to a son. When the mother remarries some years later, the boy is left in the care of robots on a remote planetoid, and remains there until he is discovered twenty-five years later. He is taken to civilization.
The rest of the story runs through various SF tropes: Martin develops psi powers and later teleports back to the planetoid. There he sees a photo of his mother and changes his sex and appearance so as he looks like her:

He thought of lean thighs, white and clear-cut and felt their configuration as it would be and it was so. He thought of breasts swelling apple-round and sensed their touch and it was so. He formulated hair of gold in perfect fall to his shoulders and it was so. He imagined almond eyes and tulip lips, delicate curves and rounded femininity and it was so. He thought of yielding fragility and steel-tempered passion and Marti Marta reborn stood in the nursery; which sounds incredible but it was so.  p. 77

Martita then goes to Hi Li City where she works as a concubine:

Martita Borg spent twenty years in Hi Li City and in that time she had many lovers and from nibbling at their subconscious thoughts, unshielded in moments of passion, she learnt many secret things.
For five years she was a dancer like her mother, a mime artist, adept of the five hundred Postures of Meaning and her naked and supple limbs traced intricate and erotic patterns for the delectation of the Great Minds.
Then for five years she was a jewelled one, her entire body, save the sexual and erogenous zones, gold-painted and encrusted with gems and precious stones, her body veined with sapphires and turquoise, arms outlined in garnets and opals, thighs of milk white pearl and bloodred rubies and a face diamond masked and emerald framed. An exquisite gem; finest product of the jeweller’s and goldsmith’s art; an expensive toy for the treasures of the galaxy.  p. 78

She then meets a brutal Emperor, later revealed as Martin/Martita’s father. The Emperor’s heart stops when he sees what he thinks is his ex-wife:

So would have perished the body of the most powerful man ever to live had not his son captured his persona, memory and body in their dying spasm and reunited father, mother and son in one brain and body.  p. 83

You get the idea. I think there is a time loop at the end, with Martin having a normal childhood the next time around, but I’d rather lost interest by then so I’m not entirely sure.

The Mountain by Michael Moorcock (first published as Le Montague in Nocturne 1) is a Ballardian post-holocaust story where two surviving men climb a mountain in pursuit of a woman:

Not without certain trepidation, Hallner followed behind his friend who marched towards the mountains without looking back or even from side to side.
Nilsson had a goal and rather than sit down, brood and die when the inescapable finally happened, Hallner was prepared to go along with him on this quest for the girl.
And, he admitted, there was a faint chance that if the winds continued to favour them, they might have a chance of life. In which case there was a logical reason for Nilsson’s obsessional tracking of the woman.
His friend was impatient of his wish to walk slowly and savour the atmosphere of the country which seemed so detached and removed, uninvolved with him, disdainful.
That there were things which had no emotional relationship with him, had given him a slight surprise at first, and even now he walked the marshy ground with a feeling of abusing privacy, of destroying the sanctity of a place where there was so little hint of humanity; where men had been rare and had not been numerous or frequent enough visitors to have left the aura of their passing behind them.  p. 90-91

Of course they never catch her, and it all comes to a nihilistic end. I suppose the journey up the mountain, with its perils and its passage through the mist, may be a metaphor for the ascent of humanity and the ultimate futility of this process, but I’m not sure of this interpretation.
Although this kind of thing isn’t usually my cup of tea, I thought this was okay.

Box by Richard Wilson has a narrator who lives in an efficiency apartment, a small box, and he has not been out of it for some years, but wants to get together with a woman he is infatuated with called Maria. Hitherto he has got his life and sexual experiences through the “dreamies”:

When Harry was in the mood for something more active he used the Triveo-Plus, also known as the tactiloscope or dreamies. Through the magic of TP (available at extra cost) he had climbed Everest and Tupungato, breathing normally. He had explored the Antarctic and the Sahara, in 72-degree comfort. He had skin-dived, dry, off the Great Barrier Reef. He had spelunked, without anxiety, in Fingal’s Cave and Aggtelek and Devil’s Hole. And, on a bootleg channel (available at extortionate cost) he had lain in the arms of five hundred variegated young women. That averaged out, over five years, to two a week. Harry McCann felt that in his sex life, as in his other habits, he was a temperate man.  p. 105

He eventually manages to conquer his agoraphobia and make the journey across the city to see Maria. Of course (spoiler), once he gets to her flat he isn’t allowed in as she hasn’t been out for years, and couldn’t cope with a real visitor.
This reads like the kind of story the 1950s Galaxy might have run, although it may have contained too many autobiographical elements for the editor Horace Gold (the agoraphoboia, etc.).

The Cover by Jakubowicz is rather dark for my taste, and I’m not sure that the blue colour-blocks set it off that well.
The Interior artwork is by the same two artists as last issue, and the bulk of it is by Maeve Gilmore for the Selling serial.3 Only two of the short stories are illustrated; one is signed by Cawthorn. The thumbnail sketches for the editorial, books and letters columns have been changed: the attractive sketches have been replaced by boring planets:

A Rare Event isn’t credited and, as Moorcock’s picture isn’t at the top of the page anymore, perhaps this one is by Langdon Jones. Who knows? It starts with a description of the 1957 World SF Convention in London:

Only once before has a World Science Fiction Convention been held in Britain. This was in 1957 at London’s Kings Court Hotel. It was attended by hundreds of SF enthusiasts, publishers, writers, editors and artists from all over the world—there were even a few from behind the Iron Curtain. John W. Campbell was the Guest of Honour and amongst the American personalities were H. Beam Piper, Bob Silverberg. Harry Harrison, Ray Nelson, Sam Moskowitz, Forrest Ackerman and others. Well known British writers were there in strength—Wyndham, Clarke, Eric Frank Russell, Aldiss, Ballard, Sellings, John Christopher. Tubb, Bulmer, Brunner, James White and, of course. John Carnell. It was an exciting affair and it gave many readers a chance to meet their favourite authors for the first time for—as always—it was informal.  p. 2

The writer goes on to plug the 23rd Worldcon, which is once again being held in London in August (1965), as well as mentioning the Easter BSFA convention in Birmingham. There are a couple of other notes as well, so it is housekeeping this month, not proselytising.
Last issue I mentioned that I expected the science essay to be the usual dry stuff: it wasn’t but the two in this issue are. The first essay, Biological Electricity, has this:

In, 1963, scientists of the General Electric Company’s Space Sciences Laboratory at Valley Forge, Pennsylvania, demonstrated the use of biological electricity in a simple, painless experiment with a laboratory rat. They implanted electrodes into the rat’s abdominal cavity. A current of 155 microwatts generated by the rat’s body was led from those electrodes by a thin insulated wire through the skin and used to power a radio-transmitter.  p. 102

Painless for the scientists.
The second one, Can Spacemen Live with Their Illusions?, is by “Science Horizons”, whoever they are.4
The Cosmic Satirist by Michael Moorcock (rave) reviews The Naked Lunch by William Burroughs (I’m surprised this doesn’t appear under Moorcock’s own name). He has this to say to readers who are uncertain about attempting the book:

The reader who likes a book with a “beginning, a middle and an end” need not be in the least alarmed by The Naked Lunch. I am much more inclined towards the conventional novel myself. I certainly do not welcome novelty for novelty’s sake, nor obscenity for obscenity’s sake—I find most of the fiction produced under the label of “beat” and “avant-garde” boring and pretentious, disguising bad, undisciplined writing under a superficial cloak of equally bad and undisciplined “experimental” styles. Just as the Buck Rogers brigade of SF writers bring SF into disrepute, so do these so-called experimental writers bring the handful of genuine innovators into disrepute. The simple fact with Burroughs is that he can write. He can write better than anybody else at work today. He has an ear for dialogue, an eye for reality, an ability to conjure up phantasmagoric visions that immediately capture the imagination, a powerful, uncompromising style that rips away our comforting delusions and displays the warts and the sores that can fester in the human mind. Not a pleasant vision at first, yet we are soon captured by Burroughs’s deadpan style which aids us to look upon the horrors without revulsion, and take, instead, a cool, objective look at perversion in all its states and forms—mental, physical and spiritual.  p. 116-117

I’m not entirely sure why a quote from Limbo 90 (by Bernard Wolfe) follows this, nor is the next quote from the book itself (a description of the city of Interzone) particularly appealing.
The rest of Moorcock’s reviews are in Silver Collections, and find him in a less dyspeptic mood than last issue.
Did Elric Die in Vain? by Alan Forrest is a long review of Stormbringer by Michael Moorcock, and reminded me of how different the ‘Elric’ stories were, with their physically weak anti-hero and his malevolent sword.
Hardly SF by Hilary Bailey is the final review essay, and it makes its titular point about Who? by Algis Budrys.
Letters to the Editor includes a long letter from Peter J. D. Matthews of Yeovil, Somerset, where he charts what he suggests is a decrease in the quality in Bradbury’s work from The Silver Locusts (The Martian Chronicles) through Fahrenheit 451 and Golden Apples of the Sun. He goes on to say that Ballard and Moorcock are on the same slippery slope:

With each successive story he is plunging at the moment, except that Equinox and The Drowned World are almost identical. The editor, who, as far as I know, first rose to prominence in the fantasy field, for a time seemed to be graduating to SF, but now seems to be following Bradbury and Ballard, that is if Goodbye Miranda is anything to judge by.
Basically the fault seems to be that there is a trend for authors to attempt to appeal to the emotions directly with word pictures—a job for the poets in my opinion—rather than writing a story and letting the story do its work on the emotions or the intellect. Go back to the old days, the blood-curdling days of the Vargo Statten Magazine etc. What so you find? Clean-cut stories, painted with broad, crudely aimed strokes of the pen, but stories. Write stuff like that, only better, to suit a more adult readership—throw in a good percentage of more serious stuff (the first half of Blish’s A Case of Conscience is the sort of thing I mean) and I’ll buy monthlies filled with that, faster than you can print them!  p. 125-126

The editorial reply:

We agree, and have always agreed, that there is a place for the good, intelligent action story in SF and we should never miss the chance of publishing any we receive. But, it seems, the trend away from this kind of writing involves the authors— old and new—as well as the readers. Certainly this is true of this country. The more popular British SF writers such as Wyndham, Christopher, Aldiss and Ballard, have appealed perhaps because they have placed the accent on character and so on, rather than on the action element.
It has often occurred to us that if it had not been for the necessity of selling to what was essentially a pulp-magazine field the work of Asimov, Clarke and others might have been that much better. We also endorse your view that SF could currently do with a few more good, straightforward craftsmen, as well as writers of the more thoughtful kind.  p. 126

The next letter, from John R. Orr, Emsworth, Hants., hopes for stories from Philip E. High, as well as more ‘Hek Belov’ stories from Edward Mackin. The editors say that High is concentrating on novels for the US market but that they have a long Hek Belov story coming up . . . oh dear, it’s at times like this I wish they were more ruthless with the old guard.
There is a Next Month filler at the end of the letter column which trails a new story from J. G. Ballard called Dune Limbo (actually an extract from his new novel The Drought).
There are no Story Ratings in this issue due to the change of publication schedule to monthly.5
Finally, I think I once again see Moorcock doing a spot of collecting in the Advertisements:

CHARLES L. HARNESS—anything in magazines. Some CORDWAINER SMITH in magazines. Also books written or illustrated by Mervyn Peake. Details to Advertiser, Box 826, NWSF. 17, Lake House, Scovell Rd. London, S.E.l.  p. 128

Overall, this is an average to mediocre issue, but it isn’t the worst one so far (#145).  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall’s review starts off with a comment about how the increased production schedule will no doubt cause “a drop in the standard of material, but that is not [yet] overtly noticeable”.
He likes the cover, thinks it looks like Powers, and is the magazine’s best yet. He was disappointed with the science fact articles.
As for the fiction, the Sellings has an irritating passage at the beginning (unspecified) but finishes with a “remarkable and high-standard ending.” He adds that the work is “mildly amusing, well-written but with that so frequent tendency of serials—a disappointing middle.”
The Baxter story is “good [but has] well treated second-hand, not new, [ideas]” while Hamilton’s piece is “pointless” and clichéd. Collyn’s piece has “a plot of van Vogtian complexity” but is “badly constructed.” Hall adds, “This ‘characterisation’ takes some beating. Holds out through some good ideas, a lot of bad writing and finally turns out to be the good old time paradox theme done up. Poorest item in the magazine.”
The Colvin has some good description but Hall would have preferred a more original idea. Wilson, “one of the few consistently good writers” contributes a piece that is “very extrapolatory and might well prove visionary.”
As for the non-fiction, Hall says that “weight is made” with the Book Reviews before describing the Letters column as “short and uninspiring”. He does not like the illustrations for the serial, saying that they are “childish scribblings—there isn’t a fanzine in the country that prints worse.”
“An issue treading water.”

2. The book version of Selling’s novella changed the title from The Power of Y to The Power of X (a backward move I felt . . . boom, tish). The novella is ~28,000 words and the novel is ~43,000 words, so it is a considerable expansion. One thing I noted is that the book version dumps the novella introduction about Afford wanting to be President of the USE and starts in his art gallery (a good move).

3. The artwork for the Selling serial is uncredited but  I think it is by Gilmore as it is of the same style as the artwork for I Remember Anita in #144, and New Worlds only seems to be using her, Thomson and Cawthorn for illustrations.

4. There aren’t any more of these science articles in the next few issues, so it looks like it was a short-lived experiment (boom, tish, again!).

5. The story ratings for this issue appeared in #149:

I’d have gone with Wilson, Moorcock (Colvin), Hamilton as the top three. I note that the longest piece is in first place (again) and the second longest in second.  ●

rssrss

4 thoughts on “New Worlds SF #147, February 1965

  1. Joachim Boaz

    I’ve read a bunch of these — Moorcock’s The Mountain and the Collyn story (neither blew me away).

    And Arthur Sellings…. I’ve tried multiple times to read a few of his novels that I have on my shelves. They are always so bland and slight that I give up after a few pages.

    What I really came by to comment on was Jakubowicz’s cover! I had no idea New World’s actively procured French SF artists! (he illustrated a bunch of Fiction covers from 1962-1966).

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      For some reason your reply went straight into the bin. Anyway, have a look at the review of #144, that cover is Jakubowicz’s too, and there is a link in the footnotes to a page of his covers, IIRC.

      I think that Selling’s ‘Junk Day’, his last, is probably the one to get, judging by what SFE has to say about it.

      Reply
      1. Joachim Boaz

        No problem.

        I’ve checked Abebooks numerous times for a cheap copy of Junk Day (I won’t find it in stores as I’m almost positive it was only published in the UK) — but my previous exposure to his work has not justified the cost!

        Are you tempted to read it?

        Reply
        1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

          That partially depends on the quality of the other short work of his I’ll read in due course, but eventually, yes (probably around the time I get to the large format New Worlds as it sounds like that kind of modern dystopian novel).

          Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

New Worlds SF #146, January 1965

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #30 (January 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
The Power of Y (Part 1 of 2) • novella serial by Arthur Sellings ∗∗+
The Sailor in the Western Stars • short story by Bob Parkinson
Tunnel of Love • short story by Joseph Green
There’s a Starman in Ward 7 • short story by David Rome
Election Campaign • novelette by Thom Keyes

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Robert J. Tilley
Interior artwork • by uncredited (2), Cawthorn (3)
Encouraging Signs • editorial by Michael Moorcock
Background: Space Drive • essay by George Locke [as by Gordon Walters]
Fancy and Imagination • book reviews by Michael Moorcock
Books for the Kids? • book reviews by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Two Good Ones • book reviews by Langdon Jones
Letters to the Editor
Story Ratings 145

_____________________

The serial by Arthur Sellings,2 The Power of Y, starts with the narrator, Max Afford, stating he will not stand for President of the UES (United European States), that the following account was written for therapeutic reasons, and that he is just an art dealer. The story as such then starts with Afford in his gallery looking at a ‘plied’ copy of a Matisse that has just come in. It is number number 20, and this leads to a data-dump about the novel’s gimmick, plying (presumably short for ‘multiplying’):

Plying hit the headlines four years before—remember?
. . . the days when it was hailed as The Answer to Everything . . . The Dawn Of The Golden Age . . . when one car would go in one end and a million roll out the other. . . a genuine Mona Lisa in every home? — well, after the dust had settled, the Hyman Bascos and Oswald Bilbekkers of this world found they were still in business, only more so.
I’m no scientist, nor are a few thousand million other people, but it had all seemed so simple. All objects, so the theory ran, have an extension into the fourth dimension. We just happen to see, and use, one slice in this three-dimensional space. Plying meant simply taking other slices. The world was a side of bacon and there was nothing to stop you taking a dozen slices, a million—object x to the power of y, in fact—provided the hog was long enough. The sad truth was that it wasn’t. Or the cutters couldn’t reach more than twenty slices back. Or both. The “cutters” weren’t blades of steel, of course, but some kind of laser beam operating in a field of—well, there was enough about it in the Sunday magazines of the day.  p. 9

And that is about as interested as Sellings ever gets about the process (most of the novel revolves around the plot, and the upper middle class art gallery environment and society that Afford inhabits). However, there is one other twist that Sellings adds at this point: when Afford touches the painting he notices a strange sensation and, after more research at a friend’s gallery, he realises that he can tell the difference between the original and the copies, something that shouldn’t be possible as they are supposedly identical.
Next stop is Joanna Miles: as well as Afford’s possible romantic interest in her, she is also an executive at the Plying Plant. He tells her about his discovery but doesn’t really get anywhere, although she agrees to organise a tour of the Plying plant for him. When he goes on his tour he slips the guard a bribe and gets access a set of twenty identical paintings. He finds the real one by touch.
After this there is a break of a couple of months in the story. Afford goes to a country auction and notices a potentially valuable picture which he buys. It is a picture of President Masson’s grandfather. Afford (who is forced to take his pushy Aunt Clarissa along) presents his find to the President at an official reception. When Afford shakes the President’s hand he realises that the man is a copy!

The story now kicks up a gear. After the presentation ceremony, Afford contacts Joanna about plying living creatures and is bluntly told it is not possible. He goes to see his aunt, and she doesn’t believe him either. After a night in a bar drowning his sorrows he is abducted outside his house. Afford wakes up later in a sanatorium. His aunt arrives and tells him that Joanna contacted her after his visit saying her phone was tapped. Aunt Clarissa then arranged for Afford’s abduction for his own protection. Senator Burroughs, a friend of his aunt, then turns up and they discuss the situation. There is a lot packed into this chapter.

As you can probably tell, this is a fairly fast-paced story, and it is told with, perhaps, the style and lightness of touch more typical in a mainstream social novel of the time. It is certainly not your normal boilerplate mid-sixties SF novel. Perhaps this different tone or voice was what Moorcock found attractive.
It is pleasant enough but minor.3

The Sailor in the Western Stars by Bob Parkinson4 is a lyrical, future-myth story that tells of a space captain called Anistar:

Anistar then, as we have already noted, was a sailor; a proud, noble sailor of the ancient lineage of the Lindesfaarne — who sail their tall, gossamer-light ships across the high stars, silent as falling snowflakes. And as he dipped into the ports of one distant world or another, Anistar continued the business of the Lindesfaarne and traded in the intangible wares they carry; for the Lindesfaarne have long since found such cargoes most profitable, and quite portable.  p. 49

On one of the planets he visits he meets a lady called Calmoora, and they fall in love. Later Anistar becomes restless and wants to go sailing again:

The story meanwhile tells of how Anistar tarried a little while on Jildereen; and when the time came for him to leave that world, along with him went Calmoora, and Santihl, and others whose names are now lost to our histories and so are quite forgotten. So that all these quitted Jildereen at last, and came into that vast darkness of heaven, wherein the stars are as distant lanterns in the sky. And in the glory and the freedom of these heavens Anistar rejoiced, for he was a sailor of the race of the Lindesfaarne and hated the feel of a planet hard beneath his feet. Once again his soul flew free and happy with the ship as it spread its unseen, delicate sails of force and sailed onwards among the stars. And in the hold of that gossamer-light ship there now reposed a new cargo, perhaps the most curious that Anistar had ever carried.  p. 56

At the end of the story (spoiler) Calmoora is left on Caer-ome, while Anistar departs. The “intangible” he has brought to the planet is love.
This is a discursive and stylish piece that vaguely reminded me of Cordwainer Smith, and it’s the best story in the issue.

Tunnel of Love by Joseph Green starts with two young men getting a permit to go to a primitive planet and get film footage of the natives. These latter are the most attractive humanoids in known space and they go around naked. The two men intend to use their “ethnographic” film to make some money producing art house movies.
They arrive on the planet and, after the pair have most of their film footage, we learn more about the natives’ marriage customs: there are no extra-marital relationships, and to marry one of the women the men have to crawl through a tunnel in a metal pyramid to a conjugal chamber in the centre: not all the men make it—some are taken by “the monster”.
Needless to say one of the two men gets the hots for the chief’s red-headed daughter and decides to have a go. The other follows him with a drone—they want the footage for their movie—and sees him disappear along the way.
This all resolves with (spoiler) his rescue and the discovery that the pyramid is a huge genetic scanner, installed after the sun’s radiation levels increased thousands of years ago: those men who are not up to standard slowly die of starvation in the pyramid.
This is all unconvincingly contrived but it moves along slickly enough.

There’s a Starman in Ward 7 by David Rome5 is a piece narrated by a schizophrenic in an asylum. A new inmate joins them and claims he is a Starman from Alpha Centauri. He later organises a breakout (spoiler) but we never discover whether the Starman is an alien or just delusional. For that reason it is not entirely satisfactory as a story but is of interest on account of its unusual manic style and occasionally transgressive tone:

Alice and I walked home through Souter Woods! ! !
The Starman wanted to know why I killed Alice. I tell him because she said dirty words to me after I LOVED her. I also told him about the mother in the moon.
Mother in the moon
Rolled me in porridge
Turned me into a boy
When I was three
Years old
The Starman came from Alpha Centauri in a spaceship. He says nobody believes him, that’s why he’s here.
I said what happened to the spaceship. He said it’s still hidden in the swamp and when he gets the chance he’s getting out of here and going home.
After we got our pills THEY served us coffee on the verandah. We get one cup of coffee each and ONE biscuit, except Daddy who gets two when JOHN is on. The Starman ASKED JOHN FOR ANOTHER BISCUIT.
It was funny. JOHN gave the Starman a look, then pushed him and made him stumble against the wall. But the Starman went straight back and asked for another biscuit. JOHN got mad and took him to the dormitory and shut the door.
(all this is a lie!)
(ward 7 is fine)
(EVERYBODY here treats us right)
(I’m a dirty liar about JOHN)  p. 84

Election Campaign by Thom Keyes has an authoritarian, war-mongering General touring the planets during an election campaign. His government minder is, unusually, a doctor. During the trip they argue, and just as it is becoming physical the gravity goes off temporarily. Their spaceship pilot (who is a brain in a metal box) has malfunctioned, and the ship is spinning tail over tail, out of control.
When they investigate the pilot’s box they find the brain has suffered from a haemorrhage, and is irreparable. The only way for them to survive (spoiler) is for the doctor to remove the general’s brain and use it as a replacement. The operation is successful. (By the way, the described medical procedures aren’t as grisly as in Keyes’ previous story Period of Gestation (Science Fantasy #67, September-October 1964)—at least this time there is a doctor cutting people open rather than amateurs—but I won’t be having anything to eat before I read his next one.)
The story finishes with the general, now a spaceship, arriving at the colony planet and starting his stump speech. It has a good last line:

Meanwhile, the political machine swung into action.  p. 102

This issue’s Cover, according to ISFDB, is by Robert J. Tilley (but the source for this attribution is unknown).
The title page informs us that Langdon Jones is now the editor.

The Interior artwork is split between the uncredited but distinctive artist who illustrates Selling’s serial, while Cawthorn illustrates the others (he is rapidly becoming the magazine’s staff artist).
Encouraging Signs is, I presume, Michael Moorcock’s editorial (although uncredited it has a sketch of him at the top of the page) and covers a number of topics:

From this issue we are back on a regular monthly schedule and, for the first time, our companion Science Fantasy also goes monthly. This is largely thanks to you and we are grateful.  p.2

At least four brilliant books have appeared [in 1964], all vastly different—Aldiss’s Greybeard, Ballard’s The Terminal Beach, Harness’s The Paradox Men and, a book which can’t strictly be called SF, yet which deals with all the ideas found in SF, Burroughs’s Dead Fingers Talk. These four alone made it an exciting year for us—and an encouraging one.
Also encouraging was the number of new writers we have been able to attract to both magazines. Langdon Jones, George Collyn, John Hamilton, Colin Fry and Thom Keyes have all, in their different ways, brought freshness and diversity to the field and will continue to do so.  p. 2

He briefly mentions the contributions by Bob Parkinson and Arthur Sellings before moving on to this:

A further encouraging sign that SF is on the up in more ways than one— the publication of SF Horizons , the professional magazine of SF criticism, edited by Brian Aldiss and Harry Harrison. The best item in this was Aldiss’s long article on Jack Williamson’s Legion of Time, in which he analyses not only the book itself, but also the whole SF field, its strengths and its weaknesses. This is the first piece of serious SF criticism we have read which really lays down solid principles for the criticism of SF. It is witty, intelligent and clear.  p. 3

He then quotes a long passage from the Aldiss article which ends with:

“In other words, discover the purpose; judge its worth; criticise the technique . . .”  p. 3

All of the above comments suggest that it was an interesting time to be in and/or observing the British SF scene.
I didn’t expect to like Background: Space Drive by George Locke, which I thought would be another of those dreary science articles that occasionally turn up in SF magazines, but he writes in a breezy, entertaining style:

Twenty or thirty years ago, science fiction writers took great pains to work out a plausible scientific framework for their stories. But they quickly came into conflict with the accepted scientific theories of the day. Before the First World War, heroic adventures on Mars a la E. R. Burroughs were quite plausible in light of what was known about Mars. Today, the science fiction writer moans softly: “I mustn’t dream of cream princesses enthroned on Mars because the astronomers insist that mammalian life is impossible. So I have to find an outlet for my sexual fantasies among a bunch of nasty green lichens!”  p. 103

De Bergerac was a couple of hundred years ahead of his time as a science fiction writer, and the rocket was neglected in favour of the aforementioned antigravity. Jules Verne certainly didn’t use it. His unfortunate heroes were shot out of a gigantic cannon like a packet of puffed wheat. Ever since the publication of that story (English edition 1873), science fiction readers have condemned Verne on the grounds that after such a violent initial blastoff, the heroes would have resembled a rather soggy mass of red puffed wheat.  p. 106

He starts with Lucian and his sailing ships and works his way round to the modern equivalent by the end.
This issue’s reviews start with Fancy and Imagination by Michael Moorcock. I think I have finally figured out why Moorcock writes about some books under his own name and the rest under his ‘James Colvin’ pseudonym: those reviewed under his own name are those he wants to proselytise about, those he reviews under his pseudonym take their chances . . . .
This month Moorcock (as opposed to Colvin) reviews Greybeard by Brian W. Aldiss, and The Paradox Men by Charles Harness. In his illuminating reviews of both books (this is a very well written essay) he has this to say about them (amidst much else):

Wordsworth once distinguished between Fancy and Imagination in art—Fancy was the ability to create what hadn’t been conceived of before, Imagination was the ability to explore the deeper aspects of what we see around us. In Greybeard Imagination predominates with a sufficient dash of Fancy to make the whole very good modem SF indeed.  p. 112

Long-time readers of the genre may remember such beautiful stories as Time Trap (Astounding, 1948), Fruits of the Agathon (Thrilling Wonder Stories, 1948), Stalemate in Space (Planet [Stories], 1949) and that tour de force in Authentic, 1953—The Rose. All of them have, with The Paradox Men, a certain similarity of theme and mood, yet all of them show a writer of intellect and power whose faults—descent into pulp shorthand on occasions, plots tending to move a little too fast, tendency to use characters as mechanical chess-pieces in a too carefully plotted framework—are easy to ignore. It is high time we saw the republication of all of these.  p. 113

In his Calvin persona, Moorcock uses Books for the Kids? to dish out some praise but mostly punishment beatings. In his review of Andre Norton’s Judgement on Janus he says that the writer “feasts off the hard work of earlier writers, looting their backgrounds and ideas and producing barren pastiche after barren pastiche. If you’ve read one, you’ve read ’em all.” He says of A Life for the Stars by James Blish that “There’s nothing new here, either, but at least Blish is plagiarising himself to produce a juvenile version of his famous Oakie series.” Moorcock then covers another juvenile by Nourse, and airs his grievances about this type of material appearing in the SF magazines. I don’t really understand his objection: who cares as long as it’s good?
Next for the brickbat is Poul Anderson’s A Truce for Kings:

This pulp Western is dressed up as an SF story. It is badly written, highly reactionary and embarrassingly sentimental—and it won this year’s Hugo Award for the best short fiction. I began writing my review before I heard that piece of news. I’m still bewildered—can it mean that the Hugo has become valueless as an indication of what is good? I’m equally bewildered at Gollancz for selecting it. I always had the impression that he was a left-wing publisher. Not any more, it seems.  p. 116

His bafflement about the Hugo Award not being an indicator of quality is odd: was it ever a guarantee?
Later there is this about Damon Knight’s new novel Beyond the Barrier:

Damon Knight’s reputation is good, yet surely he can’t have gained it from his fiction? I hoped his latest novel would be an improvement on his short stories, but no such luck.  p. 117

This about the author of The Country of the Kind, among others.
There are a couple of positive reviews at the end (Ballard—naturally—and Burgess).
At his best Moorcock is a very good reviewer of material he likes—but with everything else his politics and bugbears (juveniles, sentimentality, etc., etc.) make him an unreliable arbiter of what is worth your time.
In Two Good Ones, Langdon Jones positively reviews The Uncensored Man by Arthur Sellings, and The Syndic by C. M. Kornbluth, although he starts with this about Selling:

I have always considered Arthur Sellings to be a greatly under-estimated and neglected writer. True, his output hasn’t been great, and in a world where a writer like Murray Leinster can get to the top, it is obvious that quantity comes before quality.  p. 119

This praising who you like and trashing who you don’t was a common New Worlds reviewing technique. This would continue, and get worse: I’ve heard people say that reading the later New Worlds’ book review columns (in the large format edition especially) was like reading Pravda—you would skim the reviews to see whose turn it was to be denounced.
Letters to the Editor opens with a long letter from Ivor Latto of Glasgow (who wins the new Harry Harrison novel, The Ethical Engineer), which is mostly about Langdon Jones’s I Remember Anita in #144:

Mr. Jones has as much right to employ blunt sexual realism as any non-sf writer . . . if he thinks it justified for his purpose . . . and in this case there is obviously a case for it, to present his characters as live, animal human beings. The sweaty realism of love and death has been employed to advantage by many writers, notably by the Existentialists. But when Sartre or Camus do this they use the language of realism.
The strangest thing about this story was the combination of a narrative which shows all the warts, with a style, rather, a Style, which was extremely literary, at times even affected. The oft-repeated devise of ‘I remember . . .’ is one example of this, while the language itself too often drifted into neo-Hemingway; phrases like ‘I stayed there, buried in the soft gentleness of you, I know not how long,’ or ‘the loin-heat that used to suffuse my abdomen,’ again, ‘we used to march, hand-in-hand, in arm-swinging boisterousness down avenues of stars.’
Nobody speaks like that. Nobody even thinks like that.
And there was enough of this sort of thing to be disconcerting in conjunction with the realism of the love and death scenes. This pretentiousness also was expressed in some surprisingly banal passages. How about: ‘My God, you had never really been loved.’ All this does not mean that I think Langdon Jones is a bad writer, only that I think that he was trying to be a Fine Writer. His theme was simple and powerful, it would surely have benefited from the use of simple and powerful language, rather than resorting to embarrassing and intrusive literary tricks. My second reservation about this story was the aura of incredible bitterness which pervaded it, no doubt part of the author’s intention. All right, this was a tragedy, but one does not leave Oedipus Rex feeling angry with the Gods, but rather one feels cleansed of emotion. In expressing such bitterness Mr. Jones does not guard his characters against self-pity, the stink of which suffuses much of the story. If I seem over-critical of this piece it is perhaps because the big build-up made me more sensitive than I might otherwise have been to its shortcomings. It was certainly the most adult item in this issue, and the strongest in emotion, but it was in my opinion over-written and suffered from an unfortunate placing of emphasis.  p. 123-124

Moorcock accepts the criticism before expressing his disappointment that some readers wrote in to complain about the story’s sexual explicitness (“Why must Mr. Jones express the feelings of a young, sensitive artist so crudely! It isn’t sex any more, it’s downright pornography!”).
Story Ratings 145 was discussed in the review of that issue.6

In conclusion I’d say that there is nothing particularly outstanding in this issue, but it is interesting to note that the tone or style of all the stories is different (to a greater or lesser extent) from what the magazine was typically publishing under Carnell’s editorship.  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall’s review in Vector #30 notes that the magazine has gone monthly and that Jones has joined as assistant editor. He starts by saying that, “this issue is definitely the best to come from Moorcock”. I’d disagree: #143 is the best so far in my judgement (Bailey’s The Fall of Frenchy Steiner, and the second part of Ballard’s Equinox).
After talking about Selling’s increased stature in the field and synopsising the serial, Hall moves on to Bob Parkinson, mentioning that he is “one of the well-known Cheltenham SF Circle fen who went north to Nottingham to fool around in ballistics or some such.” He adds that Parkinson’s story is “quite well-written but occasionally over-poetic” and that the story’s idea and style reminded him of Cordwainer Smith’s The Lady Who Sailed the Soul.
Hall liked Green’s story a lot, describing it as “old guard” and that it “it is a pleasant change to find a really readable SF tale in these days of so much experimental writing”. I was rather baffled by that comment: they have only just got going with the New Wave stuff!
Hall says Rome’s story is “rather unsatisfactory but unusual”, and that Keyes “perpetrates a parsley gun” (no, me neither) and that it “stands on its own merits [. . .] despite similarities to others.”
Hall liked the cover, “the best I’ve seen for several years—eye-catching and pleasing”, and the Cawthorn illustrations.

2. Arthur Sellings was one of the few British writers (J. T. McIntosh was another) who sold regularly to Galaxy magazine in the fifties. However he didn’t make much of an impact on the British paperback lists: although all but one of his hardbacks was published in hardback by Dobson he never had a regular UK paperback publisher. He did better in the USA: three of his books appeared from Berkley Medallion, one from Ballantine, and one under a pseudonym from Banner. Consequently, when I was browsing the shelves in the mid-seventies he was nowhere to be seen, and I only came to know of him through New Worlds Quarterly, which published news of his premature death from a heart attack (he was 47).
His SFE page is here; his Wikipedia page is here.

3. In Selling’s serial, the fifth and sixth lines from the bottom of p. 42 are in the wrong order:

“That’s my boy! That’s disposed of that question
your dear departed parents, I never thought that I would
then. But—as somebody who made certain promises to

should read:

“That’s my boy! That’s disposed of that question
then. But—as somebody who made certain promises to
your dear departed parents, I never thought that I would

4. Bob Parkinson was a name I didn’t recognise, but he wrote a handful of stories and poems, as well as a number of articles and reviews (he turns up with an essay on Cordwainer Smith in 1971), and was President of the British Interplanetary Society. Given this latter information you would have expected a hard SF story. His ISFDB page is here, and there is some BIS information here.

5. David Rome was the pseudonym of David William Boutland. He had published over a dozen stories in Carnell’s New Worlds, Science Fantasy and Science Fiction Adventures. This was his only appearance in the Moorcock New Worlds, although other stories appeared elsewhere from the mid-sixties to early seventies: I suspect he may have stopped writing SF due to the lack of a market. His ISFDB page is here, and there is more information about him on Steve Holland’s blog.

6. The story ratings for this issue appeared in #148:

The longest story tops the ratings again, just like it usually does in Analog. My pecking order would have been Parkinson followed by Sellings, Keyes, & Rome.  ●

rssrss

2 thoughts on “New Worlds SF #146, January 1965

  1. Denny Lien

    re: “Keyes “perpetrates a parsley gun” (no, me neither) ” — perhaps a Spoonerism or rhyming slang for “ghastly pun” ?

    I believe I recall seeing David Rome post now and then on Gideon Marcus’ “Galactic Journey” site:
    http://galacticjourney.org/about/

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Uncanny #15, March/April 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews
Anne Crookshanks, Tangent Online
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas;  Managing Editor, Michi Trota

Fiction:
With Cardamom I’ll Bind Their Lips • short story by Beth Cato ∗∗∗
Rising Star • short story by Stephen Graham Jones
Auspicium Melioris Aevi • short story by JY Yang
And Then There Were (N – One) • novella by Sarah Pinsker ∗+
An Abundance of Fish • short story by S. Qiouyi Lu
The Red Secretary • reprint novelette by Kameron Hurley

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Julie Dillon
Poetry • by Cassandra Khaw, Brandon O’Brien, Bogi Takács, Lisa M. Bradley
The Uncanny Valley• editorial by Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas
Resistance 101: Basics of Community Organizing for SF/F Creators & Consumers, Volume One: Protest Tips and Tricks • essay by Sam J. Miller
Act Up, Rise Up • essay by Elsa Sjunneson-Henry
#beautifulresistance • essay by Shveta Thakrar
A Work of Art Is a Refuge and Resistance • essay by Dawn Xiana Moon
Fandom in the Classroom • essay by Paul Booth
Interview: Stephen Graham Jones • by Julia Rios
Interview: Sarah Pinsker • by Julia Rios

_____________________

With the 2018 Hugo Awards voting deadline rushing towards us I thought I had better get on with reading the other finalists.1 As this magazine has an impressive six stories on the award ballot this year I figured that reading the appropriate issues would be a good place to start catching up and, in any event, I’ve been thinking about having a look at this publication for  while.
This magazine’s stories and articles are, like most of the other online oriented publications, available for free on the magazine website. Nevertheless, I bought a PDF copy of the magazine on Google Play,2 both for reviewing ergonomics (note taking, quoting, etc.) and because these magazines need the money to pay their bills.

The fiction leads off with With Cardamom I’ll Bind Their Lips by Beth Cato. This story starts with a girl called Vera helping Lady Magdalena seal the lips of her dead uncle, who has come back as a ghost from the war:

I dipped my pointer and middle fingers into the butter mixture and reached to the face of the apparition before me. My uncle. He looked much as he did in life, though strangely gaunt from a winter in the trenches. He swayed in place, his body transparent, his eyes blank white.
“Saints, please let the bombs miss us, please. Oh no, that one fell close.” He unceasingly repeated his last words from life, as all ghosts do. His voice still trembled with terror. I wanted to sink to the floor and sob, but even more, I wanted to silence him. Mama and I had lived with Uncle Ivan’s mantra and his stumbling presence for days, and it had nearly driven us mad.
“Ivan,” I whispered. Names had power; love had power, too. I pushed months of worry and love and mourning into the word. My fingers met his lips, and encountered bitter cold like I’d touched an icicle. I smeared the butter across his lips as if to prevent them from chapping. His swaying slowed.
I felt the magic then. The tie. His soul was tethered to mine by blessed spice and a solitary word.
“Now guide him aside,” said Magdalena.
Upholding my cardamom-freckled fingers, I led Ivan’s ghost the way I might tease a carthorse with a carrot. I positioned him in the corner of the room where we would not pass through him and be shocked anew by cold and grief. I willed him to remain standing there, quiet. He stayed motionless. Breathless.  p. 13-14

After she performs this ritual satisfactorily, Vera is apprenticed to Lady Magdalena. The rest of the story details her work with Magdalena, and her discovery that the latter’s husband apparently deserted from the army. However, Vera later learns (from talking to the local animals) that this was not the case, and that he was actually killed and eaten by dogs in the town. Vera goes to find his ghost, thinking that she can do her employer a good turn by getting her a war pension. Matters do not turn out as expected as (spoiler) Magdalena was the one who killed him.
This comes off the boil a little at the end but it is a pretty good fantasy until then. I hope this is the first of a series of stories.
Rising Star by Stephen Graham Jones takes the form of an academic proposal, and rather reads rather like an Analog piece. The suggestion is to use a time travel device to send humans back in time, where they would place caches of human bones where palaeontologists could find them today.
Auspicium Melioris Aevi by JY Yang (the title means “omen of a better age”) posits a future business ‘Academy’ that clones various political and business leaders and sells the copies to various companies as advisors:

The hall resonated with the sounds of young people in exertion. Copies sparred, played ball, or swam laps in a gently-warmed pool. These were faces familiar to anyone who had lived through the early twenty-first
century: Leaders and thinkers, a catalogue of genetic excellence carefully curated and propagated by the Administrator himself. Pod-grown like heirloom tomatoes, they were made-to-order for clients, spending years in algorithmically-tailored training programs. Each one came with the Administrator’s mark of quality assurance.
If there was proof of the consistency of their training and genetic integrity, it lay in the patterns which emerged in their interactions. The Suu Kyis and the Hillaries seemed to get along well, for example, but the Modis and Merkels never did. And sometimes there were surprises, like the frequent friendships between the Gateses and the Ahmadis. Harry had an interest in judo, and Volodya was rather good at it. They met three times a week to practice.  p. 36-37

The ‘Harry’ is the passage above is Harry Lee Kuan Yew,3 or rather his fiftieth copy, and he is failing the simulated situation tests he undertakes as part of his training: rather than doing what is expected he has started doing what he thinks is right:

Consider: This copy of Harry Lee had something the original did not—foresight. He knew what awaited the other men at the end of their journey.
He knew about the dirty sand soaked in blood, he knew about the shallow unmarked graves, he knew about the generation lost to war, cut out of the fabric of history.
If the original Harry Lee Kuan Yew had known all this, he would definitely have done something. The fiftieth new Harry Lee understood this with a certainty that filled his gut and filled his blood. And his blood was the same blood that had run in the veins of the original. He knew he was right.
He turned towards the doomed men on the lorries. “They’re going to kill you! It’s a trap.”
The men stared in confusion. Shouting facts at them was pointless. What they needed were instructions. A clear path of action.
“Run,” Harry Lee said. “Run.”
Something grabbed Harry by the shoulder. He saw the soldier’s face and the fish-glint of a blade. Then there was searing pain. He was on the ground, lying in mud-caked filth, and when he looked down he saw rivers running red, the gleaming pink of intestines, his pants drenched and stained. His mouth filled with blood and bile, sour and coppery, and he couldn’t breathe. He couldn’t get up. He couldn’t move his arms and legs. The sun was burning his eyes out—
Click.  p. 34

He eventually confronts the Administrator of the Academy.
This is a readable and engaging piece for the most part but there are too many implications that are not addressed: for instance, the copies are essentially slaves who are culled if they do not measure up. What kind of world would allow that? The lack of detail on this and other background questions means it doesn’t really convince. It is also too open-ended.
And Then There Were (N – One) by Sarah Pinsker is, according to the Editorial, the first novella the magazine has published.
The story takes place at a convention of Sarah Pinskers who come from hundreds of parallel worlds, and the Sarah who narrates isn’t the Quantologist who discovered the science that enables this, or the Nebula Award Winning SF writer, but an insurance investigator from another timeline. After some initial convention and hotel setting she is asked to put her skills to work when one of the other Sarahs is found dead in the nightclub area on the top floor of the hotel. The rear of her head has been bashed in (Sarah thinks this was done using a Nebula Award from the display table!). There is a storm raging outside so the authorities cannot get to the island where the hotel is to investigate. She is own her own.
Her initial approach is to begin interviewing the Sarahs who were last seen with the victim before moving on to the convention organising committee. At the end of the story she deduces who the murderer is and confronts her, and discovers the motive for the killing (spoiler: in the killer’s world—as well as that of several other Sarahs—Seattle was destroyed, and a group of her friends killed. In the murdered Sarah’s world they are alive, but that Sarah didn’t keep in touch with them, and was otherwise squandering her life). To be honest, the murder mystery is the weakest part of the story—the solution doesn’t unfold but is presented (I certainly didn’t spot any clues on the way through).
The weak mystery plot won’t spoil it for most readers though as the meat of the story is really the idea of the road not taken, a concept present in other ‘many worlds’ stories but perhaps intensified here given the multiple versions of Sarah present at the convention. This alternative lives idea is particularly emphasised in a long passage that details an incident from Pinsker’s teenage years, and the more positive outcome that occurred in one of the other worlds (as narrated by another Sarah in one of the convention program items):

Part of me wanted more than anything to trade places with this barn manager. To have had sixteen years with a horse I loved, to have made a decision based on gut instead of practicality. I knew that ship had sailed, but I still wanted it. That one change had defined her life. She was happy. I was happy too. I’d left that incident alone as a disappointment but not a defining one, or maybe a defining point but one that had shaped me without tearing me down. The weeping Sarah might argue otherwise. Divergence points. Divergence points were the key to everything.  p. 90

This autobiographical detail (or purported autobiographical detail) is another entertaining aspect of the story. Some of it is quite substantial, as above, some is lighter, amusing stuff:

“So why are you here?” Orange Curls was the chattier of the two [Sarahs].
[. . .]
“I looked back at Orange Curls. “Curiosity. I guess I’m here because I’m curious. And maybe a little because if I stayed home I’d always wonder about it.”
The smokers shot each other a satisfied look.
“She’s asked twenty-one Sarahs that question now,” No Good Deeds said, “and that’s been the answer every time. Even the same phrasing.”  p. 56
.
Tonight featured a keynote speech by the host, followed by a DJ’ed dance. Normally that wouldn’t be my thing, but the thought of a dance with a self-curated song list—I pictured upbeat soul, Bowie, 80s pop—and an entire room full of enthusiastic but uniformly terrible dancers, excited me more than I’d admit. There’d be nobody to watch who wouldn’t understand. Maybe I wouldn’t even be the worst dancer in the room. A girl could dream.  p. 57

It’s fun trying to guess what is real and what isn’t.
All in all, this is an interesting and enjoyable piece, but it is more uneven and less polished than her other Hugo finalist Wind Will Rove.
An Abundance of Fish by S. Qiouyi Lu is the only one of the stories that didn’t work for me at all. It is a short squib that starts with a couple in their apartment before it segues to a scene where a plague of flying fish wreck devastation on the country. During this, (spoiler) one of the couple dies. More prose poem than short story.
The Red Secretary by Kameron Hurley (Paetron, 2016) takes place in a far-future war, and involves a military negotiator called Arkadi arriving at a situation where rogue soldiers have taken an installation called the Red Secretary hostage:

From this distance all that was visible of the Red Secretary were three twining spires jutting into the crimson sky, so high that the tops were not visible. Arkadi’s research on the facility told her those spires were high enough to touch the outer atmosphere. They were pretty things, though the prettiness was a secondary characteristic. The spires had a far deadlier purpose. That was likely why the soldiers had taken the thing. Arkadi flipped through her notebook again to review her notes. By all counts no one had been in contact with the rogue squad yet, or received a list of demands, though all frequencies were being monitored.
Now that the war with the enemy was over, not every soldier embraced their contracted end. Some ran away and tried to blend in and forget their crimes of violence and pray to the gods that history would forget them. The government sent Justicars after those ones. But for the more dangerous ones, the soldiers trying to make a statement by blowing up someone or something in protest of the fate they signed up for when they enlisted, the government called in Arkadi to negotiate.
This was her sixty-first negotiation with rogue soldiers.  p. 101-102

When she arrives at the forward base she is briefed on the situation: there is concern that the soldiers will destroy the facility and the vast quantity of methane underneath it, and that this will imperil the entire province. Arkadi then goes to the Red Secretary with a six-legged dog to talk to the soldiers (she hopes that, while the soldiers may shoot her on sight, they will hold fire if they see the dog, and this calculation proves correct). Once at the door to the facility she begins a conversation with a soldier.
Throughout the story there are intriguing background details: the story is set at the end of a cyclical three hundred year war; the soldiers employed in that war use strange enemy tech; after the fighting ends those who have killed must walk into the Incinerators.
This is a dark but readable piece, and I’ll be interested to see the other stories in this series.4

The Cover for this issue is by Julie Dillon: this one is more muted than the brighter dayglow ones the magazine often uses. The cleanly designed “Uncanny” title echoes the comet-tail titling of the 30s and 40s pulps; I don’t like the excessive lettering at the bottom of the cover (they seem to have gone down the Galaxy’s Edge route by shotgunning all the contributors—and in this case, editors—onto the page).
There are four poems in the magazine and, although I didn’t particularly like any of them, I thought time, and time again by Brandon O’Brien and The Axolotl Inquest by Lisa M. Bradley were okay. The Size of a Barleycorn, Encased in Lead by Bogi Takács seems to be a mashup of Jewish history and nuclear weapon management (I think). Protestations Against the Idea of Anglicization by Cassandra Khaw has a lot of swearing and attitude, and reads like something written by an angry sixth-former for an A-level assessment.
I’d add that, on the whole, they all strike me as being closer to what my idea of poetry is than those which appear in Asimov’s Science Fiction (and which I generally dislike).
The editorial that leads off the magazine, The Uncanny Valley by Lynne M. Thomas and Michael Damian Thomas, starts with a game of “The Exquisite Corpse” from Twitter:

Because Michael was procrastinating about writing this issue’s editorial, he decided to ask Twitter to do it. This section is The Uncanny magazine Exquisite Corpse Editorial. The Exquisite Corpse was an old Surrealist game where you build off of what the previous person created, but you never see the whole. In this case, each writer only read the previous sentence before writing their sentence. Then their sentence and only their sentence was passed to the next person, and so on. On that note, enjoy this editorial by nearly 40 writers!  p. 5

Although the first couple of hundred words isn’t bad it turns into four pages of gibberish, and strikes me as a remarkably lazy and self-indulgent way to open the magazine. If you have nothing to say, say nothing. This section is not helped by what is either (a) poor proof reading after cutting and pasting from Twitter, or (b) deficient typography: there is no or little space after some of the commas and fullstops (a problem present elsewhere in the issue).5
What is even more self-indulgent is the political rant that follows:

What matters most of all about the Exquisite Corpse is that it was created by almost 40 writers. I made the joke on Twitter, and people quickly lined up to play. I had to actually cap the participants! You see, the Space Unicorn Ranger Corps is a Community. A glorious community of tens of thousands of people from a tremendous number of backgrounds—people who love fun, art, beauty, and kindness. They are Space Unicorns who appreciate each other, and will fight the fascists together with everything they’ve got.
I’m writing this during the first month of the current regime. The assholes have created a swirling mess of malice and incompetence. Every day, there are dozens of stories that make anybody with basic human empathy upset and angry. It’s easy to despair. It’s easy to be overwhelmed. But we’re here for each other. Collectively, we can fight this.
In early February, I made an open call for essay pitches about how we can fight the current darkness. We received a gigantic number of ideas from so many amazing people, and you’ll be seeing the first batch of political essays in this issue. These essays are filled with passion, strategy, and bold resistance. As we said last issue:
THESE UNICORNS FIGHT FASCISTS.  p. 8-9

The “Space Unicorn Ranger Corps” stuff above (it appears elsewhere as well) struck me as twee, and the “Fascists” is—and I say this as a disinterested foreign observer—just ridiculous (never mind minimizing the experiences of those who have suffered under genuinely fascist regimes).6
It gets worse: there are no less than four political essays at the end of the issue, with catchy titles like Resistance 101: Basics of Community Organizing for SF/F Creators & Consumers, Volume One: Protest Tips and Tricks by Sam J. Miller, Act Up, Rise Up by Elsa Sjunneson-Henry, #beautifulresistance by Shveta Thakrar, A Work of Art Is a Refuge and Resistance by Dawn Xiana Moon. This ranges from the banal (“Charge your devices before leaving [for marches or demos]. Bring an external battery if possible”) to the emotionally incontinent (“I watch, and my heart hurts”). I can’t recall this level of political belly-aching in any other SF magazine that I’ve ever read.7
This all seems curiously self-defeating too: those who agree will want to moan themselves, not listen to others do so; those who do not share this view or are apolitical will be either irritated and/or bored, and will perhaps stop reading the magazine. This is not a problem, I suppose, if you are giving it away anyway, and you have the added bonus that you don’t have to put up with the messiness of actually trying to communicate with those who do not agree with you.
There is a final essay that is worth reading, Fandom in the Classroom by Paul Booth. It starts with this:

When I tell people that I’m a professor who teaches classes on fandom, I’m usually met by one of two reactions. One reaction is disbelief, as if I had just told them I teach classes on juggling, origami, or beer pong. This stems from the perception that the academic classroom is a hallowed space where deep discussions lead to meaningful discoveries (and popular culture, the thinking goes, just doesn’t get us there)—think Mr. Chips, not Mr. Miyagi; epic poetry, not fanfic; Twain, not Twilight. The other reaction is jealousy, usually accompanied by a plaintive sigh and “I wish they had courses like that when I was in college!” For these green-eyed friends, studying fans and fandom is meaningful because popular culture reveals the intricacies of contemporary life and the influence of the media on our cultural (and individual) consciousness. (There is a rare third reaction to my fan studies classroom, as most mechanics ask, “V-belts or serpentine?”)  p. 148

This too is political to an extent but, unlike the others, isn’t a moanfest. It is dispassionate, shows a sense of humour and, crucially, it has something of interest to say.
There are two short interviews. The first is Interview: Stephen Graham Jones by Julia Rios. The author is described as Blackfeet Native American (identity politics is the magazine’s other big thing, played out in the author notes with increasingly reductive minority labelling). I smiled at the author pushback to this (reasonable enough, it must be said) question:

Uncanny Magazine: You’ve said before that you don’t want to be pigeonholed “as an Indian writer,” which is understandable, and which seems to be something you’ve successfully avoided so far. While it’s definitely true that people should be able to write about more than just one facet of their lived experiences, there are also a lot of good arguments for the importance of stories about marginalized people told in their own voices. What are your feelings on that, and how do they manifest in your work?
.
Stephen Graham Jones: I just figure I am Blackfeet, so every story I tell’s going to be Blackfeet. Also, there’s not just one “Blackfeet” story, of course. There’s not a single American Indian narrative. And every single one’s valid. Also, I’m from West Texas, so every story I tell, it’s a West Texas story. You can’t really escape where you come from, and you always inhabit the political space you inhabit. Just, what you have to figure out, it’s what you want to sell, what you don’t want to sell.  p. 171-172

The second is Interview: Sarah Pinsker, again by Julia Rios. This is mostly about her story and it touches on its personal elements:

Sarah Pinsker: There is a bunch of autobiographical information in here, mixed in with stuff that is not true, stuff that I wish was true, and stuff that I most definitely don’t wish was true. I don’t know if it matters which parts are which, other than the stipulation that I have no homicidal intent and I wish Seattle the best of all possible futures.  p. 176

In conclusion: it is notable that nearly all the stories in this magazine have a recognisable plot, or narrative or other arc (something that a number of publications should perhaps emulate) and, if the generally good standard of fiction here is typical, I look forward to reading future issues. ●

_____________________

1. I registered to vote for the Hugo Awards this year as I think some of the selections in recent years have been, ah, ‘interesting’ choices to say the least. I doubt my solitary vote will swing anything but that isn’t really the point, is it?

2. The PDF runs to 181 pages (they are all marked “Digitized by Google”, and before the cover image there is an annoying page of blah from them):

This issue has approx. 43,000 words of fiction (8,200 reprint).
The Google Play ebooks edition is the cheapest, £2.25, compared with Amazon (£2.25-£3.20) and Weightless Books ($3.99, around three quid at the current exchange rates).

3. Lee Kuan Yew is a former prime minister of Singapore. His Wikipedia page is here.

4. According to the ISFDB page for Kameron Hurley’s The Red Secretary, there is at least one other story in this series, The Judgement of Gods and Monsters. ISFDB says in was first published via Patreon.com in July 2016, but it was published earlier than that in Beneath Ceaseless Skies #200, 26th May 2016. The story has a 2015 copyright notice on the BCS site, so perhaps the ISFDB note has the wrong year.

5. This is what p. 6 looks like (the highlighted commas and fullstops seem to have no space at all between them and the next word, and some of the others are far too close to the following words as well—I suspect the type tracking hasn’t been set up correctly: look at how everything is jammed close together on the fifth line):

6. The Wikpeida page definition of fascism: “Fascism is a form of radical authoritarian nationalism, characterized by dictatorial power, forcible suppression of opposition and control of industry and commerce.”

7. There has been political comment in SF magazines before though: Campbell wrote a number of editorials about US political events in Analog  in the early 60s (and maybe earlier too); Ted White gave a running commentary on Nixon and Watergate in the editorials and the letter columns of Amazing (and possibly Fantastic, I forget). ●

Uncanny is available from Google Play, Amazon UK/US, and Weightless Books.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Authentic Science Fiction #31, March 1953

ISFDB link

_____________________

Editor, H. J. Campbell

Fiction:
The Rose • novella by Charles L. Harness ∗∗∗∗+
Never Been Kissed • reprint short story by E. Everett Evans
Frontier Legion (Part 6 of 6) • novella serial by Sydney J. Bounds

Non-fiction:
Cover • by John Richards
Interior artwork • by John Richards (x2) [as by Davis], Fischer (x2)
H. J Campbell’s Page • editorial by Herbert J. Campbell
Scientist and Censor: Should They Meddle?
• essay by William F. Temple
American Commentary
• essay by Forrest J. Ackerman
SF Handbook: Terms of Interest to the Science-Fictioneer • essay by Herbert J. Campbell [as by uncredited]
Book Reviews • by Herbert J. Campbell
Projectiles
• letters

_____________________

This issue of Authentic has the story that the magazine will probably forever be remembered for, Charles Harness’s classic novella, The Rose, a piece that can probably be described as “transcendent super-science meets art-house cinema”. The story, rejected by all the American markets, was finally sold by Forrest J. Ackerman, not to the Campbell that Harness probably wanted to sell it to (John W. Campbell Jr. at Astounding), but this one (Herbert J. Campbell).1 The story would be out of print for another 13 years, until Michael Moorcock issued it (along with two other short stories) as a Compact Books paperback.2

The character at the heart of The Rose is Anna van Tuyl, a psychiatrist who is physically deformed, as we find out when she looks in a tall mirror:

Sombre eyes looked out at her, a little darker than yesterday: pools ploughed around by furrows that today gouged a little deeper—the result of months of squinting up from the position into which her spinal deformity had thrust her neck and shoulders. The pale lips were pressed together just a little tighter in their defence against unpredictable pain. The cheeks seemed bloodless, having been bleached finally and completely by the Unfinished Dream that haunted her sleep, wherein a nightingale fluttered about a white rose.
As if in brooding confirmation, she brought up simultaneously the pearl-translucent fingers of both hands to the upper borders of her forehead, and there pushed back the incongruous masses of newly-grey hair from two tumorous bulges—like incipient horns. As she did this she made a quarter turn, exposing to the mirror the humped grotesquerie of her back.
Then, by degrees, like some netherworld Narcissus, she began to sink under the bizarre enchantment of that misshapen image. She could retain no real awareness that this creature was she. That profile, as if seen through witch-opened eyes, might have been that of some enormous toad, and this flickering metaphor paralysed her first and only forlorn attempt at identification.
In a vague way, she realised that she had discovered what she had set out to discover. She was ugly. She was even very ugly. p. 6

After this she breaks the mirror, which gets the attention one of her colleagues, Matt Bell. He distracts her by returning the score for her unfinished ballet, which is based on the Oscar Wilde story, The Nightingale and The Rose.3 (The story tells of a student who needs a red rose to gain admittance to a ball, and a nightingale which helps him by fatally piercing its chest on a thorn to let its blood turn a white rose red.) Bell tells her how good the ballet is, and mentions that “the man who read your Rose score” wants to stage it at the annual Via Rosa festival. There is a taxi waiting to take her to meet him, and Anna goes.
After wandering around the bohemian quarter of Via Rosa for a while, she hears her music playing from speakers, and is approached by a man in a white suit with green and purple polka dots. He too is deformed. He asks her to dance with him, and she reluctantly agrees.
Later, they end up in White Rose Park, where she tells him of her dream:

She began haltingly. “Perhaps I do know about this place. Perhaps someone told me about it, and the information got buried in my subconscious mind until I wanted a white rose. There’s really something behind my ballet that Dr. Bell didn’t tell you. He couldn’t, because I’m the only one who knows. The Rose music comes from my dreams. Only, a better word is nightmares. Every night the score starts from the beginning. In the dream, I dance. Every night, for months and months, there was a little more music, a little more dancing. I tried to get it out of my head, but I couldn’t. I started writing it down, the music and the choreography.”
The man’s unsmiling eyes were fixed on her face in deep absorption.
Thus encouraged, she continued. “For the past several nights I have dreamed almost the complete ballet, right up to the death of the nightingale. I suppose I identify myself so completely with the nightingale that I subconsciously censor her song as she presses her breast against the thorn on the white rose. That’s where I always awakened, or at least, always did before tonight. But I think I heard the music tonight. It’s a series of chords . . . thirty-eight chords, I believe. The first nineteen were frightful, but the second nineteen were marvellous. Everything was too real to wake up. The Student, The Nightingale, The White Roses.” p. 17

This (spoiler) metaphorically telegraphs the ending of the novella.
She learns that the man is Ruy Jacques and that, as well as having his deformities, he has “forgotten” how to read and write, and that his wife has organised a psychiatrist to see him. Anna already knows this as, coincidentally, his wife has previously contacted for Anna for a consultation. She tells Ruy this, and they part for the night.
The next day Anna goes to see his wife, Martha Jacques, and finds her in the company of Colonel Grade, Chief of the National Security Bureau. Grade is acting as minder to Martha as she is attempting to solve the Sciomnia formula (later described a “final summation of all physical and biological knowledge” that will let “the first person to understand [it] rule not only this planet, but the whole galaxy”). The formula is also known as the “Jacques Rosette”, and Anna realises why when she looks at the paper in front of Martha Jacques:

And then the psychiatrist found her eyes fastened to a sheet of paper on Mrs. Jacques’ desk. And as she stared, she felt a sharp dagger of ice sinking into her spine, and she grew slowly aware of a background of brooding whispers in her mind, heart-constricting in their suggestions of mental disintegration.
For the thing drawn on the paper, in red ink, was—although warped, incomplete, and misshapen—unmistakably a rose.
“Mrs. Jacques!” cried Grade.
Martha Jacques must have divined simultaneously Anna’s great interest in the paper. With an apologetic murmur she turned it face down. “Security regulations, you know. I’m really supposed to keep it locked up in the presence of visitors.” Even a murmur could not hide the harsh metallic quality of her voice.
So that was why the famous Sciomnia formula was sometimes called the “Jacques Rosette”: when traced in an ever-expanding wavering red spiral in polar co-ordinates, it was . . . a Red Rose. p. 21-22

The first part of the interview, where they discuss her prospective patient, initially proceeds straightforwardly, but then they are interrupted by one of Grade’s underlings, and the pair learn that Anna met Ruy Jacques the night before. Apart from Martha’s possible jealousy, Grade thinks there may be national security implications. However, before matters can deteriorate further, Ruy arrives, entering though a previously locked door that only Colonel Grade had the combination for. Ruy also appears to know what the group have been talking about.
Anna observes Ruy and Martha arguing (this is mostly about art versus science—the couple are essentially personifications of these subjects throughout the story), and she sees how dysfunctional their relationship is. This is all brought to a halt when Ruy collapses, and Anna summons an ambulance to take him to her clinic.

To say that the rest of the story spirals around these three characters barely scratches the surface of what is packed into this multi-layered 31,000 word novella. Apart from the repeated imagery (particularly of roses), and the ongoing science vs. art arguments (which contain cultural references to the likes of Wilde, Rimbaud, Goya, Milton, and many, many others), we find out more about Ruy’s anatomical peculiarities. These appear to be similar to Anna’s, and later it seems that they provide knowledge of future events. These matters are laid out in two of the several mini-science essays that, like the cultural references and the imagery, permeate the work.
Later, matters come to a head when Anna goes to a party at the Jacques’ house and there is an incident involving her and Ruy. Grade demands to question Anna about her relationship with Ruy and the security implications. In the interview she is confronted with incriminating written evidence about Art versus Science, and the destruction of the Sciomnia weapon (the papers are written in her hand but were produced by Ruy’s automatic writing). Anna looks at them but realises that, like Ruy, she has now lost the ability to read. Moreover, she can sense metal objects in the room, and the interrogator’s gun is screaming “Kill! Kill! Kill!”. Ruy helps her to escape and, after a short pursuit she is left alone in the White Rose Park:

At that instant a blue-hot ball of pain began crawling slowly up within her body, along her spine, and then outward between her shoulder blades, into her spinal hump. The intensity of that pain forced her slowly to her knees and pulled her head back in an invitation to scream.
But no sound came from her convulsing throat.
It was unendurable, and she was fainting.
The sound of footsteps died away down the Via. At least Ruy’s ruse had worked.
And as the mounting anguish spread over her back, she understood that all sound had vanished with those retreating footsteps, forever, because she could no longer hear, nor use her vocal chords. She had forgotten how, but she didn’t care.
For her hump had split open, and something had flopped clumsily out of it, and she was drifting gently outward into blackness. p. 115-116

Before this point I hadn’t found the piece as stellar as I had remembered. It isn’t bad, far from it, but only good to very good, and not the excellent that I remembered. This is probably because it is rather uneven in places, and in others it could have done with a little rewriting to smooth the joins. There is also the relentless ideation, which is sometimes detrimental to the flow of the piece: it feels as if Harness knew he was going to stop writing for the next decade or so and was trying to use up every idea he had left.4
However, the mini-climax in White Rose Park sets up (spoiler) the excellent final section. This takes place later at what should be the premiere of Anna’s ballet, but the lead ballerina has been bribed to stay away and it appears as if the show will be cancelled. However, as Martha turns up to gloat at Ruy’s failure, Anna makes a surprise arrival: she has been missing since the night of the party but, nevertheless, prepares to perform the role herself. When she finally dances on stage it is as if she is aided by what everyone thinks are costume wings on her back.
This last section involves not only Anna’s performance but a scene where Ruy is held captive by his wife. The final battle between science and art takes place between Martha’s Sciomnia weapon and the transfigured Anna. After this is over we get a brief, transcendent glimpse of a possible future populated by people like Anna and Ruy, thousands of years in the future, and spread across the Galaxy.
The story has a stunning final passage where Anna dies, having absorbed the blast of the Sciomnia weapon:

As [Ruy] stared stuporously, her dun-coloured wings began to shudder like leaves in an October wind.
From the depths of his shock he watched the fluttering of the wings give way to a sudden convulsive straining of her legs and thighs. It surged upward through her blanching body, through her abdomen and chest, pushing her blood before it and out into her wings, which now appeared more purple than grey.
To the old woman standing at his side, Bell observed quietly: “Even homo superior has his death struggle, his rigor mortis.”
The vendress of love philters nodded with anile sadness. “And she knew the answer . . . lost . . . lost . . .”
And still the blood came, making the wing membranes thick and taut.
“Anna!” shrieked Ruy Jacques. “You can’t die. I won’t let you! I love you! I love you!”
He had no expectation that she could still sense the images in his mind, nor even that she was still alive.
But suddenly, like stars shining their brief brilliance through a rift in storm clouds, her lips parted in a gay smile. Her eyes opened and seemed to bathe him in an intimate flow of light. It was during this momentary illumination, just before the lips solidified into their final enigmatic mask, that he thought he heard, as from a great distance, the opening measures of Weber’s Invitation to the Dance.
At this moment the conviction formed in his numbed understanding that her loveliness was now supernal, that greater beauty could not be conceived or endured.
But even as he gazed in stricken wonder, the bloodgorged wings curled slowly up and out, enfolding the ivory breast and shoulders in blinding scarlet, like the petals of some magnificent rose. p. 135-136

A seminal, if slightly uneven, piece.

The rest of the fiction in this issue is as poor as I had been expecting from Authentic. There is a short story from the well-known fan E. Everett Evans,5 Never Been Kissed (first published as Little Miss Ignorance in Other Worlds, September 1950). It is the first of three ‘Barbara Greenwood’ stories, and the only one ever reprinted. It starts with Greenwood arriving at the spaceport on Mars, where a man called James Foxe starts talking to her. After a short conversation between these strangers, Foxe offers her a job as his secretary. As you would when you talk to a stranger at a port or airport.
It later materialises that Greenwood can type both quickly and accurately, and has a photographic memory but is ignorant of many everyday matters. She starts a relationship with Jimmy, and later repairs a complicated computer. She is quite emotional about the thought of failing the latter task but she perseveres, and eventually succeeds.
The story comes to its (obvious) conclusion when Jimmy proposes, whereupon she reacts badly and refuses, telling Jimmy to go and see his boss for the reason. At that meeting (spoiler) we find out she is a robot! After a brief discussion about this between Jimmy and his boss, they rush to her house just as she is away to fry her brains with a coil of copper wire. They manage to stop her before there is any damage. When she comes around they tell her that everything will be fine, because they are robots too! Everyone is on Mars! This is not only dated but is also the most ridiculous story I’ve read in some time.

Frontier Legion, the serial by Sydney J. Bounds, ends with this sixth instalment. As I predicted in my review of part one in #26, Bounds manages to keep the plates spinning as long as the hero’s amnesia persists and the underlying plot is hidden: this takes us through parts two and three. In part four the story becomes increasingly silly with Arrowsmith undergoing a supposedly perilous hypnotic procedure, not to mention that it becomes obvious that the entire Pluto episode, i.e. more than half the story, is a red herring: the threat is on Earth’s moon, where various planetary leaders are meeting to form a Federation (which will mean the end of the Frontier Legion).
Arrowsmith, his wife, and the miner who saved them from the security services, steal a spaceship and go to Earth. They take a prisoner with them, Lieutenant Bauer.
In part five Bauer, apropos of nothing, mentions “Copernicus”, which is the trigger word that gives Arrowsmith his memory back: Raymond is planning to kill all the leaders at their meeting on the moon (which Lydia already mentioned in the last part, if I recall correctly).
They slip through the least convincing space blockade I’ve ever read about, and then Raymond calls them saying he has Lydia’s (and Arrowsmith’s) daughter hostage.
This last part wouldn’t be that bad if it wasn’t for Arrowsmith having a raging attack of egomania. He (spoiler) puts his daughter’s life in danger without a second thought, finds out that there is a device to shatter the glassite dome covering the moon station, kills Commandant Raymond, and thwarts the plot. The story finishes with him immodestly taking full credit (undeservedly, as his wife had a major role). Lydia and her daughter watch him on TV, knowing that they will never see him again.
Apart from the dumb plot, Bounds cannot write anything other than functional, plot-driven prose. Take the dramatic opening of part three (#28) where Arrowsmith is about to be shot by the Frontier Legion guards:

Death cast its long shadow at Jan Arrowsmith, reaching for him with black fingers. He was a puppet dangling from the thread of life, suspended above the gaping jaws of eternity . . . and, in seconds, the thread would snap. Seconds of time. Bright seconds, fixed and unalterable, with his awareness at white-heat and concentrated on the timeless moment stretched before him. p. 109

Apart from this kind of thing, Bounds also repeats the same descriptions of his characters ad nauseam. Commandant Raymond is repeatedly described as having a “moonface”, Lydia, his wife, is nearly always “lithe”. You wonder how any writer could miss this on rereading or redrafting, all of which makes me wonder if this went straight from the typewriter to the editor.

The Cover, by John Richards, is obviously for the Harness novella. I don’t particularly like it, partly because it portrays Anna as a witchy hag. There are also interior illustrations by this artist (under the “Davis” pseudonym for some reason). I like those but have the same reservation about Anna’s portrayal. The other stories are competently illustrated by Fischer (I like the one for the Bounds’ serial). There is also an astronomical photograph on the back cover.

This issue has a new title page design:

There had just been a redesign in issue #29, but that only lasted two issues:

The listings are tidier on first of these, but I like the design at the top of this one.
H. J Campbell’s Page, the editorial, covers a variety of topics in the first half: a reaffirmation about the future inclusion of a short novel in the magazine, extra short stories because of the magazine’s increased size; a rave for Harness’s novella with the news it will appear in America in hardback (this never happened); a promise to run no more serials because of reader dislike; a note that the “starred letter” in Projectiles will now win a selection of books; and news of Forrest Ackerman’s visit to an upcoming SF convention.
The second half is a messianic rant about how the UK should develop interplanetary space travel, and the perils of other countries establishing a moon base, or even launching a satellite, before us. It ends with this:

In this magazine and in others of its kind, we treat the subject fictionally. But it is incumbent upon us to be sure that it will remain in the realms of fiction only a little longer. By spreading the gospel of science fiction we also bring home to those less imaginative than ourselves the dark possibilities—some would say probabilities—that come from being an earthbound nation while others hold the key to space.
In time, I hope, our politicians will realise that science fiction is not the stuff that childish dreams are made of but the stuff that makes for nightmares of a kind never before experienced in human history. Let us hope they are not too late.
But hope is not enough. Something has to be done. It is being done. Science-fiction fans are on the increase. This magazine alone can show a list of many thousands of people who never read science fiction before and are now staunch supporters.
They would think it strange, you know, those men in high office, those men in the City with their stocks and shares, those reformers and philosophers and prim and proper highbrow socialists—they would think it strange if you told them that science fiction is playing a vital part in the defence of democracy as we know it in Britain. But it’s true.
They would laugh. They might sneer. But the time will come when in one of these editorials I will tell you about that first Moon rocket. I hope it will be one of ours. p. 3

Scientist and Censor: Should They Meddle? by William F. Temple is an interesting article about the fate of his movie, Four Sided Triangle, and how Temple managed to defend it from scriptwriter interference only to fall foul of the censor:

I couldn’t have guessed then that one day a science-fiction film bearing my name (although I didn’t write the script) would end up with the rare creature being duly destroyed in routine fashion, and its creator done for too, in a general chorus of “He didn’t oughter . . .”
For this was the first scenario ending of the film version of my novel Four-sided Triangle. The creature was a girl, artificially made. The book ending allows her at least the possibility of survival. The first film scenario swatted her like a fly. I protested, and others agreed and managed to get my climax substituted, and filming began on the new script.
I might have known I wouldn’t get away with it. But the real executioner is not a film character nor even the script-writer. He stands behind the scenes, still roughly where he was before the war. Down came the censor’s axe and my creature’s head rolled. It had to. There must be no question about a creature unnaturally born ever surviving. We are not the masters of life and death, pronounces the censor, and we must not assume that power (except in war, it seems).
Is he right?
Strange that I, who once knew the answer, now do not. (My protest about my film was based, not on moral principles, but on those of good story-telling.) I survey the results of scientists’ “meddling” since those days and I see penicillin and the atomic bomb, streptomycin and the V-2.
And somehow I feel that the good and bad of it, like the light and shade of life, can never be separated. And that neither the scientist nor the censor really knows any more about it than I. p. 30-31

American Commentary by Forrest J. Ackerman begins with this piece of (admittedly enjoyable) froth:

So this German-born French gazelle named Gisele, late of Indo-China, was dancing around my living-room till early in the morning.
What has this got to do with science fiction?
Well, I might use the weak excuse that sf author Chas. Beaumont was accompanying her dances, that sf artist Mel Hunter was modelling her in his mind’s eye, that sf film director Curt Siodmak was auditioning her for a part in one of his future pictures. Actually, Gisele was entertaining these guests at my post-preview party of a new scientifilm, at the present time nameless, for which I have suggested such titles as: “The World at Bay,” “Element of Fear,” “How Long Left?”
It concerns a hungry metal (artificial element 161) which threatens to grow and throw the earth off balance. Appropriate to the air of authenticity with which the production has been imbued, I passed out copies of the current Authentic to Ray Bradbury, Ross Rocklynne, S. J. Byrne and the other celebrities present. p. 51

This is followed by some movie news, and then the obligatory self-promotion:

Proof of the growing popularity of our favourite literature is the fact that my Agency, which handles the literary material of some ninety or so sf authors, placed over twice as many manuscripts on the world market in 1952 as in 1951! p. 51

SF Handbook: Terms of Interest to the Science-Fictioneer explains the meaning of the terms “Q-value” through to “Rocket”. At the bottom of the page is a paragraph titled “Cry Chaos”, which talks about next month’s issue (a short novel by Dwight V. Swain and, among others, short stories from A. E van Vogt and Rick Conroy). There are a number of science fillers throughout the magazine.
The Book Reviews column is only a page and a half long, and all the books examined are science ones, apart from Isaac Asimov’s Currents of Space:

Being an Asimov, there is a good deal of politics in the story, but this time it does not intrude too much.
Indeed, it is there as a necessary and interesting background to the swift action, poised suspense, and first-class characterisation that will make this book something of a favourite. The hero is psychoprobed because he knows too much. It takes him most of the book to get his memory back and when he does all hell is let loose on the smug moneygrabbers who turn their backs on a planet’s impending doom.
You’ll like this story. p. 137

I hope Asimov does better with the amnesiac plot than Bounds did.
Projectiles is three pages of letters that read like a mix of Astounding magazine’s Brass Tacks and Science Discussions, except that some of H. J. Campbell’s replies are grumpier:

Get it quite clear, Brian [Bell], that we are continuing to publish a long novel. The shorts are there for free. If you don’t want to read them, you’ve still got the novel just as you had it before. But do read them. We’ll steer clear of sensationalism and monsters, never fear. And there’ll be very few damsels. Anyway, you’ll be pleased to know we are dropping serials. p. 140

Most of the letters comment positively on the changes, and the writer of the starred letter, James Ratigan, of London, asks Campbell to drop the “Joan the Wad” adverts on the inside cover (these were low-rent good-luck charm advertisements, missing in this issue but which had regularly appeared hitherto):

In conclusion: this a must get issue for the Harness novella. ●

_____________________

1. Harness refers to Campbell’s rejection in his intensely personal introduction to The Rose in the retrospective collection An Ornament to his Profession (NESFA Press, 1997, Amazon UK):

The Rose is about my brother Billy—Blandford Bryan Harness. Billy was nine years older than I, and the age gap precluded the comradely rapport of brothers born closer together. No matter. Maybe he knew me only as a noisy kid, often in his way. But I knew him, as the acolyte knows the demi-god. He was a fine artist; he studied art at TCU, then at the Chicago Art Institute. He wrote short stories but never submitted any for publication. Much much later, I used the plots of several of those stories in my own work. He was a fair mechanic; he kept our ancient Hudson tuned and running. He was many things. No palette of adjectives really illustrates him. He was mocking, wry, sardonic, frequently scornful.
He was killed by two brain tumors. Inoperable, the surgeons said, though God knows they tried. He died at home, in his bed. Mother sat there and held his hand. We all heard his last gasp. He was 26.
I began work on The Rose almost twenty years later. It had been a rough season for me. In the lab where I worked then, a dear friend, a world-class chemist, had been passed over for promotion, and we knew he would now resign. He had been like an older brother to me, a tremendous help when I was just getting started in the patent department. In fact, looking back, he very nearly filled the vacancy left by Billy. His departure was prolonged and painful. Writing The Rose helped me deal with it, like some sort of catharsis. So I finished it and it went out to market.
Every SF market in the U.S. turned it down. John Campbell: “I know only one tune, ‘Pop Goes the Weasel.’” Forrest Ackerman finally sold it in England to Authentic Science Fiction magazine. After that everybody wanted it, and it’s been printed in the U.S. and in six or seven foreign languages.
The tale (as indeed the story itself says) is plotted around a short story, “The Nightingale and the Rose,” by Oscar Wilde. This was in a little fabrikoid-bound volume I found among Billy’s books after he died. I was so impressed, I actually memorized the story—2,500 words.
The picture of Billy I love best: He and I are trying to play checkers on the breakfast-room table. Little Brother Pat keeps interfering. Billy in calm silence unlatches the window screen. picks a puzzled Pat up carefully, lowers him out the window, relatches the screen, returns to the game. It was all so smooth, so ceremonial, so right, that I think little Pat took it as a rare honor.
Wherever a mind could go, Billy had been. He could answer Goethe’s question in Mignon: Yes, he knew the land where the lemon trees grow. And the other things. He had sailed to Byzantium. He had heard the mermaids sing. And the very best of all, he had loved, and been loved.
The perfect Ruy Jacques.

2. The 1966 Compact Books collection The Rose included the novella and an introduction by Michael Moorcock along with two other stories, The Chessplayers (F&SF, October 1953) and The New Reality (Thrilling Wonder Stories, December 1950). Moorcock was obviously a fan as he also reprinted two stories in New Worlds magazine, Time Trap (Astounding Science Fiction, August 1948) in #150, and Stalemate in Space (Planet Stories, Summer 1949) in #165. (This latter publication must be the only intersectional part of the Planet Stories/Moorcock New Worlds Venn diagram!)
It was probably no coincidence that Harness started publishing new material again in 1966 after a 13 year layoff.

3. Oscar Wilde’s The Nightingale and The Rose is here. The Rose follows its plot but has a completely different takeaway on the subject of love.

4. I initially thought the relentless ideation was due to Harness putting too much in. Damon Knight’s In Search of Wonder (Advent, 1956, Amazon UK) reports Harness’s comment about another work:

Flight Into Yesterday (reprinted as The Paradox Men) represents the brilliant peak of Charles L. Harness’ published work; Harness told me in 1950 that he had spent two years writing the story, and had put into it every fictional idea that occurred to him during that time. p. 134

However, I later found out that The Rose was initially a much longer work while reading an interview conducted with the author by Darrell Schweitzer (Chronicle #236, June 2003, reprinted in Speaking of the Fantastic II, 2004, Amazon UK, Google Play):

Harness: [. . .] In fact, I wrote a considerably longer version of [“The Rose”]. I didn’t like that, and I started changing it around, abbreviating it, cutting out. So it finally wound up to be what it is now. It was totally unplanned. The final product was not recognizable from anything in the beginning. It just turned out that way. In fact, right up to the end, I was making changes in it. I threw away the original, which is probably a good thing. But what [has] survived is a very neatly packaged little novella, which has some entertainment value.
Q: But you had some difficulty selling it, so that it originally appeared in Authentic SF, a very marginal magazine. But again we have thousands of other stories from the same period that are forgotten. . . . Did you get a lot of bewildered rejections from American editors? Why were you unable to publish “The Rose” in a major American magazine?
Harness: My agent at the time was Forrest Ackerman. He submitted it to every science-fiction magazine in the United States. Every one turned it down. For a long time I kept John W. Campbell’s letter rejecting it. It troubled him, I think, because I brought music into it as a theme. He said that he understood “Pop Goes the Weasel” and he knew one other tune, but he couldn’t remember what. He had to turn it down. So maybe the times have changed and it is acceptable now, but back then nobody wanted it.

So (a) not too much put in but, perhaps, too much taken out, and (b) I don’t understand Campbell’s response: the music references are hardly a key element in the story.
I wish Darrell Schweitzer had asked what the other editors said in their rejection letters, particularly Boucher & McComas at F&SF.

5. SFE has this page for Evans. ●

rssrss

3 thoughts on “Authentic Science Fiction #31, March 1953

  1. Walker Martin

    Thanks for reviewing this famous issue of AUTHENTIC SF. It’s a real puzzle to me why no American SF magazine would publish this great novella. John Campbell of ASTOUNDING I can understand because he was not interested in any type of so called literary SF. But I’m surprised that Boucher and McComas did not publish it. Even STARTLING and THRILLING WONDER had published two or three of Harness’ complicated stories.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      I suspect ‘The Rose’ was no use for Startling Stories/Thrilling Wonder Stories as it was (a) too talky/cerebral, (b) correspondingly didn’t have enough action, and possibly (c) had a deformed female psychiatrist for a protagonist. But as she mutates into homo superior, probably the first two.
      Funny you should mention Startling Stories though–I’ve been eye-balling the May 1949 issue, the one with ‘Flight Into Yesterday’ (a.k.a. ‘The Paradox Men’) in it. I think I had a go at that (or maybe it was ‘The Ring of Ritornel’) after I read ‘The Rose’ for the first time, and ground to a halt a quarter of the way through. Time to give it another go if that was the one.

      Reply
  2. Walker Martin

    I like The Paradox Men a lot and in fact I’ve been impressed by all of Harness’ early work for Sam Merwin and Sam Mines in STARTLING/WONDER.

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Authentic Science Fiction #26, October 1952

ISFDB link

_____________________

Technical Editor, H. J. Campbell

Fiction:
Martians in a Frozen World • novella by Rick Conroy ∗∗
Frontier Legion (Part 1 of 6) • novella serial by Sydney J. Bounds

Non-fiction:
Cover • by John Pollack [as by uncredited]
Editorial: Fruition
Forrest J. Ackerman Writes from America
• essay by Forrest J. Ackerman
Projectiles • letters
SF Handbook: Terms of Interest to the Science-Fictioneer • essay by Herbert J. Campbell [as by uncredited]
Book Reviews

_____________________

Authentic Science Fiction always struck me, for a variety of reasons, as a rather odd magazine. First of all it started as a series of novels, only adding short departments such as editorials and letters, etc., later.1 It was some time before it changed significantly and became a ‘proper’ magazine, and the issue I’m reviewing here is the one that first added extra fiction (a serial) to the ‘novel’ and the departments. It changed even more radically with #29, which added short stories and artwork.
Secondly, there was the name of the magazine, which changed several times during its run. These were mostly variants of Authentic, but for a short period at the start it was called Science Fiction Fortnightly and then Science Fiction Monthly.2
Thirdly, the magazine appears to have published little of note (with the stellar exception of Charles L. Harness’s The Rose, Authentic Science Fiction Monthly, March 1953).
Finally, and on a more pragmatic note, I found it a difficult magazine to get hold of (my run is still incomplete). A lot of the issues that I have seen are in remarkably poor condition, and look like they spent part of their life in someone’s pocket (this was perhaps because of its small size: the smallest of the issues are around 117 x 179mm in size, or 45/8 x 7 inches in old money, slightly wider than Roberts & Vinter’s New Worlds and Science Fantasy but the same height, and with softer covers).
The magazine was published by Hamilton and Co. (they later launched the well-known Panther imprint), and its first editor was “L. G. Holmes” (whose real name was Gordon Landsborough). He was also the production editor in charge of Hamilton and Co.’s paperback lines. Holmes was last credited as the editor of the magazine in issue #12 (August 1951).3 The only editor listed in this issue is H. J Campbell (as its “Technical Editor”).4

As for the fiction in this issue, it largely consists of a 35,000 word novella by Rick Conroy, Martians in a Frozen World. This gets off to reasonable start:

The supply ship had landed them in Penguin Bay towards the end of the short Antarctic summer. Then it turned its bows towards the north, and began to push its way through the pack ice surrounding Antarctica, in the hope of getting into open water before winter set in.
The fifteen men—all with a scientific training, as geologists, meteorologists and so on—set to work on the piled-up stores with a deliberate frenzy. They had to fabricate a blizzard-proof shelter before the ferocious Antarctic blizzards came down. They erected the storm-hut, lashed its roof on with steel cables stretched from the rooftree and hammered into the ice, and surrounded it with wind-breaks of piled packing cases, roofed over to make little tunnels down which, on the calmer days, the dug-in men could burrow for supplies. p. 5

After they establish their base, three men set off to set up a met station a few days’ travel away. Initially they send regular radio reports—then one day there is nothing. A day later there is a garbled report of an “Octopus” and a “Beauty”, followed by a month’s silence. Once the blizzards stop, the camp doctor sets off to investigate. When he arrives at the station he finds a dead dog which appears to have been crushed by a huge tentacle. Doc then goes into the hut and reads a diary belonging to Sven, who has included references to a beautiful giant woman who is ten feet tall.
Later that night, Doc wakes up:

The alarm clock was ticking. Quite a loud tick.
And suddenly that loud tick was drowned as the wind roared up and then died down, as if in a brief wave.
The Doc had been hearing that noise for weeks and weeks, all through the winter. It was the noise made when someone opened the outer door of a storm-hut.
Every muscle went tense. He could feel his heart beating violently, almost deafening him by throbbing in his ears.
Maybe one of the boys had come back?
But how could they have survived out in the open, through the blizzards of the past fortnight?
Then the brief, faint noise of someone turning the handle of the inner door.
The Doc’s hand, automatically, reached out for his electric torch.
As the door opened, he had his hand on the actual button.
And when it was well open, he pressed it. A spreading stream of light flashed across the dark hut.
That door was seven feet high. High enough for the Doc to go through upright—and the Doc was no chicken.
But this creature, illumined for a second by the light of the torch, seemed almost bent double.
Her full height would be about ten feet. Yes, no doubt about her sex. She wore a garment made of a single piece of fabric, midway between an Indian sari and a Roman toga, but light as gossamer. Her hair was down across her shoulders. Her feet were bare. On one wrist was strapped something like a very large wrist-watch indeed.
No signs of frost-bite.
The Doc remembered thinking, in the way that strange thoughts do pop into the mind at moments like these, that her feet (30 cms. x 8 cms.) were quite proportional to her height. In fact, they looked rather dainty.
She looked straight across the hut, into the beam of the torch. Her eyes were large, dilated. A human’s eyes, Doc recalled thinking, would have blinked in such a glare. But those eyes merely stared.
She made a gesture with her hand. Something dropped on to the floor with a light plop. The Doc braced himself, as if for an explosion, but nothing happened, except that she backed out of the door, closing it behind her. p. 21

The giant woman has left a note from Sven: he reports that he is helping aliens in need, warns the doctor about going outside, and says he should come and join him at the Equilateral Mountains as soon as he can.
Up until this point this had been a not bad read: the setting is convincing, the characterisation better than normal, and the prose style refreshingly free of the usual SF jargon: I suspected that a mainstream writer was at work here. This is rather unfortunately spoiled by the ridiculous SF plot that starts unfolding.5 This tension between an able writer and a daft story continues to define the rest of the piece.
Later Doc radios the Captain at base camp, and asks for permission to go to the mountains. The Captain assents, and meanwhile contacts naval HQ in the Falkland Islands. They prepare to send an icebreaker and an aircraft carrier.
Doc’s journey involves a fight with an ‘Octopus’—we later learn it is actually a Martian creature called a cagora which looks similar but has an extra pair of pseudopods. He then encounters one of the giant women, who rescues him, carrying him the rest of the way to Sven.
When Doc awakens (he falls asleep on the way) he finds he is indoors. Sven and one of the giant women are there, and Sven explains the setup to Doc: the women are a mining expedition from Mars who have lost control of the cagora, animals that they use for labour. Also, the women and cagora no longer eat normal food (a scientific development) and receive pills and inoculations instead. The cagora have stolen these, and the women face possible starvation before their spaceship returns.
The remaining two-thirds of the story has a plot that involves Doc, Sven, Captain John (the leader of the expedition), the giant women, the cagora, the food supplies, and the aircraft carrier and its aircraft. The extent to which any prospective reader will enjoy this will depend on their general reaction to nonsense (I’ve noticed some reviewers just can’t shrug this off and plough on) and specifically, the giant, pill-eating women nonsense in this one. I managed to ignore it, so I thought it an okay adventure actually, mainly for the strengths mentioned earlier, but also for its occasional humour—this is from when Captain John (who arrives later at the women’s base) and Doc and are being individually shown around the mine:

She took [Captain John] to a place which for a moment looked like a torture chamber. It was warmed slightly—to a couple of degrees above freezing point.
As soon as she entered this chamber, the blond started to perspire like someone in a Turkish bath. And he reflected that, to these Martians, acclimatised to low temperatures, a degree or so above freezing was definitely hot.
To his horror, she started taking off her single shell-pink and diaphanous garment, which though not concealing her maidenly form in any respect, at least preserved decency.
To Doc, who was on his own tour of inspection, but with a slightly plump brunette, and had just reached the door of the Amazons’ gymnasium, it came as a surprise. “Beg your pardon,” he said, distinctly, and closed the door with an insulting gentleness.
The Captain blushed, though there was no one but his blonde to see. She saw the rise in his colour, and thought he must be overdressed, for such a warm room. She reached out a hand to help him off with his uppermost furs. He, misunderstanding, resisted. Her grip, however, was a strong one, and his struggles resulted in his being jerked peremptorily closer.
When the Doc, after a few tactful moments, opened the door for a second time, he decided to give the gymnasium a miss on this particular tour of inspection, and come back a whole lot later . . . p. 78

Notwithstanding the above, it has a rather bleak ending.
Frontier Legion by Sydney J. Bounds is the first part of a six part serial which has its hero regain consciousness and realise he has amnesia. Three men attend him and, as he comes round, he remembers his name is Jan Arrowsmith, that he is a member of the Security Service and has a mission that is vital to Earth’s future—but can’t remember what it is. He does remember that the twenty-second of March is significant. The two other men, apart from the doctor, are Commandant Raymond and Lieutenant Bauer of the Frontier Legion. They are all on the Pluto-bound spaceship Goliath.
After trying, and failing, to get Arrowsmith to answer his questions, Commandant Raymond’s irritation becomes clear, and this is exacerbated because he is apparently under Arrowsmith’s orders.
Arrowsmith’s wife arrives via a shuttle. The two Frontier Legion men leave them, and we later learn that Arrowsmith and his wife are estranged, as he left her when she became pregnant with their daughter. Arrowsmith remembers none of this either.
The last scene has them arriving at Pluto. Arrowsmith and Bauer don their spacesuits and descend into a cave system called The Deeps to see the Plutonians. While they are down there, Bauer’s spacesuit light goes out and Arrowsmith is left alone. He realises that aliens have surrounded him . . . .
This is a fairly fast paced and intriguing start, and the amnesiac hero trope, if not exactly original, is competently handled. We’ll see how it goes.

ISFDB credits the Cover to John Pollack but adds, not very helpfully, “Cover artist is not credited. No visible signature. Source of the credit is unknown.” At first I thought that it was painted by an artist who couldn’t handle perspective but, as I found out from reading the Conroy story, it is meant to be a giant woman.
The Editorial titled Fruition, leads off with news about a change to the contents of the magazine:

We’ve done it! A long time ago we made plans for Authentic, plans that were held up by all sorts of controls—one of the biggest being paper trouble. Well, that situation has now eased a bit. Not enough to allow us to go fortnightly again, but sufficiently to bring one of our plans to fruition—a piece of fiction in addition to the long novel. p. 2

The “paper trouble” referred to is post-war paper rationing.
The rest of the column is given over to blurbs for the two stories, and a tetchy reply to some of the letters received:

Some readers have written us again asking why we didn’t publish the criticisms in their first letters. This is because their criticisms were trivial and unimportant: to have published them would have been a waste of premium space. We only publish criticism when it has a strong basis and really affects the accuracy or the quality of the story. Such things as printing three light years instead of three and a half light years we believe to be an error of significance only to those people who simply must air their precious knowledge. They cannot air it in our columns. Even so, serious-minded criticism is welcomed by us. Readers need never be afraid of taking us to task over a story if they really feel something is wrong. We balance readers’ views against each other and shape our policy accordingly. So, let the brickbats fly, but keep the niggling to yourselves! p. 3

Forrest J. Ackerman Writes from America by Forrest J. Ackerman is a page of fluff which partly covers Forry’s adventures in Hollywood:

Wendayne (my wife) and I will dine with cinemactress Sally Forrest tonite. The stf “bug” has bitten her husband, and he wants to fill his den with the best books and decorate it with original art work. (I’ll bet he’d like a cover from ASFm. So would I. So would you!) p. 3

He provides other movie news, and manages to slip in some self-promotion:

The Great Book of Science Fiction will anthologize my Atomic Error, and I have been invited to write a cover story for Other Worlds. p. 3

Projectiles is the magazine’s letter column, which comprises of (to start at least) straightforward bouquets and brickbats. A previous story, Campbell’s Mice or Machines, gets one of the former and two of the latter, and gets this editorial reply:

Well, readers, that’s about the proportion of fors and againsts where Mice or Machines is concerned. It was an experiment on our part, but it pleased only a minority. Basing our policy as we do on your letters, we can say there will be no more stories like Mice or Machines. p. 125

SF Handbook: Terms of Interest to the Science-Fictioneer by Herbert J. Campbell is a page of scientific terms plus some star-gazing information for Jupiter.
Book Reviews is three-quarters of a page that covers five books. Two are science fact (Dragons in Amber by Willy Ley and Rockets, Jets, Guided Missiles and Space Ships by Jack Coggins and Fletcher Pratt), the others are fiction (two are anthologies, Possible Worlds of Science Fiction by Groff Conklin, and The Best Science Fiction Stories: Second Series by Everett F. Bleiler and T. E. Dikty, “These are reduced versions of the big American editions which sell at $2.95”; the other is The Illustrated Man by Ray Bradbury, “It is a classic on the level of Bradbury’s previous Silver Locusts and represents some of the finest examples of this genre you could come across. [. . .] Please don’t miss it.”).

Overall, an okay issue, and not as bad as I had expected. ●

_____________________

1. The magazine added an editorial and letters from #3, and—in some, but not all, issues—had a page of book reviews from #5, a page of science news from #6, and a page of fanzine reviews from #11. This previous issue also has an editorial saying that the readers want long stories, not shorter ones with a “few fills”.

2. The magazine started as Authentic Science Fiction Series. Issues #3-#8 were called Science Fiction Fortnightly, then for issues #9-#12 it changed to Science Fiction Monthly. With issue #13 it became Authentic Science Fiction, and changed again with issue #29 to Authentic Science Fiction Monthly. The title was then stable for several years, becoming Authentic Science Fiction once more with #69, before returning to Authentic Science Fiction Monthly for the last few issues (#78-#84).

3. Wikipedia has this about Landsborough (who appears to have had a fascinating career in the publishing industry). As for the magazine itself there is more information at SFE, Wikipedia and Andrew Darlington’s blog Eight Miles Higher.

4. There is some confusion about who was the editor of Authentic for issues #13 to #28. Science Fiction, Fantasy, and Weird Fiction Magazines by Marshall B. Tymm and Mike Ashley (Greenwood, 1985) has, on p.127, “L. G. Holmes” listed as the editor for issues #1 to #27. However, Mike Ashley’s own Transformations (Liverpool University Press, 2005) states on p. 84, “The series was retitled Authentic Science Fiction Monthly from its thirteenth issue in September 1951, when Campbell took over as editor.” This latter statement would tie in with Wikipedia’s report of Holmes’s departure from Hamilton & Co. in the middle of that year (see the footnote above for a link).
Both of these statements, although seemingly contradictory, may both be partial versions of the truth. “Holmes” (if he didn’t leave Hamilton & Co. until later) may have had the title of editor, but Campbell was the one doing all the work (a not uncommon editorial situation). Indeed, Philip Harbottle’s Vampires From the Void: The Legacy (Cosmos Books, 2011) states on p. 138, “With that issue [#13] Bert Campbell took over most of the duties of editor . . .” (emphasis mine).
Further confusing matters is the appearance of Derrick Rowles on the magazine’s masthead as editor for issues #19-#22. I haven’t managed to find out who this person was but my hunch would be that, if Landsborough did leave Hamilton & Co. in 1951, Rowles was his replacement as production editor.

5. My suspicions about Conroy being a mainstream writer were substantiated by SFE. There is more detail about this writer at Steve Holland’s Bear Alley blog. ●

rssrss

6 thoughts on “Authentic Science Fiction #26, October 1952

  1. Walker Martin

    It’s sort of strange to look at a magazine’s history and everyone says the same thing, mainly that the only outstanding story was Charles Harness’ THE ROSE. It appeared in issue number 31 and I hope you can review it.

    Reply
  2. Todd Mason

    Sometimes it works out that way…there were other readable stories, even a best-of volume, but FANTASY BOOK the 1950s semi-pro magazine is remembered pretty much exclusively for publishing “Scanners Live in Vain”…

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Science-Fiction v21n04, June 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Fiction:
Men Against the Stars • novelette by Manly Wade Wellman –
Below—Absolute! • short story by Harry Walton ∗∗
The Legion of Time (Part 2 of 3) • serial by Jack Williamson +
Philosophers of Stone • short story by D. L. James –
Seeds of the Dusk • novelette by Raymond Z. Gallun
Isle of the Golden Swarm • short story by Norman L. Knight
Three Thousand Years! (Part 3 of 3) • serial by Thomas Calvert McClary

Non-fiction:
Men Against the Stars • cover by H. W. Wesso
Interior artwork • H. W. Wesso, uncredited, Charles Schneeman (x2), Jack Binder (x2), Eliot Dold (x3), uncredited (x2), Howard Brown (x2), Olga Ley (x4)
Fantastic Fiction • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Great Eye • science essay by R. DeWitt Miller
Monstrous Twin • science filler
In Times to Come
The Analytical Laboratory: April 1938
Witnesses of the Past • science essay by Willy Ley
Mars • cover artwork essay
Science Discussions • letters
Brass Tacks
• letters

_____________________

This issue has the second astronomical cover that Campbell commissioned, produced by Wesso for the Manly Wade Wellman story Men Against the Stars. The top and bottom colour bars that were missing on last issue’s cover are back. John Campbell provides an accompanying essay to go with the cover:

As for the story itself, Men Against the Stars by Manly Wade Wellman1 starts with spaceship fifty-one on its way from the Moon to Mars. However, the atomic hydrogen fuel they are using is not stable and, as the crew are discussing their chances of surviving the trip, the ship explodes.

The story then switches its point of view to Tallentyre, the lunar base’s second in command, who has watched the ship explode and is now arguing with his hysterical superior. The latter is trying to deal with the mutinous crew of ship sixty-one, who are refusing to leave and, in any event, he doesn’t want to send another crew to their deaths. After some speechifying from Tallentyre about the sacrifice required to travel in space (I note that when this subject comes up it is usually someone else’s sacrifice), and the problems with atomic hydrogen and jet tubes, he knocks his boss out and goes to deal with the mutineers. Things do not go well:

Tallentyre’s right hand rested easily in the pocket of his tunic. The cold, gray eyes watched the big spaceman steadily. “You think you could get away with violence?”
The big man took a step forward with a hamlike fist clenched before him. “Think, brother? Hu-uh. I know I can,” he said softly. “You tried it yourself inside there.” Without turning his head, he spoke to the men behind him. “Come on, boys. Grab this guy. And one of you tail for the ship and that gun.”
Without relaxing his moveless, wooden face, Tallentyre drew his hand from his tunic pocket. Space volunteers have to have a queer, reckless courage. With a bull roar, the giant captain dove forward with outstretched hands, his face twisted with sudden hate. Tallentyre shot him between the eyes. The big body fell with exaggerated slowness under Lunar pull. p. 10-11

The other four crewmen, appropriately motivated, go on their flight: their spaceship blows up.
A female assistant, Noel, appears and tells Tallentyre she did love him but doesn’t anymore (he never knew that she did). Police arrive from Earth to arrest him for the killing but he escapes outside the base, giving Noel a chance to relent—she called the cops—and tell them what really happened with the mutineers. Tallentyre comes back and finds he is no longer being pursued for the killing, and that a ship is returning. He orders the police to arrest the returning mutineers—Tallentyre is nothing if not single-minded.
The last scene (spoiler) reveals that the arriving crew have actually returned from a base on Mars and, not only that, they have discovered what the problem with the spaceship jet tubes is (this is analogous to the properties of Prince Rupert’s Drop,2 a hard/brittle glass phenomenon mentioned briefly at the start of the story).
This is pretty dreadful fare, and it’s hard to believe that it comes from the author of Pithecanthropus Rejectus (Astounding, January 1938).

Below—Absolute! by Harry Walton starts with two spacemen providing a short data-dump about a dark spot between Alpha Centauri and Earth that they are going to investigate.
As they approach the anomaly there is an interesting description that is similar to the one you would expect for a black hole:

For space before them was empty, with an emptiness not of space. A black meteor, or a swarm of particles, they were ready to face, but sight recoiled from the sheer vacuum of non-spatial darkness which gaped ahead of the ship. This was nothingness made tangible, a canyon of blackness in which the stars were lost, incredibly empty and hostile in its very negation of all things normal.
[. . .]
This was no dark body blotting out the stellar field beyond, no long-dead sun hurtling its cold way unseen through the burial place of the stars, no obscuring cloud of cosmic dust. Of that they presently felt certain. Its outline against the tapestry of the stars was that of an enormous, perfectly circular disk, and—although neither man would have admitted it—both felt it possessed of motion within itself. It crossed Holm’s thought that this was an all-absorbing funnel draining into unknown space and tune, a sucking vacuum of nothingness alien to space as they knew it. p. 24-25

As they approach they discover that the disc is sucking heat out of the universe, and the pair only just avoid freezing to death.
Aliens later take control of their subconscious and start talking to them with their own voices. The aliens are in another universe on the other side of the disc, one that has a lower energy state than ours, and which is dying. The reason that they have opened a passage between the two is to let energy flow from our universe to theirs: as a result of this Earth and the solar system are doomed.
The rest of the story (spoiler) concerns the two men’s struggle to fly their spacecraft into the Passage to destroy the link between the two universes. During this the aliens attempt to physically control them.
This is fairly standard pulp stuff, but there are one or two interesting ideas.

The middle part of The Legion of Time by Jack Williamson continues the story of the battle between the two possible timelines of Jonbar and Gyronchi, and it starts with the time ship Chronion struggling to reach Jonbar—the Gyrane have somehow reduced the probability of its future existence. The ship finally arrives at Jonbar two weeks later.

Lanning finally meets Lethonee, and they have dinner that evening on an outdoor balcony. She tells Lanning that Jonbar has only one night of existence left, but before they can discuss this further, Sorainya and Glarath, high Priest of the Gyrane, arrive to witness the end of the city. Lanning runs to the Chronion as Lethonee fades out of existence.
On the ship, McLan tells Lanning the reason Jonbar has flickered out of existence is that the Gyrane have managed to build a time ship too. With it they have gone back in time and taken someone or something, thus altering the future and assuring their existence. McLan also states that whatever they have taken will be kept under guard in Sorainya’s castle. The Chronion heads for Gyronchi. En route the Gyrane ship appears beside them in the time stream and they find themselves heavily outgunned. One of their crew is killed and two wounded before they manage to escape (the serial is notable for the large number of casualties).

In the next chapter they climb up a cliff to Sorainya’s citadel and gain entry. They move through the dungeons and come upon the guards, who raise the alarm.
This section (the climb up the cliff and the fight through the dungeon) is a great boy’s own adventure, fast-moving, bloody, and with lots of atmospheric description. One of the scenes shows Williamson’s Weird Tales licks:

A dreadful silence filled most of the prison. But from one cell came an agonized screaming, paper-thin from a raw throat, repeated with a maddening monotony. Glancing through a barred door, as he passed, Lanning saw a woman stretched out in chains on the floor. A crystal vessel swung back and forth, above her, pendulumlike. And drops of cold green fire fell from it, one by one, upon her naked flesh. With each spattering, corrosive drop, she writhed against the chains, and shrieked again.
The half-consumed body, Lanning thought, might once have been beautiful. Could this have been some rival of Sorainya’s? A cold hate turned him rigid, and quickened his step. A muffled shot echoed behind him, and the screaming stopped.
Mon coeur!” whispered little Jean Querard. “She shall suffer no more.”
In another cell was a great squeaking and thumping commotion. And Lanning glimpsed huge, sleek rats battling over a body in chains, newly dead, or dying.
Once, beyond, that situation was reversed. A sightless, famished wretch had bitten his own wrist, to let a few drops of blood flow upon the floor. He crouched there, listening, and snatched again and again, blindly, with fettered hands, at the great wary rats that came to his bait. p. 46-47

The instalment finishes with another bloody fight in the great hall, which only Lanning and his old friend Halloran survive. They make their way to the trapdoor in Sorainya’s chambers, and in the vault below they find her embalmed ancestors, treasure beyond measure, and the object (a black brick) they are looking for.
On their way out they find Sorainya and her insect-like kothrin guards waiting. . . .
This serial continues to be a lot of fun and, given its age, a surprising page-turner.

Philosophers of Stone by D. L. James is a pretty awful story that has an inventor called Voorland regain consciousness to find that his transportation machine has malfunctioned and stranded him on an alien planet. The large crystal rock he had previously gathered as a specimen starts talking to him telepathically, and he learns that he will be taken to the Sigarians. On the way (the journey is by means of pseudopods that come out of the ground) the crystal chats away.
Voorland later discovers (spoiler) that the rock is actually using him to gain access to a spaceship that has crash-landed and is buried underground. He manages to escape, and finds that the spaceship crew are humanoid. They need “red metal” to refuel their ship before they can escape—which is conveniently provided by the copper cable of Voorland’s machine.

Seeds of the Dusk by Raymond Z. Gallun1, 3 starts off in third-person omniscient, and describes a spore drifting between the orbits of Mars and Earth in the far future. The spore eventually lands on Earth and starts growing:

The spore had become a plant now. First, it was no bigger than a pinhead. Then it increased its size to the dimensions of a small marble, its fuzzy, greenbrown shape firmly anchored to the soil itself by its long, fibrous roots. Like any terrestrial growth, it was an intricate chemical laboratory, where transformations took place that were not easy to comprehend completely.
And now, perhaps, the thing was beginning to feel the first glimmerings of a consciousness, like a human child rising out of the blurred, unremembering fog of birth. Strange, oily nodules, scattered throughout its tissues, connected by means of a complex network of delicate, white threads, which had the functions of a nervous system, were developing and growing—giving to the sporeplant from Mars the equivalent of a brain. Here was a sentient vegetable in the formative stage. p. 78-79

The point of view then switches to Kaw, an intelligent crow. As the bird is flying overhead the plant he sees it begin to spore and goes down to investigate. There are dead ants all around the plant, and Kaw receives an electric shock from one of its spines. As the plant sends out more spores Kaw realises the threat to life on Earth and flies to the Iterloo, the descendants of humanity. After he tells Zar, one of their irritable representatives, he gets shot for his trouble.

Zar goes to see the plant for himself. When it shocks him, he promptly flames it to the ground with his pistol. He returns to his underground home where the remnants of humanity are preparing to leave the dying Earth for Venus. Despite this, and after discussions among the Iterloo, they decide to build generators to irradiate the surface and kill the plants (and all other life as well).
Meanwhile, we find out that Kaw isn’t dead but only injured. He slowly makes his way back home and, one night when he goes into a ravine to sleep, he does not notice the alien plants that are there and ends up under their hypnotic power. The plants then use Kaw to lure Zar to them, and the Iterloo in turn comes under their hypnotic power. After being encircled by vines for days he eventually escapes, and goes back to the city where the preparations for a move to Venus continue, as do the plans to irradiate the surface.

The story ends (spoiler) some time in the future, with Kaw and all the other surface life still alive: the plants infected Zar with a plague that subsequently wiped out humanity.
This is quite a good piece, and one that I enjoyed for the detailed writing and the far-future Earth setting. However, I wondered why the humans were bothering to make the effort to wipe out the plants when they were planning on going to Venus anyway.

Isle of the Golden Swarm by Norman L. Knight starts with a passenger on a ship watching two natives help a badly injured man aboard:

McGrath came aboard the ship at Port Said, in the middle of an afternoon of withering heat. Two swarthy, white-turbaned men carried him up the gangplank and into his cabin; his legs dangled inertly as if paralyzed. They passed within a few feet of my deck-chair, where I lay baking and sweltering in the shade of an awning. McGrath’s appearance shocked me out of a semi-stupor and into a state of observant wakefulness.
He seemed a youngish man, and yet he was extraordinarily emaciated. His hands were bony talons resting on the shoulders of the two porters. His clothes hung and flapped loosely upon him. Half of one ear was missing, and the tip of his nose had been sliced oft obliquely. The scars were dark red, and obviously recent. His face was the thinly masked face of a skull, the eyes retracted into cavernous sockets and haunted by the shadow of some abysmal fear. p. 97-98

The narrator later meets McGrath on deck and they talk. He listens to a story about the injured man’s adventures in a remote part of the jungle, where he had gone to study apes. After his tribal guides left him (with a warning to keep out of a nearby part of the jungle called the “haunted forest”) he had set up camp in a cave, and later established a relationship with a young male gorilla, “Gunga Din”. They spent a lot of time together and, strangely, the creature forcibly prevents McGrath from entering the “haunted forest”.

Needless to say, the gorilla finds a mate and spends an increasing amount of time away. At this point, McGrath makes another attempt at entering the forbidden area. He is successful, but there is a strange atmosphere there, and a number of animal skeletons with a spiral hole bored in their skulls. The story comes to a climax (spoiler) when he stumbles on a lake with bone-littered shores, and an islet covered in tiny alien buildings. As he watches, a swarm of golden insect-like beings take flight towards him. They shoot tiny, paralysing darts at him when they arrive:

“They were insects! They were giant hornets, the size of humming birds, and their bodies and limbs seemed wrought of burnished gold. They walked upon their two hinder pairs of limbs, but held the fore part of their bodies upright, in the manner of a praying mantis, and were very dexterous with their third and forward pair of limbs. The first squadron to arrive was armed with little crossbows of silvery metal.
[. . .]
A half-dozen of them trotted over me in an exploratory fashion, seemed to confer, then amputated a bit of my nose. The operation was painless; the venom of their darts must have been an efficient local anesthetic as well. They immediately applied a styptic paste to the wound. Then they retired with the fragment to a point just on the edge of my range of vision, where I could not see exactly what they were doing. But my impression was that they—devoured it! p. 106

The insects spend the rest of the day examining McGrath then, when night comes, they go back to their nest. Gunga Din the gorilla arrives to rescue him. The final paragraphs have McGrath display a number of small hypodermic needles, and a miniature cutlass and crossbow.
The first part of this is quite well written, and it reads like a good Weird Tales story, but the ending is a little unconvincing, and too straightforward.

The third and concluding part of Three Thousand Years! by Thomas Calvert McClary gets off to an entertaining start as Gamble the scientist discovers that his ideals conflict with the realities of human nature:

Gamble delivered his promised feast to the clan—fourteen cases of food. Three thousand people looked at the small pile with astonishment.
Gamble smiled. “Concentrated. I assure you, it is sufficient.”
His four assistants prepared the lavish feast in a special catalytic stove. Twenty-three hors d’oeuvres occupied a space about one inch square!
But—the course was delicious. So was the half gill of soup. At the end came a striped pill about the size of a peanut.
“What’s this ?” Prescott grunted skeptically.
Gamble smiled. “A complete banana split. Twelve trimmings.”
The copper man leaned over to Lucky. “I’m not hungry, but I’ll be damned if I et yet! A dinner just don’t seem right unless you got something to wade into.”
Later Lucky found him nibbling joyously on a piece of dried fish. p. 112-113

After this the novel meanders somewhat. There is a grisly chapter where they start making glass, and one of the glass makers has to sacrifice himself by going under the mould, which is full of molten material, to crack it open. There are also critical problems trying to get into a bank vault:

Gamble did not know how men had first built their weary way through ten thousand years to civilization. Gamble could not find that road again, nor could his experts. If that gold vault defied them—if that slim chain of vast science his laboratory preserved should break—Gamble would be broken. He had no second string. Drega could work with raw rock and brute power, could build again. Gamble could not. He knew it. p. 120

Later there are sections detailing other production problems, and attempts to trade with Drega and steel makers in Pittsburgh. There are cannibals and the outside world to contend with as well. Ultimately, a malaise starts to affect Gamble’s society. People defect to Drega, and Gamble is eventually put on trial for putting the human race into suspended animation. Drega acts as the judge, and he ultimately frees Gamble: the two reconcile.
In conclusion, this is a rather uneven piece, and it overdoes the detail of the various industrial processes required by a modern society (although I did go away with a greater realisation of the problems of restarting civilization after an apocalyptic event). Also, McCleary’s premise about the human need for work isn’t convincing (I suspect many people who are in jobs they don’t like would feel the same). Overall though this is an interesting and, at times, highly entertaining novel.

I’ve already mentioned Wesso’s cover above, but he also contributes Interior artwork for the Wellman piece and, I think, the Walton story on p. 23 (it is uncredited but it looks like his work). There is other credited work by Charles Schneeman, Jack Binder, Eliot Dold, and Olga Ley. This leaves Brown and Coughlin from the list of artists on the title page to claim the illustrations for the McClary and Knight stories. Howard Brown did the cover for the McClary in the April issue, and the interior illustrations for all three issues look like that, therefore Coughlin is presumably the artist for the Knight story on p. 97.
I like a number of the illustrations in this issue, the Wesso, Schneeman, Coughlin, Ley, and the first of the Dold pieces for Gallun’s story.
Fantastic Fiction by John W. Campbell is an interesting editorial about how technological changes creep up slowly on society as they are perfected. The last couple paragraphs are prescient in their observation that spaceships and atomic power will “come together” and that their discoverers are “here today”.

The Great Eye by R. DeWitt Miller (who contributed March’s novelette The Master Shall Not Die!) is an interesting science article about the intended uses of the new Mount Palomar 200” telescope, and the problems that will need to be overcome in operating it.
Monstrous Twin is a short filler about the similarities between the “twin elelments” sulphur and selenium. It grimly outlines the problem in certain agricultural situations:

In certain regions of the West, the ground is poor in sulphur. Plants growing there, unable to get the “badly-needed sulphur, take the near-twin element, selenium, instead.
Then the deadliness of the element begins. Cattle and horses, chickens and similar animals eat those plants. Their growing cells require sulphur, and the selenium slips in instead. Hair-cells, trying to manufacture that sulphur-containing protein, first find that the substitute won’t work. The hair-cells are poisoned, die, and ulcerous sores appear. The hair drops out in ugly patches. Sores, cuts, bruises fail to heal, as the growth-stimulating functions of the tissues fail for lack of sulphur. The wounds spread and fester. The animal’s brain is affected.
But selenium-fed hens laying eggs somehow manage to get the selenium into the proteins that should contain sulphur. And it works—somewhat. The things that hatch out live, for a while at least. But they aren’t chickens. They are monstrous things. Growth of young, new cells—where sulphur is most vitally needed—goes on somehow—but it goes wrong. Calves and colts born to cattle and horses fed on that poisoned fodder are monstrous, the degree of wrongness increasing with the proportion of selenium the mother animal ate. p. 96

In Times to Come plugs next issue’s new novelette by Ray Cummings and the associated cover, as well as heralding the return of Clifford D. Simak.
The Analytical Laboratory: April 1938 presents the story-ratings for the April issue, which I commented on in that review.4

Witnesses of the Past by Willy Ley is a fascinating article about “living fossils”, biological oddities such as the duck-billed platypus and the lungfish, etc., and the consternation these animals caused scientists at the time of their discovery.

The accomplished illustrations for this article are, according to the issue’s ISFDB page, “by Olga Ley, per editor response to Isaac Asimov, Astounding, Aug. 1938.”
I’d be interested to know what corrections or additions, if any, a modern biologist would make to this article.
Science Discussions has the usual half-baked and semi-incoherent contributions punctuated by a couple of letters of interest. D. R. Cummins, of Sacramento, CA, comments on favourably on the astronomical covers that the magazine has started using, and has suggestions about others he would like to see:

[How] about some lunar scenery in its probable real colors? The Moon is one of the most-pictured extra-terrestrial objects, but after all, it is the closest and the easiest to examine and will be the first landing place for space travelers. My impression is that the apparent uniformity of color on the Moon is due to the conditions under which we see it. Yesterday it was cloudy here but we could see the snow-covered Sierra Nevada Range sixty miles away illuminated with bright sunlight. It had a silvery brightness curiously like a lunar landscape as seen through a telescope. There was the same lack of variety in coloring, yet in the mountains there is great contrast between the snow and light-gray granite and the green of the trees (pine, fir, cedar, etc.) and the dark, volcanic rock. p. 149

There are a couple of letters that should probably be in Brass Tacks, including one by A. S. McEckron, Galvaston, KA, who provides an amusing description of that column:

It was with considerable surprise and some apprehension that I noted the rather uproarious emergence of Brass Tacks from its well merited banishment to the limbo of obsolescence. Such a department could and should be of inestimable value as a symposium of the opinions and preferences of your readers—if all readers could be persuaded to present their mental reactions as opinions rather than pearls of wisdom from the treasure house of omniscience. Brass Tacks, for some time previous to its banishment contained more stridence than science, more concussion than discussion. It was about as interesting and instructive as a cacophonous wrangle between a covey of quail and a flock of crows; the quail perpetually interrogating “But why? But why? But why?”: and the crows raucously “Because! Because! Because!” And its short sojourn in the editorial hoosegow appears to have improved neither its temperament nor its technique. p. 151

Brass Tacks starts with a couple of correspondents expressing a preference for Dold’s artwork over Wesso’s, which I find rather baffling (Dold has another admirer towards the end of the column). Elsewhere, there are positive comments about the beginning of McClary’s serial Three Thousand Years!
There is one particularly negative letter from James S. Avery, Skowhegan, MA:

In the few short months that you have been editor, you have destroyed practically all of the marvelous work that Tremaine had done for several years before you. You have broken up and disfigured every point that he strove to uphold. The magazine has now absolutely no tradition to look up to. From the first of your issues, the magazine has had a rushed, slapped-together air about it. Even the printers seem to sense it.
My last few issues have been loosely bound, raggedy cut, covers set up unevenly— all in all a general slovenly appearance.
Truthfully, I can say the mag is not one quarter as good as in 1934, and not a fifth as good as in 1937—certainly not very complimentary to you. Its stories have declined in quality—each issue is just a bit poorer than the preceeding. Its art work has gone down frightfully. Brass Tacks has been neglected, heavy science articles have increased. All these signs point to a slow but sure break-down of the old policy. Worst of all— or perhaps it seems the worst to me—is the disgracing placement of Brass Tacks. In the March issue its position was excellent. Why couldn’t it have been left there, instead of being shoved among columns of advertising? Science Discussions is good and should be kept, but in moderation. Why is it today we rarely see any more of the highly enjoyable letters of the type once printed in the old Wonder Stories? That was a department to be proud of! p. 156

I suspect this may be a solitary outlier—but Campbell liked an argument.
With two good serials and a novelette, and a couple of okay short stories (not to mention an unprecedented three science articles I liked!), this issue is probably the best of the early Campbell Astoundings I’ve read so far. ●

_____________________

1. In Campbell’s letter of 28th February 1938 to his friend and correspondent Robert Swisher (in Fantasy Commentator #59/60—recommended, and available at Lulu.com), he talks about Wellman’s and Gallun’s stories, and the changing publication date of the magazine:

“In June we’ll have another astronomical cover—Mars. I’ll have to show it as seen from Diemos, the outer moon, because Phobos is so close you can’t see the whole planet from there. It illustrates ‘Men Against the Stars’ by Manly Wade Wellman, who, incidentally, is coming along damn well. ‘Pithecanthropus Rejectus’ and ‘Wings of the Storm’ both received a way-above-average reception. ‘Men Against The Stars’ had a fine idea, but needed some rewriting. Wellman took a crack at it, and still unsatisfied, I took a hand. See if you can tell, when it appears, where the joinery was done. I rewrote about one third of the story.” p. 82

“Gallun’s a funny one. Once in a while he hits a high-spot like ‘Old Faithful’ and deserves a lot. Most of the time he rides along. He’s gotten three accepts in the last three weeks. One weak, hut not too weak. One medium good. One that almost reaches ‘Old Faithful’ ‘Seeds of Dusk’ is the latter. p. 83

“They’re playing hide-and-seek with Astounding’s publication date,” Campbell complained. “You noticed the nice banner line about ‘second-Wednesday-of-the-month’? But the June issue actually comes out the third Friday. The July issue will come out the fourth Friday. And the fourth Friday thereafter. Don’t ask me why—they, not I, conceived the shift.” p. 83

2. Prince Rupert’s Drop at Wikipedia.

3. It’s not only me (and Campbell) who thought that Gallun’s story was a good one—it was anthologised in (among others) Adventures in Time and Space, edited by Raymond J. Healy & J. Francis McComas, 1946, and in The Astounding-Analog Reader Volume 1, edited by Harry Harrison, Brian W. Aldiss, 1972.
The story has a sequel, When Earth Is Old, written in the same period but rejected by Campbell according to a note for the story on ISFDB (it quotes p. 86 of Gallun’s Starclimber: The Literary Adventures and Autobiography of Raymond Z. Gallun). It eventually appeared in Super Science Stories, August 1951.

4. The Analytical Laboratory for this issue appeared in the August one:

The success of the Wellman novelette and the poor showing for the two serials, especially Williamson’s, perplexes me. At least the Gallun novelette was appreciated. For the record: the Walton, James and Knight stories were never reprinted. ●

Edited 15th November 2019: Archive.org link added.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Beneath Ceaseless Skies #247-249, March 15th-April 12th, 2018

ISFDB links: #244, #245, #246

Other Reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank, All
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews, #247, #248, #249
Jason McGregor, Featured Futures, #247, #248, #249
Stephanie Wexler(2), Chuck Rothman, Tangent Online, #247, #248, #249
Various, Goodreads, #247, #248, #249

____________________________

Editor-in-Chief, Scott H. Andrews

Fiction:
#247:
The War of Light and Shadow, in Five Dishes • short story by Siobhan Carroll ∗∗∗+
Braving the Morrow Candle’s Wane • short story by J. W. Alden
#248:
She Who Hungers, She Who Waits • short story by Cassandra Khaw
Cry of Desire in a Shrouded Land • novelette by Talisen Fray +
#249:
Weft • short story by Rahul Kanakia
Fireskin • short story by Joanne Rixon 

Non-fiction:
Island Outpost • cover by Stefan Meisl

____________________________

As these three issues use the same cover art I’ve combined them together into one review.
The War of Light and Shadow, in Five Dishes by Siobhan Carroll tells the story of Leu the chef, who is taken prisoner by the Iron Crusade. He becomes a cook for the army, and we are subsequently told about the five dishes he prepares for Commander Eres:

Commander Eres said. “Make me some eggs.”
(Have you ever cooked an egg as though your life depended on it? The difference between cooked and overcooked is so slight; the seasoning so important. So simple, an egg. And so easy to get wrong.)
Leu stoked the kitchen fire to get an even heat and checked again the simmer on the copper pan. In the background, he could hear a guard whetting the blade on his dagger. Shhr. Shrr.
The egg at least was very fresh. He cracked it and held it close to the water before letting it fall in. Immediately he pushed the white over the yolk with his wooden spoon and held it for a few seconds. Only a small amount of pale liquid fell away from the white.
The plate the guard brought was crusted with old food. Leu wiped it clean—his eyes on the pot—and then, swiftly, like a bird plunging into water, scooped the egg free with a slotted spoon. From the spice pouch around his neck he took a pinch of Fera sea salt to bring out the flavor.
(I always slow my hand as I lower the last flake of salt, to draw out the moment, to make the diners lean forward. When, at the end of your first year of your apprenticeship, you recreate this dish, you must think how you wish to present your egg, what part of the war you wish this dish to tell.)
Eres accepted the plate with a slight frown. With her knife, she cut the egg. It slid apart perfectly, oozing bright orange yolk. The white wobbled lightly on the blade. And the taste—
A perfect egg is a slash of light on a gray day. The yolk tastes of sun-riched earth, the pale chalaza like a slice of raindamp cloud, a taste so mild you might miss it but unmistakably there, lingering, insisting on its presence. p. 7-8

Although the bulk of the narrative is about the preparation of the meals, details in the background provide an account of the ongoing war of Light and Shadow, and the Iron Crusade’s progress. As the meals increase in sophistication, Commander Eres becomes increasingly distracted by the chef’s requirements, and alters her army’s course and actions to accommodate him. Unwittingly, the chef changes the course of the war.
This is a pretty good piece, one for the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies maybe, but there are one or two parts that could do with a polish (I bounced off the first paragraph a couple of times before I could get into the story, for example).1
Braving the Morrow Candle’s Wane by J. W. Alden concerns a woman who has taken a girl in off the streets. When there is a knock at the door she tells her to hide. The rest of the piece is taken up by the exchange between the woman and the caller (a young man in armour from the Twice-Risen temple), who is searching the girl. When he comes into the house, the woman distracts him by telling a tale about her own service for the Temple and how she found—and lost—her faith.
This is engaging stuff but it reads like a single scene from a longer work, a common Beneath Ceaseless Skies problem.
She Who Hungers, She Who Waits by Cassandra Khaw opens with a woman taking a man to her room after their meal at an inn. Shortly after his arrival the man passes out:

Mei Huang lays out her client on the sheets. He has been one of her easier ones. Quick to slumber and eager to please, but not eager enough that he would breach etiquette. A smile slits her face at the memory of his clumsy overtures, almost shy, the performance of a boy, for all his musculature would suggest a man. That was never a possibility. Mei Huang prefers to keep pleasure and providence separate; and besides, her heart lies elsewhere, preserved in resin for the devoted to see.
She disinfects her scalpel in a saucer of boiling water. When the blade is hot enough, she applies the tip to his sternum and cuts, slicing along the breastbone, down to his groin. Skin and muscle part into wings, otherwise undamaged. Mei Huang prides herself on her ability to leave minimal scarring.
Under the marble rungs of his ribs, viscera gleam and pulse.
For a moment, she can see how this vision might invite desire. To see someone, man or woman, revealed as such, to witness them so vulnerable, it is a kind of power, compelling in its rarity. But that is not what she is here for.
Gingerly, Mei Huang leans forward to inspect the glyphs inlaid into the man’s bones: government-issue agate, embedded without artistry; the stones dulled by mucus, no enchantment to preserve their shine. A soldier’s markings and a soldier’s future, a tragedy dug into the trenches. Dead before his twenty-third birthday, his eyes consigned to the crows. p. 4-5

She then examines the various alternative possibilities for his life, all of which end in death at a young age. Before she can sew him up (spoiler) he regains consciousness and his guts spill out. At this point she calls on a goddess, ‘She Who Must Wait’ for aid. In return for this the woman agrees to ‘carry’ the goddess (she later looks like a pregnant woman). However, this is a subterfuge to enable the woman get reach her sister—or at least I think that’s what going on. I found it difficult to follow some of the later scenes, partly because it is of one of those stories where anything can happen next, and does.
Cry of Desire in a Shrouded Land by Talisen Fray gets off to an atmospheric start:

Once again it was that horrid time of year when the cashmere silk spiders crept from the bowels of the city of the angels and spun their pale web across its spires and domes, and Lukas the vendor of miracle tea felt a deep shudder begin in his testicles and rise to his dry mouth which had long ago forgotten the taste of kisses. p. 21

Lukas is a seller of an expensive ‘miracle tea’, a brew that purportedly grants the drinker their wish. He is infatuated with the flower girl, Vidita, who visits his house every day: she wants to learn the secret recipe for the tea, and is playing a long game of seduction with him. Her plan once she has the secret is to sell the tea herself, and earn enough money to buy her own and her mother’s freedom.
Both Lucas’s and Vidita’s stories intertwine with those of a slim young man from the Exterminator’s Guild, hired to rid the house of spiders. While he undertakes this task, he also has an affair with Lukas’s wife.
At the end of the story there is (spoiler) a decoupling of those who have drunk the tea, and those who get their wishes.
This novelette (it crams so much in that it feels like a novella but is actually only 10,700 words) unfolds, at times, in languid, moody prose (the style reminds me of another writer but I can’t think who):

With her bare feet making tiny thumps on the broad stone pathway, she would pass through the cool hibiscus-scented air of the gardens and reach the wide antechamber of the house where, with slow and practiced motions, she began the dance of distribution. A bouquet full of rarities and sweet scent for milady’s boudoir (a place Lukas had long lost his fascination for); a large goblet with several coin-shaped brilliants floating—no scent—for the dining room; a ring of posies for the tearoom entrance, never mind that there were no supplicants at this time of year; and a chunky glass vase full of strange pale green leaves for the master’s bedroom. Behind her floated a faint perfume that first brought Lukas a moment of peace and nostalgia and then, over the weeks of mounting tension, an increasingly sexual hunger that disturbed him like the long-gone fascination for miracle tea that had driven him, as a sheltered bookish boy, to undertake the adventure of legends and walk alone through the ghost villages and poison fields and dragon nests that guarded the secret of his obsession. p. 23

In the country, spiders were less a hated obstruction and more a seasonal inconvenience, like calving season or the harsh snow and ice of winter. The young exterminator found he could sense the first spiderweb floating in the breeze and catching on a jutting chimney, and he seemed to hear the subtle clacking of the spider legs on the roof, the walls, the floors. He cried the first time he saw a spider killed and he took the intact abdomen back to his rooms, where he washed the pale insides and the glowing lavender venom from it and then studied it for hours. There was a traced design on the inside—a map, it seemed to him, possibly of the stars, possibly points of importance in a city or a country, inked in subtle glowing red against the pale grey of the carapace. That spider season, when the webs grew so thick that the doors had to be cleared from the outside before they could be pushed open and all outdoor travel ceased, the boy spent his time in his father’s library, reading every book lining the walls and even bringing his father’s distant gaze to bear on the topic. They never found the key to the mystery, but they did spend many still hours in the refuge of the library, and later when the exterminator was far away, he would remember these times with a kind of affection that embarrassed him, even in the silence of his own consciousness. p. 49

Another possibility for the ‘Best of the Year’ collections.
Weft Rahul Kanakia starts off with three people having a meal and talking about a girl, a cook’s assistant, who they are pursuing. They are an odd group: the narrator appears to have a magical power over threads, Rina is an ethereal spirit, and Aakash is a weird creature that can shed his body:

The crack of bones and the slap of flesh against wood.
Aakash was expanding, sloughing off his skin. This was not something he did lightly. With his skin, Aakash is merely an unpleasant sight. Without it, he’s terrifying.
“Don’t need all that,” he said. “Considering all the dead bodies we’re about to make.”
His eyes flickered, and his many mouths snapped open and shut, and I experienced in that moment a sense of terror. I was not made for a life of violence. p. 8-9

The narrator tries to convince the others to let the girl go free and then, after some discussion, an event occurs which was not entirely clear to me, followed by a scene where the narrator finds the girl.
There are elements of this that show promise, but as a story it does not work.
Fireskin by Joanne Rixon is about Aun-ki, the king’s champion, and how her skin catches fire:

In late summer of the fourteenth year of the reign of Feihu the Road-Builder, on a day when the portents suggested peace and prosperity throughout the city and all its territories, the warrior Aun-ki woke up and found that her skin caught fire at the slightest touch. Pale flickers of flame sprouted on her brown arms, almost invisible in the sunlight, then guttered out. Even the light drape of her dressing gown across her shoulders was like the grind of a blade on a whetstone, striking sparks. The fabric browned, and when her apprentice Jin-ho came in to help her bathe, Jin-ho’s fingers left streams of blisters in their wake. p. 16

She seeks the king’s permission to go to Lake of Five Waters, to see if they will cure her. They don’t, and the rest of the story describes other quests she undertakes with her assistant to seek a remedy. Between these journeys she returns to the village and stays with the weaver—their relationship develops.
This is readable, engaging stuff but, unfortunately (spoiler), the story has no ending (at least not for the problem of her skin—she gives up on that and lives with it till she dies, but spends her remaining time with the weaver: an ending of sorts, I suppose).

The cover for these three issues is Island Outpost by Stefan Meisl.

Two superior stories in these three editions, which makes this quite a good ‘issue’. ●

____________________________

1. It may be my brain and not Carroll’s writing, but I struggled with the opening:

Leu was in the chicken coop when the wall was breached. At the very moment of which I speak, he was facing down Black Dragon, the largest and most homicidal of the barracks’s surviving hens. She’d bloodied his hands in a frenzied attempt to get at his eyes. Now, as shouts of terror echoed in the distance, the two combatants stared each other down over a mass of trampled reeds. Behind Black Dragon (at this point I usually gesture to the diners, who sit as you do, an expectant plate before them): two eggs, the last ones available for Lord Fio’s breakfast. Behind Leu (at this point I gesture outwards, to the world): the wrath of Lord Fio, a spoiled young man with a penchant for poached eggs and a nasty habit of whipping his servants. p. 2

What do I not like about this? Well, put briefly, it does not flow well, something that the opening paragraph(s) of a story should do. More specifically:
(a) The focus shifts from Leu to the narrator to the chicken in the first three sentences.
(b) “Barracks’s surviving hens” may be orthographically correct2 (although Microsoft Word doesn’t think so) but it looks and sounds weird (too many s’s for one thing), and I ended up staring at it for several seconds while I figured out whether or not it was a typo.
(c) The last two parenthetical interjections by the narrator (and the colons) make it harder to read, too.
None of this would be a problem further on, but those of us with a reading age of 12 or thereabouts prefer less complicated beginnings so we can more easily slip into the story, e.g.:

Leu was in the chicken coop when the wall was breached. At that moment he was facing down Black Dragon, the largest and most homicidal of the castle’s surviving hens, and his hands had been bloodied by her frenzied attempt to get at his eyes. Now, as shouts of terror echoed in the distance, the two combatants stared each other down over a mass of trampled reeds. Behind the hen lay two eggs, the last ones available for Lord Fio’s breakfast (at this point in the story I usually gesture to the diners, who sit as you do, with an expectant plate before them). Behind Leu lay the wrath of Lord Fio (at this point I gesture outwards, to the world), a spoiled young man with a penchant for poached eggs and a nasty habit of whipping his servants.

Yes, I know, don’t give up your day job, people in glass houses shouldn’t throw rocks, etc., etc.

2. This is what Wikipedia has to say, in part, about singular noun possession:

If a singular noun ends with an s-sound (spelled with -s, -se, for example), practice varies as to whether to add ’s or the apostrophe alone. A widely accepted practice is to follow whichever spoken form is judged better: the boss’s shoes, Mrs Jones’ hat (or Mrs Jones’s hat, if that spoken form is preferred). In many cases, both spoken and written forms differ between writers.

It is interesting to note that Algis Budrys is quoted in this article (footnote #66). From Galaxy Bookshelf, Galaxy Science Fiction (December 1965), pp. 147–156, there is this:

If you have a name that ends in “s,” or if you will observe home-made signs selling tomatoes or chili-and-beans, you will quickly note what can be done with a possessive apostrophe in reckless hands.

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe here. ●

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

New Writings in SF #2, 1964

ISFDB link

Other reviews1:
Andrew Darlington, Eight Miles Higher
Michael Moorcock, New Worlds #146 (January, 1965)
Charles Winstone, Vector #29 (November, 1964)
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, John Carnell

Fiction:
Hell-Planet • novella by John T. Phillifent [as by John Rackham]
The Night-Flame • short story by Colin Kapp
The Creators • short story by Joseph Green
Rogue Leonardo • short story by G. L. Lack
Maiden Voyage • novelette by Douglas R. Mason [as by John Rankine]
Odd Boy Out • reprint short story by Dennis Etchison
The Eternal Machines • short story by William Spencer
A Round Billiard Table • short story by Steve Hall

Non-fiction:
Foreword • essay by John Carnell

_____________________

This issue, like the first, starts with a long story, a 19,000 word novella called Hell-Planet by John T. Phillifent. Like the previous effort (Key to Chaos by Edward Mackin, NWISF #1, 1964) it feels equally tired.
The story starts with the crew of an alien spaceship called Drendel coming out of warp. Captain Forsaan’s ship is damaged, as at their last destination they received an unpleasant surprise:

And so, unsuspectingly, Drendel had twisted out of warp, into a raving hell of swirling incandescence. Emergency trips and overloads had snatched her out again in split seconds, with her hull-sensors crippled, her mainspars wrenched and strained, and everyone aboard in shock and sickness. They had all taken massive doses of antiradiation drugs, the crew had slaved like dogs, and they had got the battered ship into something like trim, the while they hung at a safe distance and watched a sun that had gone nova. p. 15

Forsaan steers his ship towards the sixth planet, and organises his crew to make repairs. He then goes to brief his VIPs, scientific specialists impatient to do their research, but Forsaan has put them off as the ship repairs must take priority.
Forsaan’s first officer Pinat then tells him that they are receiving modulated radio signals from (spoiler) the third planet (Earth). From previous expeditions they know this planet is populated with simian-hominids, and it is also the site of equipment that Forsaan’s race left behind thousands of years ago. There is speculation about the languages heard in the broadcast, and Forsaan suggests one sounds very similar to theirs. During these conversations we also learn that the crew are humanoid, but from ursinoid (bear) descent. There is also talk that the previous exploration team may have interfered in the simians’ progress.
Later on, after they have done more analysis of the signals, there is a disagreement between Forsaan and the scientists about whether they should investigate the planet, and one of the latter loses his patience:

“Oh come, now!” Buffil could contain himself no longer.
“Caralen and I have seen your pictures and learned the languages, the major ones—and there is plenty to fear. Why not admit it? Captain, from the evidence of radio and visuals, we know quite a lot. For instance, we have identified cities, transport by land, sea and air, radio and visual communications linked by orbital relays, fission stage atomics, and much more. Yet, on that planet, which is slightly smaller than our own home world, there are almost three billion people, at least five major cultures, Urs knows how many minor ones—and all in savage conflict with each other.” Forsaan went cold as the bulky technologist elaborated.
“We have seen the picture-records, blatantly transmitted. They use, and are using, explosive devices, lethal gases, radiation and poisonous bacteria against each other on a massive scale. Worse still, they seem to rejoice in this hideous activity and award respect and status to those who show themselves skilled at it.”
“But that’s not possible, surely,” Forsaan clung to as much commonsense as he could. “If they practise wholesale slaughter on that scale—how can so many survive?’’
“They breed in proportion,” Buffil growled. “Like animals. And they squander materials at an incredible rate. So far as one can judge, their one aim seems to be to consume as much as possible.” p. 31-32

The other thing they learn is that the planet’s inhabitants live relatively short lives, eighty years, compared with Forsaan who is several hundred years old.
Forsaan agrees to change the ship’s course to the third planet’s moon, where they will complete their repairs. Professor Buffil will go down in a lifeboat to Earth to make observations.
This first section is overlong, and reads like the tired and routine naval-analogue space-opera that it is. But at least it hangs together, which is more than the rest does: we have an unexpected moonshot launched by Earth that may or may not discover the Drendel on the dark side of the moon; a skullcap developed to act as an emotional damper for the professor visiting the planet (these humanoids can ‘read’ emotions, but this isn’t much discussed until later in the story); and there is also this, as the professor is briefed on his trip to the surface:

“Remember, now, on landing and making sure all is well, close the red switch. That will be our only signal from you. Then, be sure to be back in the pod and secure, before the deadline moment. Reverse that switch, which will tell us all is well with you. And leave the rest to us. Good luck, and may the ancestors take care of you.” p. 50

So a culture with warp drives can’t rig up a radio for the professor to contact the ship?
Then, in the last section, the professor returns with the news that they are simians too, just like the people on Earth (no explanation is given about why they previously thought otherwise). The professor also tells Forsaan that the people on the surface do not have ‘auras’ so they can’t tell each other’s emotional state (the reason for this is the destruction of the orbital platform left by the previous survey crew has caused permanent interference). The professor says he must go back and give them the technology to remove the interference, and otherwise shepherd them into becoming a more peaceful people:

“They are as emotionally sensitive as we, if not more so. I have had plenty of time to ponder this thing, to think about it very deeply. I am convinced that this one awful factor, by itself, accounts for almost all the seeming contradictions, the inconsistencies, of these people. Imagine how they have lived. Think of being completely cut off, walled up inside the shell of your own emotions, never able to know, to sense, to feel what anyone else is feeling. Your only contacts the pitifully inadequate interpretations of gesture, attitude, facial expression, and words. This, I tell you, is why their languages are so tortuous, so complex. This is why their values are so twisted, why they cannot trust or understand anyone, why they are hostile, suspicious, aggressive, and divided. They can never be sure of anyone else. And, by being driven in on themselves, they can never be sure of themselves, either. p. 61

A poor start.
The Night-Flame by Colin Kapp has as its narrator an Eastern European called Balchic, who lives in the British countryside. The story begins with him investigating a ‘night-flame’ that he has seen from his house. When he gets close to this phenomenon he realises he is in peril:

Balchic moved closer to the balls of fluorescence, trying to gauge their size and distance against a background which afforded no points of reference. Then he stopped. The balls were growing larger or nearer, and as they did so he felt the fear increasing. Fingers of ice were stalking up his backbone and the hair on his neck was rising sensibly. But that which gave him most cause for alarm was the glimpse of his watch dial in his sleeve emitting such a light that his hand was clearly illuminated by reflection.
Radiation! Data fell into place. This was no natural phenomenon. It took power to punch out radiation of such intensity over such distances. Just how much power it needed was known only to God and its designers—but Balchic was almost in the beam path! Its nature and its source were suddenly of secondary consideration. Now his fear had a tangible object and he was swift to react. The vicinity of a beam that could ionise air at atmospheric pressure was not a fit place for human flesh to be. He back-tracked in haste, wondering if he had already been exposed to sufficient radiation to do him some permanent harm. p. 71

He goes home to the sound of blacked-out army trucks moving in the night, and when he gets home his wife says that an army major wants to talk to him, and will visit in the morning.
When the major arrives the next day he raises the subject of the Balchics moving out of their cottage. Balchic refuses, so the major levels with him and says that his unit are operating beam weapons to neutralise satellites that would otherwise destroy the country. One day they may have to drop their aim, and the cottage may be in the way . . . .
The major is then interrupted by an urgent phone call and has to go back to his unit. Balchic drives him, and later witnesses an attack.
This story doesn’t suspend disbelief and it has an obviously contrived plot (spoiler: there is a tragic end). I’m not sure that the it’s attempt at gravitas works either (there is a backstory about the Balchics’ two daughters, who died at Auschwitz).
The Creators by Joseph Green concerns a galactic federation expedition consisting of humans and multiple alien species exploring a planet circling a burnt out sun. The main character is Fassail, an artist who is teamed up with a scientist, Nickno (both human); they are accompanied by two spherical aliens called Jelly and Belly. The expedition’s purpose is to work out how the previous occupants controlled energy, which they used in an unusual way:

They had created art forms.
With control of the known universe at their fingertips, with such power available as was never known to a living intelligence, they had created art. Their expression-forms possessed a strange, overpowering beauty, a variety of colour and shape almost unimaginable to anyone not a fellow artist. Some of the huge buildings had been hollowed out until only the exterior remained, and filling it from top to bottom would be a single great formation. Others contained small formations of stirring beauty and infinite variety. Some showed clearly, by the open spaces near which projectors still crouched, that they had been occupied by formations now vanished. p. 94

The rest of the story details the conflict between the scientist and the artist about the approach to take in discovering how these creations work. While Nickno tries to dismantle the transmitter box for one installation, Fassail wanders round looking at the artwork.
This trundles on for a bit until it is all explained in an info-dump, amid some cosmic waffle, by Fassail: (spoiler) the creatures learned to control energy, first with technology, then with their minds, and eventually became energy life-forms themselves—at which point they all emigrated from the planet to acquire more energy and later became the suns of the Large Magellanic Cloud.
This is a non-story with an unconvincing ending.
Rogue Leonardo by G. L. Lack2 has short introduction about an old man who is a pavement artist in the future. The story itself concerns Trafford, who is on charge of reproduction machines that produce perfect copies of great artworks. These need regular calibration, and there are occasional problems.
One day he visits Cambridge and meets with Acilia, the female supervisor there. Although everything appears in order, something still niggles at him after he leaves, and he has a dream about seeing multiple Acilias, whose appearance progressively changes. He forgets the dream before waking but remembers when he goes out at lunchtime and sees the pavement artist.
When he goes back to Cambridge to see Acilia (spoiler), he finds her viewing a number of pictures produced by a Leonardo machine that show a series of evolutions. Over the objections of Acilia he arranges for the machine’s destruction. Later, he discovers the old man has died.
This story about the stagnation of art in the future didn’t entirely grab me, but it is encouraging to see one of the NWISF writers writing about something other than the same old stuff.
Maiden Voyage by Douglas R. Mason is another ‘Dag Fletcher, Space Molester’, sorry, ‘Dag Fletcher, Space Patrol’ tale. I made a side bet with myself that he would be letching at an attractive woman before I got more than two hundred words into the story. I won.3 This is start of the story:

“The board will see you now, Mr. Fletcher.”
Dag Fletcher picked his long dangling legs from the sofa in the plushy ante room of the Space Projects’ H.Q. and followed the trim attendant into the corridor. He liked the way her bottom moved in the tight blue-grey cheongsam and he was wondering if he ought to pinch it, when the debate was cut short by their arrival at the bronze doors which filled the end of the white passage. She spoke quietly into a grille in the left hand wall. p. 121

The board meeting is to hear Fletcher’s objections about the drive of a new spaceship called Nova. Lucas, the captain of the latter, is confident of his ship, so it is decided that instead of grounding Nova, Fletcher will accompany it with Interstellar Two-Seven as a safety ship.
In flight, Nova goes missing, and Fletcher and his crew manage to track it down to a planet called Taurus, which has a violent hominid race that is slowly devolving to extinction.
The rest of the story concerns the rescue of the other crew, and this involves (spoiler) winching down cliffs, attacks by the hominids, and, after they rescue the crew, Lucas’s final sacrifice to hold off the attackers (he was critically injured in the crash, and wrong about the drive—so it’s poetic justice, I guess). Never one to miss the chance of some titillation, Mason has Yolanda get her kit off during their retreat to Interstellar Two-Seven to distract the attackers:

Gutteral commands brought the hominids into two lines from the rock to the forest and then they began a slow forward movement. In the fantastic light they looked like figures from a medieval picture of hell. They moved in silence. Black eyes and mouths flecked red. Dag waited for the rush that had come before which would annihilate them before they reached the cleft.
Ten yards to go. The six remaining men fanned out in an arc with Dag at the centre, covering the stretcher party. A figure appeared on a ledge thirty feet above the ground on the cliff face. Lit up by the lurid glare of the rocket fire, Yolanda looked bigger than life size. She wore only two golden bracelets. Against the green cliff her skin had an unearthly pallor. She was an incarnation of the rock sculptures of ancient Hindu mythology. Golden breasted Kali. Great Earth Goddess. Sensual. Compelling.
The advancing lines stopped dead and every eye turned to the rock. Then a growling roar came from thrown back throats. p. 144-145

There is more of this kind of thing at the end when the survivors, minus Lucas, are all safely back on Interstellar Two Seven:

Dag made his way slowly to his cabin. He felt no pleasure at being proved right. Only weariness and the sense of waste in the loss of good spacemen. Why did they do it? Why not be a banker or a salesman? As he slid back the cabin door he met a perfume of sandalwood.
Yolanda said, “Come in, Controller. I hope you will not mind if I share your cabin. I take up very little room.”
She was still dressed as an apostle of Vedic culture. Dag said, “Be my guest.”
There might, after all, be a lot to be said for the Space Service. p. 147

I think this ‘catastrophe followed by a sexual encounter’ trope shows that Mason is channelling James Bond.
This story is, like the others in this series, readable but uncomplicated and predictable. I should also add that, although I poke fun at the dated sexual attitudes in Mason’s stories, I would have been oblivious to this stuff at the time, and probably for decades afterwards.
Odd Boy Out by Dennis Etchison (Escapade, 1961)4 is about two young women and a man in the woods trying to make a mental connection with three nearby children. The man, Cam, is the only one who can manage. Before he completes his ‘transfer’ into the boy’s body he and one of the woman, Zoe, speak. Most of the story is emotional dialogue between the two:

As soon as she began speaking, her voice broke.
“Sometimes, Cam, sometimes—it’s happened several times before—I feel like—like I almost wish we—weren’t what we are. That the parents who raised us were really our own, that we hadn’t been sent here by the Group to do whatever it is they’re doing to this world, that we didn’t have the telepower lobe on our brains . . . that we could just . . . marry and . . . live like the rest here. I know I’m being very immoral by Group standards, or unethical, or whatever you want to call it. But Cam? Can you tell me why it had to be us? Can you just tell me that one thing, so I can go on feeling like I really belong in this body after today? Can you just tell me something to keep me from—Cam? Do you know. Do you know why it had to be us?
Are . . . are you going to be able to keep your sanity sleeping tonight in a little boy’s body?” p. 157

There is no explanation about who the ‘Group’ are, or why the three have to transfer between bodies. It is all a bit perplexing, and matters are not helped by a twist ending that seems rather gimmicky.
There is also evidence of a new writer trying too hard. This description:

After a long, pitiful pause he started back, blinking fast, keeping his eyes aimed up into the gold coin pattern the falling sun made high in the leaves of the trees. p. 157

. . . is followed shortly afterword by this one:

They sat at the mouth of the bridge in the waning light of a burnt-orange sun which flashed like golden teeth through the trees. p. 158

If this doesn’t quite work as a story, it is at least another piece that reads like something from a writer of the future and not one of the past.
The Eternal Machines by William Spencer5 is about Rosco, the caretaker of the planet Chaos, which is a dumping ground used by the other planets in that solar system (which makes it another story examining contemporary society). Rosco spends part of his time repairing broken machines that have been left there, and has cleared a space for the ones he has brought back to serviceability. He intends them to be a memorial to humanity, one that will outlive the species. Included in this collection is his video diary.
One day, (spoiler) a spaceship in orbit has problems with its engines and decides to make an emergency landing on the planet. The story has an ironic ending.
A Round Billiard Table by Steve Hall leads off with an anecdote about the subject of the title before going on to recount a story about a professor who can make glass invisible (by physically aligning the planes or some such). After making a bet with a man in a bar the professor demonstrates the procedure, although the effect soon wears off as it is temporary.
Later, the man reappears with a colleague, and they ask the professor to subject several diamonds to the procedure (although the professor does not know that is what they are).
The punchline (spoiler) of this unlikely gimmick story is that the harder the ‘glass’ is, the longer it takes to become visible again . . . .
An unlikely and facile gimmick story, but readable enough I guess.

The only non-fiction in the volume is the Foreword by John Carnell. He starts with a definition of SF (“Speculative fiction based upon known facts and extended into future possibilities.”) before briefly discussing the stories:

Today, S-F literature pays far more attention to Man as an individual and as a dominant factor controlling the machines he has invented, as will be seen in most of the stories in this second volume of New Writings in S-F.
Sometimes, as in John Rackham’s “Hell-Planet”, humanity does not shape up too well, although the author allows us to hope that, despite our shortcomings, there is some justification for our actions. Incidentally, the theme behind this story is one which has intrigued me for a long time—just what would the first alien visitors make of all our radio and TV broadcasts?
William Spencer’s story, “The Eternal Machines”, also points up Man’s continual desire to register his mark upon the Universe while his own cleverness defeats him in G. L. Lack’s “Rogue Leonardo” and Steve Hall’s “A Round Billiard Table”. However, it is in such stories as Colin Kapp’s “The Night-Flame” and Joseph Green’s “The Creators” that we find the better qualities triumphing over adversity—man against man in the former and man against a cosmic mystery in the latter. Both call for an enquiring mind. A faculty Man is fortunately endowed with . . . .
As are most science fiction readers. p. 7-8

This is just over-generalised waffle, and tells the prospective reader little if anything. (As you can probably gather, these Forewords were not my favourite part of the anthologies.)

A poor collection of stories that is worse than most, if not all, of the contemporaneous issues of Science Fantasy and New Worlds magazines. ●

_____________________

1. In New Worlds #146 (January, 1965), Michael Moorcock (as James Colvin) says:

The second New Writings in SF (Dobson, 16s.) is a bit disappointing. Stories by Rackham, Hall, Kapp, Lack, Spencer, Etchison, Rankine, Green. Most of them suffer from overtired backgrounds, the like of which have been seen in SF for a good twenty years. The stories which succeed best are set on Earth. p. 117

He goes on to say this about Colin Kapp’s story:

I’ve never been a great fan of Kapp’s—his writing has in the past been erratic and derivative, using several different styles in a single paragraph when at its worst—but his The Night Flame is probably the best story in the collection. It is simply the story of a man who leaves his wife to investigate peculiar disturbances in the sky and learns that a war has been going on for some time between the West and the East. p. 117

He goes on to briefly discuss G. L. Lack’s story before saying this about the series:

A hard-cover collection of new SF stories is a revolutionary idea, but I can’t help feeling that the stories themselves ought to be somewhat revolutionary, too. At the moment, perhaps, they are evolutionary—and time will show if the series succeeds in fulfilling the function of blowing fresh winds into the field, as I believe it can. p. 118

In Vector #29 (November, 1964), Charles Winstone’s review rates Phillifent/Rackham’s story much more highly than I do:

[Hell Planet] lives up to the claim made by John Carnell in New Writings 1. This story is a radical departure in the field of the science fiction short story. It is a detailed description of an alien race’s first contact of the planet Earth. It describes the aliens’ confusion at the many contradictory puzzles of the Earth’s cultures as presented by the multi-lingual and radio and television broadcasts. [. . .] Suffice it to say that John Rackham has caught very well the aliens’ terrible confusion when confronted with the Earth’s present day culture. p. 33

Of the others, he appears to have enjoyed the Green (“rather original”) and the Mason/Rankine (“so well-written that the reader’s interest is sustained to the end.”)

2. G. L. Lack contributed one other story to NWISF #10, and one to Science Fantasy. The ISFDB page for this author is here.

3. I couldn’t help but think what would happen nowadays if Dag Fletcher gave into his desires and pinched her bottom (be warned, I have a warped imagination): the attendant complains and HR suspends Fletcher while they investigate. The space police get involved, arrest Fletcher, interview him under caution. After he is bailed, galactic social media erupts as several other women, alerted by the #DagFletcherSpaceMolester hashtag, come forward with similar stories. Fletcher appears in court and, despite pleading guilty, receives an exemplary custodial sentence of six months, as well as being placed on the sex offenders’ register.
He ends up in Rikers #417, a Stellar Penal Station for sex offenders of all species. A few days later he is in the showers, standing one stall away from an alien Shuggoth from Epsilon Sigma, a seven-foot tall vertical cylinder of pink slime with a crown of eyes and several dangling pseudopods. Fletcher notices that several of the eyes are fixed on him. Unnerved, he drops the soap, and reflexively bends down to pick it up. He feels several pseudopods coil around his thigh . . . Fletcher finally knows what it feels like to be at the hands of a sexual predator.

4. This may be a reprint of Etchinson’s debut story—I can’t find an earlier publication at ISFDB, Galactic Central, or Wikipedia. ●

5. William Spencer had an odd writing career. He wrote a dozen stories for Carnell’s New Worlds and NWISF in the sixties and early seventies, and then popped up a couple of decades later with four stories in David Pringle’s Interzone. There can’t have been many Carnell-only writers who also appeared in Interzone (Aldiss, Ballard, Bayley, Roberts, etc., all appeared under other editors too). Here is Spencer’s ISFDB page.
There is an interesting interview with Spencer (among other things he was a student contemporary of J. G. Ballard, and later took art classes taught by Eduardo Paolozzi) conducted by David Pringle in Interzone #79 (January, 1994). Spencer has this to say about John Carnell, and perhaps gives one of the reasons for the pause in his own writing after 1971 (there is also a later mention of an English doctorate started in 1970):

“[Carnell] had an office in fairly central London, and I was in walking distance. I suppose there was no particular need to go and see him in the flesh, but it was often convenient to do so and I found him very affable. He had a gentle, considerate manner. He wasn’t a very big chap; he was rather slight in physical stature and he had an unassuming manner. If he’d stood next to you in a bus queue you wouldn’t really have noticed him. His voice was quiet, but it was nicely modulated. It often seemed to me that when he was talking to writers he spoke to them in this reassuring tone as you might speak to a nervous horse, a wild horse that might at any moment kick up and gallop off into the distance. I hope he wasn’t making a special exception in my case! — but his manner was almost as if he was close to and quietly conversing with a rather dangerous maniac who might suddenly burst out into some unpredictable behaviour. It was part of his character really, but I think he realized that writers are often rather nervous people. With some editors and publishers, I sometimes felt that they want to browbeat the writer because they have this suspicion that he has an ego the size of the Royal Albert Hall and at all costs it must be damped down if there’s to be any hope of dealing sensibly with this terrible person . . . But Ted Carnell had an encouraging manner. Also, he did quite a lot in the way of getting overseas sales and so on. One of my stories was read on German radio, which would never have come about unaided.
“Later on Ted moved out of central London to Plumstead, which is still very much in greater London as far as I’m concerned. I never went to see him there, but when I spoke to him on the phone he seemed to feel it was an idyllic retreat (certainly by contrast with central London it would have been). It’s nice to think of him in what were in fact the final years of his life having this relaxation and lowering of tension and so on. One thing that he did in New Worlds, which got lost in New Writings in SF, was that it was a twoway thing, a link between the author and the reader. He had these author profiles, and letters and Guest Editorials. (This is also the good thing, I think, about Interzone: it has the feeling of being a forum, a two-way traffic of ideas.) This is quite important for writers, to feel they are in touch with an audience, to get feedback. But this element unfortunately got lost in New Writings because that came out as a hardcover book, and though it had an editorial by Ted Carnell it was purely a stiff-backed anthology of stories. If I’m clutching at straws to answer why I stopped writing science fiction this might have come into it a bit: it was very much a take-it-or-leave-it activity, it made little difference to one personally whether one wrote stories or not.” p. 43-44

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Asimov’s Science Fiction v41n11&12, November/December 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Gardner Dozois, Locus
Rich Horton, Locus
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Stephanie Wexler, Tangent Online
Various, Goodreads

Editor, Sheila Williams; Associate Editor, Emily Hockaday

Fiction:
The Discrete Charm of the Turing Machine • novelette by Greg Egan +
Confessions of a Con Girl • short story by Nick Wolven +
In Dublin, Fair City • novelette by Rick Wilber +
The Last Dance • short story by Jack McDevitt
And No Torment Shall Touch Them • short story by James Patrick Kelly
Timewalking • short story by Michael Cassutt
Skipped • short story by Emily Taylor
Afloat Above a Floor of Stars • short story by Tom Purdom
Love and Death and the Star that Shall Not Be Named: Kom’s Story • short story by James E. Gunn
Nine Lattices of Sargasso • novelette by Jason Sanford
Operators • short story by Joel Richards
The Nanny Bubble • short story by Norman Spinrad
I Met a Traveller in an Antique Land • novella by Connie Willis +

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Eldar Zakirov
Excelsior! • editorial by Sheila Williams
Gog and Magog • essay by Robert Silverberg
Time Party • essay by James Patrick Kelly
Poetry • by Jennifer Crow, Robert Frazier, Ken Poyner, G. O. Clark, Jane Yolen (2), H. Mellas
Next Issue
On Books
• by Peter Heck
SF Conventional Calendar • by Erwin S. Strauss

The Discrete Charm of the Turing Machine by Greg Egan gets off to a cracking start with a call centre employee making a debt consolidation call using an “out stream avatar” (software that alters the callers appearance to appeal to the prospective client). Then someone calls him:

When Dan came back from his break, the computer sensed his presence and woke. He’d barely put on his headset when a window opened and a woman he’d never seen before addressed him in a briskly pleasant tone.
“Good afternoon, Dan.”
“Good afternoon.”
“I’m calling you on behalf of Human Resources. I need to ask you to empty your cubicle. Make sure you take everything now, because once you’ve left the floor, you won’t have an opportunity to return.”
Dan hesitated, trying to decide if the call could be a prank. But there was a padlock icon next to the address, ruth_bayer@HR.thriftocracy.com, which implied an authenticated connection.
“I’ve been over-target every week this quarter!” he protested.
“And your bonuses have reflected that,” Ms. Bayer replied smoothly. “We’re grateful for your service, Dan, but you’ll understand that as circumstances change, we need to fine-tune our assets to maintain an optimal fit.”
Before he could reply, she delivered a parting smile and terminated the connection. And before he could call back, all the application windows on his screen closed, and the system logged him out.
Dan sat motionless for ten or fifteen seconds, but then sheer habit snapped him out of it: if the screen was blank, it was time to leave. He pulled his gym bag out from under the desk, unzipped it, and slid the three framed photos in next to his towel. The company could keep his plants, or throw them out; he didn’t care. As he walked down the aisle between the cubicles, he kept his eyes fixed on the carpet; his colleagues were busy, and he didn’t want to embarrass them with the task of finding the right words to mark his departure in the twenty or thirty seconds they could spare before they’d be docked. He felt his face flushing, recalling the time a year or so ago when a man he’d barely known had left in tears. Dan had rolled his eyes and thought: What did you expect? A farewell party? An engraved fountain pen?
As he waited for the elevator, he contemplated taking a trip to the seventh floor to demand an explanation. It made no sense to let him go when his KPIs weren’t just solid, they’d been trending upward. There must have been a mistake.
The doors opened and he stepped into the elevator. “Seven,” he grunted.
“Ground floor,” the elevator replied.
“Seven” Dan repeated emphatically.
The doors closed, and the elevator descended. p. 15-16

The rest of the story details Dan’s unemployment and examines the financial and social implications of advanced technology and software replacing humans in the workforce. There are a number of witty passages that match the one above.
Confessions of a Con Girl by Nick Wolven is an interesting piece that extrapolates the ‘like’ culture of today into the academic world of the near future. This one is in the form of a written essay by Sophie Lee, a young woman at college who originally had so many ‘pro’ votes (likes) that she had a dark green ‘holoscore’. However, after a number of problematical social interactions, her score goes light green and then yellow (not so good). This is an example of one of those, involving her ‘friend’ Roman:

This was when we were hanging out in his room almost every night, eating pizza and talking about Roman’s feelings. And that was where we were one Saturday night, when Roman suddenly got a funny look. Now by this time, confessedly, my Pro/Con Holistic Score was not so green as previous. I had brought Roman to several events with my peer network, where he experienced issues related to inappropriate touching. So I was beginning to be conflicted about the friendship. Also, it may be that my sensitivity, though usually high, was not so high as ordinarily. In any event, when Roman did what he did, I reacted uncharacteristically, which I mean, by getting scared and kicking him in the face.
These are the words Roman said to me, that night, which I quote here not to be adverse, but only in the spirit of veracity.
“B***h, what the F**k? Crazy t**t, you come here every night, playing on me, then I finally get the balls to make a move, you shoot me down? Seriously? Mother f **king c**k teasing c**t.”
As noted, I have set all this down not to cause hurt, but because it is in fact what Roman said to me.
But the upshot is, after this incident, my Pro/Con Holistic Score took a gigantic hit.
And it was because Roman kept giving me Con votes! I tried to engage with him constructively about it, but he only told me I had “played him,” and how the worst thing a girl can do to a guy is give him those kinds of mixed signals. Then he told other guys I had “set him up,” and they all gave me Con votes, too! So I was receiving Con votes every day, and this, plus a few other, unrelated factors, was, as people say, “the perfect storm,” which made my holoscore begin to drop. p. 39

She is later interviewed by her Learning Process Adviser, Mr Barraine, and assumes that it is about her falling holoscore. However, he tells her that (spoiler) she has also been failing academically—among other things she has been empathising with the wrong characters in her English course texts—and, because of her poor empathic skills, will not be permitted to graduate.
There is an emotional and ironic final scene from her childhood that undermines the college’s assessment of her empathic abilities.
This is one that grew on me after I finished it, and one I will have to read again.
This piece is followed, like most in this 40th anniversary year issue, by a longish afterword which references a parent’s collection of Asimov’s Science Fiction.
In Dublin, Fair City by Rick Wilber is the third of his ‘Moe Berg’ stories, about a baseball player turned OSS operative in an alternate world where the Nazis have invaded England, and the Japanese San Diego. In this one he goes to Eire to pick up a defecting Professor Heisenberg. The story is itself is relatively straightforward but improves towards the end, partly because of a (spoiler) gloomy and scary climax.
There are a couple of things that I didn’t like about this though, minor stuff which, if revised, would have bumped it up to three stars. First off, the alternate world building isn’t entirely convincing—at the very start there is a mix of Spitfires, Gloster Meteors, and Me262s in the air over a 1940 Dublin. Now the latter two aircraft weren’t in operation until mid-1944 in our world and, if you know this (and I concede most people won’t), it crashes your mental gears. If you are going to introduce specific points of difference like this in a parallel world story I’m not sure the opening paragraphs are the place. Even more unconvincing is an Irish Free State where the British have kept control of the ports and Dublin—the city and the area around it is called ‘The Pale’1 (this has some historical basis but nonetheless does not ring true). There are other shortcomings too: the woman who Moe teams up with is a mysterious and unrealistically shadowy character; another irritation is Wilber’s habit of telling us what Irish words mean when it is obvious:

Two minutes left, so Moe tipped the doorman, walked into the lobby, found the gents—the door said “Fir” on it, Irish for “Men”—and he walked in, set the briefcase on the counter next to him, and washed his face and hands to make himself presentable. p. 57

You could lose the “Irish for ‘Men’”, don’t you think?
Wilber’s afterword has this touching note:

My other major interest in writing revolves around baseball, where I’ve enjoyed a great deal more success as a writer than I ever did as a player, though I had a terrific personal coach to teach me the game. My father, Del Wilber, played for the Cardinals, Red Sox, and Phillies and later managed in the minor-leagues for many years. He died some years ago, but I can still hear his voice coaching me as I write about the game. At least eight of my stories in Asimov’s have had baseball as a significant element. p. 67

The Last Dance by Jack McDevitt has a widower called Ethan get an AI holo-replica of his wife a year and a half after she has died in a car crash. He spends some time getting accustomed to her before she is introduced to their daughter. Up until this point the story was okay, although the idea did not particularly convince me, but from then on it goes rapidly downhill. The holo goes from saying it is Olivia and that he should trust it, to pressuring Ethan to date other woman and move on with his life. There is an irritating last line that turns it from a mediocre story into a gimmick.
And No Torment Shall Touch Them by James Patrick Kelly begins at a funeral. A teenager called Carli is attending along with a hologram (another one) of his ‘uploaded’, and troublesome, grandfather. The rest of the story covers Carly’s relationship with a slightly older guy called Lucius. There are sections from his point of view as well as Carli’s mother and the female priest.
All of this comes over as literary family soap opera/slice-of-life, and I found it quite boring.
Oh yes, there is a warning before the story about a brief sex scene (which turns out to be a gay one between Carli and Lucius).
Timewalking by Michael Cassutt is about a man in his sixties called James who is receiving treatment for sleepwalking. Towards to the end of one session, his therapist starts talking about time-travel, and how his various selves may be trying to pass information to each other. James loses his patience with the therapist and leaves.
The other thread in this concerns James’s partnership with a coder called Pham in a company called May Cay. The company is a start-up that is developing ‘vineware’, silicon-carbon plant material. These two threads soon merge as James and Pham consider two separate takeover offers for their business.
This is well done up until the irritating ending, which spoils it, and does not convince.
Skipped by Emily Taylor is essentially the same kind of angsty relationship material as the Kelly. A woman on a moon transport ‘skips’ to another universe and finds herself sitting opposite a man she doesn’t know. In this reality the man is her ‘husband’; her ‘daughter’ is sitting beside her. The story alternates scenes between this reality and flashbacks from her own universe, and the familial, relationship, and environmental differences between the two.

“What were you doing on the transport?” he whispered.
“Going to give a presentation. I work in plants. In growing. Does she?”
“She does,” he said. “But we were off to take our daughter for a picnic in the grassland.”
“That sounds nice,” I said. We didn’t have a grassland in our universe. What a lovely idea. I imagined stretching out, toes in dirt, just as I had in my faintest childhood memories. It would not be an efficient use of station space, but I could see that in this universe, they had made concessions to beauty. p. 103

At the end (spoiler) she reports to the authorities so she can return to her own universe.
This one is essentially dystopian/relationship navel-gazing—and not my cup of tea.
Afloat Above a Floor of Stars by Tom Purdom takes place on board an FTL starship in the near future. A man, Revali, and woman, Kemen, are on a mission to travel for thirty eight years to a point above the Galaxy, where they will then record the event for humanity.
The first part involves a lot of rather dull gender stuff as they alternately adopt altered personas to make themselves more attractive/palatable to the other; this is backed up with talk about humanity splitting into two different species:

Kemen was a confirmed Montalist. The splintering of the human race was inevitable, in her opinion. It might take several centuries, but the process couldn’t be stopped now that it had started. There was no way legacy humans like Revali could build a society both sexes would find acceptable. The men and women who had created the first compatible companions had done something irresistible. The splintering of the human species had become inevitable the moment humans had learned to shape their genes and personalities.
[. . .]
“We may always have some legacies around,” Kemen said. “Little isolated pockets. But you can’t deny your population is shrinking. Every time one of your people defects, one of the other groups gains. Eventually, we’ll have two species—men with the kind of women men seem to have always wanted, and women partnered with the kind of men women need.” p. 110

The second part is more interesting because they start arguing (and perhaps behave more like a normal couple!) about the ceremony that they have agreed to undertake when they EVA:

Kemen started talking about the ceremony in the middle of the fourth tenday. She brought it up, he noticed, after a sexual interlude in her quarters, while he was eyeing the ship’s latest lunch suggestions.
“I’ve been thinking about the ceremony,” Kemen said. “Is it really something we have to do?”
Benduin Desha had handed him her all-important addition to his funding with two requirements attached. He had to make the trip with someone from another branch and the two of them had to hover over the galaxy, hold hands, and make a statement about the basic unity of mankind.
We are still one species, Benduin Desha had said. Faced with the immensity of the galaxy—seeing it spread out before you—you should see how small we are. That we must stay together. p. 112

Kemen later decides she will not go through with this and that is when the trouble starts.
The story has a cosmic ending that puts all this into perspective.
The ninety-three year old (!) James Gunn returns with another of his ‘Transcendental’ series, Love and Death and the Star that Shall Not Be Named: Kom’s Story This one has Kom, an alien, find Sam, a human, in hibernation in a small spacecraft while he is visiting locality of the star that shall not be named. Kom resuscitates him, and the rest of the story details their conversations, which are mostly about Kom’s home world, birth, and life.
This is traditional old-school SF, which makes it something of an outlier in the magazine, and also a non-story, which doesn’t.
Nine Lattices of Sargasso by Jason Sanford takes place on a floating island in the Saragossa Swirl run by a woman called Lady Faye. Her island is made from nanotube mesh salvaged from the collapse of the Space Elevator, and it has robot spiders collecting the plastic rubbish that becomes tangled in the material. The destruction of the Space Elevator was one of the events that were part of a greater Crash of high-tech equipment caused by a newly sentient AI.
The story itself unfolds as separate ‘memory lattices’ uploaded by the teenage female narrator called Amali, and there are two main narrative strands; the first consists of flashbacks of Amali and her brothers abandoning a ship packed with refugees and the three months they spent on the lifeboat (during which time their mother died) before they washed up on Lady Faye’s island; the second concerns gene-mod ships run by pirates, and one of their progeny, Mareena, who washes up on the island years after Amali and her brothers did.
These elements are competently marshalled to conclusion but I found the story a bit of a plod nonetheless (whether this was me or the story I’m not sure). I think this may have been because it was initially hard to get into; there are also one or two things that don’t entirely convince (I can see why Lady Faye wants (spoiler) rid of Amali to protect to avoid being exposed as a gene-mod pirate, but why would she specifically want a memory of her being eaten alive by the sea monster? Moreover, that whole sea monster eating people thing is at odds with the Russian captain’s general demeanour.) It may also be that this story, like the previous one I read by this writer, is slightly too long and needs editing to improve the pacing.
Sanford also contributes an afterward (more interesting than most) about his grandfather’s SF collection, his time in Thailand with the Peace Corps, and how he showed copies of Asimov’s to his kids.
Operators by Joel Richards is set in the near-future, and concerns the occasional hijackings of self-driving trucks. Barry Connors, a trucker turned private investigator, is hired to sort the problem out.  Matters play out in a refreshingly low-key but correspondingly realistic manner, and touch on the social and economic disruption that future automation may bring.
The Nanny Bubble by Norman Spinrad2 is about Teddy, a cocooned child in the near-future who is apparently being given behaviour modifying drugs to make him content with his protective, partially-VR existence. Then one day he sees a group of older kids playing a pickup game of baseball on the wrong side of town. The difference between their game and the VR Little League ones he plays fascinates him. First he stops taking his pills, and then one day he turns off his phone (and GPS tracking) and cycles over to the field. After the older boys pick their teams, one of them is a man short:

And Ted saw his chance.
He trotted up to that captain, a big black guy with dreads, maybe as much as sixteen years old.
“I can play, and I’ve got my glove,” he announced to laughter from both teams.
“I’m at least as good as most of what I’ve seen here.”
“Oh yeah, Little Leaguer?”
“I’m a cleanup power-hitting centerfielder, and I lead the league in home runs, runs batted in, and batting average,” Ted boasted truthfully.
“Is that so, Mr. Little League MVP?” said Captain Dreadlocks.
“Yes it is, you could look it up on the league website. The name is Ted Smithson.”
The blond-haired captain of the full nine player team glanced at Captain Dreadlocks. ‘You got a better idea, Robbie?”
Robbie looked back at him, shrugged, then spoke to Ted. “Do I insult you by telling you you bat ninth and play right field, Mr. Power-Hitting Centerfielder?”
“I can deal with it,” Ted told him. “It’s a chance to show you what I can do.” And show myself too, he told himself.
And so he did. p. 164

Pleasant enough but minor.
I Met a Traveller in an Antique Land by Connie Willis3 starts with a blogger called James in NY for a series of meetings with prospective publishers talking on the telephone with his agent about a disasterous radio interview he has just done:

I was in New York doing publicity for my blog, Gone for Good, and meeting with editors about publishing it as a book when I found the bookstore.
I’d just finished doing an interview on Backtalk on WMNH, and Brooke had called to tell me the editor at Random House I was supposed to meet with canceled our one-thirty appointment.
“Probably because he heard that train wreck of an interview and doesn’t want Random House’s name connected with a book-hater,” I said, going outside. “Why the hell didn’t you warn me I was walking into a set-up, Brooke? You’re my agent. You’re supposed to protect me from stuff like that.”
“I didn’t know it was a set-up, I swear, Jim,” she said. “When he booked you, he told me he loved your blog, and that he felt exactly like you do, that being nostalgic for things that have disappeared is ridiculous, and that we’re better off without things like payphones and VHS tapes.”
“But not books, apparently,” I said. The host hadn’t even let me get the name of my website out before he’d started in on how terrible e-books and Amazon were and how they were destroying the independent bookstore.
“Do you know how many bookstores have gone under the last five years in Manhattan?” he’d demanded.
Yeah, and most of them deserved to, I thought.
I hadn’t said that. I’d said, “Things closing and dying out and disappearing are part of the natural order. There’s no need to mourn them.”
“No need to mourn them? So it’s fine with you if a legendary bookstore like the Strand, or Elliott’s, shuts its doors? I suppose it’s fine with you if books die out, too.”
“They’re not dying out,” I said, “but if they were, yes, because it would mean that society didn’t need them any more, just like it stopped needing buggy whips and elevator operators, so it shed them, just like a snake sheds its skin.”
He snorted in derision. “That’s the stupidest thing I’ve ever heard. Necessary things disappear every day. And what about all the things we don’t realize are necessary till they’re already gone?”
“Then society brings them back. Like LPs. And fountain pens.”
“And what if we can’t bring the thing back? What if it’s too late, and it’s already gone?”
Like the chance to have a decent interview, you mean? I thought. p. 169

His agent tells him that one of his later appointments is cancelled and he finds himself with a couple of hours to kill. So, he wanders about the city and, when the weather turns particularly inclement, he dives into an antiquarian bookshop to get out of the rain:

The old-fashioned kind of bookstore about a foot and a half wide, with dusty copies of some leather-bound tome in the front window, and “Ozymandias Books” lettered in gilded copperplate on the glass.
These tiny hole-in-the-wall bookstores are a nearly extinct breed these days, what with the depredations of Barnes and Noble, Amazon, and Kindle, and this one looked like the guy on WMNH would be ranting about its closing on his next program. The dust on the display of books in the window was at least half an inch thick, and from the tarnished-looking brass doorknob and the pile of last fall’s leaves against the door, it didn’t look like anybody’d been in the place for months. But any port in a storm. And this might be my last chance to visit a bookstore like this.
The inside was exactly what you’d expect: an old-fashioned wooden desk and behind it, ceiling-high shelves crammed with books stretching back into the dimness.
The store was only wide enough for a bookcase along each wall, one in the middle, and a space between just wide enough for a single customer to stand. If there’d been any customers. Which there weren’t. The only thing in the place besides the guy sitting hunched over the desk—presumably the owner—was a gray tiger cat curled up in one corner of it.
The rest of the desk was piled high with books, and the stooped guy seated at it had gray hair and spectacles and wore a ratty cardigan sweater and a 1940’s tie. All he needed was one of those green eyeshades to be something straight out of 84 Charing Cross Road.
He was busily writing in a ledger when I came in, and I wondered if he’d even look up, but he did, adjusting his spectacles on his nose. “May I help you, sir?” he said.
“You deal in rare books?” I asked.
“Rarer than rare.” p. 170-171

James starts to browse the shelves and finds a vast assortment of books that do not appear ordered in any coherent way. Shortly after he has started looking, a woman walks past him and a conversation between her and the man at the front of the shop intrigues him, so much so that he later follows her through the staff door. Several flights of stairs eventually lead him down into a huge cavernous space with innumerable shelves of books. He sees some of the employees talking to the woman and, when he is eventually discovered, the woman is nonplussed and offers him a tour of the premises.
As they are walking through the stacks, the woman explains that they obtain copies of books that would no longer exist if they did not acquire them. Jim is puzzled at how they can know a  book is the last of its kind and, more practically, how any organisation can afford multiple such rare items. Matters appear even more peculiar when the shelving system becomes clear to him:

I looked at the books as we passed. Most of the sections had only two or three books, and Yancey Creek had just one, which was, fittingly enough, Noah’s Ark on Ararat.
It didn’t have any signs of water damage I could see, and neither did any of the other books, which meant they had to have been subject to some kind of advanced salvage technique.
I revised my theory of eccentric millionaire up to billionaire. Technologies to salvage waterlogged books cost big money. I’d researched the big 1966 flood of the Arno that had destroyed Florence’s National Library in connection with a pro-digitizing post I’d written. Their vacuum freeze-drying and other book-salvaging equipment had been wildly expensive.
Or maybe these were just the few that hadn’t gotten soaked.
“Flash floods,” Cassie said. “Sheffield; Big Thompson; Rapid City, South Dakota; Fort Collins, Colorado.” She paused a moment to indicate a shelf of books. “That one was particularly bad because the university library was being remodeled and all the Colorado history books and doctoral dissertations had been moved to the basement.”
Which explained why the books all had titles like Irrigation Techniques in Use in Dryland Farming and The Narrow Gauge Railroad in the Rocky Mountains from 1871-1888.
“Landslides,” Cassie said, still walking, not even glancing at the bookmarks as she passed, “mudslides, sinkholes.”
Shelving the books this way, by the agent of their almost-demise, was crazy, but it certainly highlighted the dangers facing books. Just like a nature preserve putting up signs telling what had decimated the particular species: poaching, acid rain, loss of habitat, pesticides. p. 178-179

Later on in this extended tour he gets a call from his agent saying his appointment is back on, and soon. As he is a long way from where he came into the store, the woman helpfully leads him to an elevator that takes him back to the surface. Because he is in so much of a rush, he does not note his location before leaving in a taxi.
A few days later, and after research that provides some surprising information, he tries to find the shop again . . . .
What is especially neat about this story is how it eventually loops back around to the radio interview discussion and (spoiler) has Jim (as I did) completely change his mind about book extinction.
This is a very readable meditation on the value of each individual book and why they should be preserved; it will especially appeal to bibliophiles.

The Cover, for Connie Willis’s story is a pleasant piece by Eldar Zakirov, an artist I’ve never heard of before.
Excelsior! by Sheila Williams is an editorial roundup of various Asimov’s events that have taken place in its fortieth anniversary year.
Gog and Magog by Robert Silverberg begins with a couple of paragraphs on Game of Thrones before becoming another History Today piece, this time about ancient/mythical walls and the tribes beyond them.
Time Party by James Patrick Kelly is his hundredth ‘Net’ column for the magazine, and has discussion and web links on the theme of time travel.
On Books by Peter Heck reviews several books by people I’ve actually heard of (unlike Charles de Lint at F&SF), and these include new novels by Norman Spinrad, Peter S. Beagle, and China Miéville, and a associational book of interviews by Robert Silverberg & Alvaro Zinos-Amaro. I have the last two already and managed not to impulse buy the others, which sound pretty good.
There is Poetry by Jennifer Crow, Robert Frazier, Ken Poyner, G. O. Clark, Jane Yolen, and H. Mellas (the Frazier and Mellas are okay), and the usual Next Issue and SF Conventional Calendar pages.

The usual mixed bag of an issue. ●

_____________________

1. ‘The Pale’ page at Wikipedia.

2. The introduction to Spinrad’s story has this mangled information:

He tells us inspiration for his latest tale came from England, which is called the Nanny State, and the ubiquitous cameras that are aimed at non-consenting adults. “Now non-consenting kids are more and more surrounded by the Nanny Bubble of controlling adults even when they just want to play their own pick-up games….” p. 160.

I don’t want to sound like a Scotsman/Welshman/Irishman with a chip on his shoulder, but “England” is not synonymous with “the United Kingdom” or “Britain”. Secondly, people don’t call England (or Britain) the “Nanny State”—they may assert that it is one, but that is a different thing: I’ve yet to hear anyone say, “I’m flying down to London and then we are going to motor around the south of Nanny State for a week.”

3. For what it is worth, half way down p. 190 in Willis’s story these two sentences are, unintentionally I think, repeated:

Come on, the address had to be listed somewhere. I didn’t have time to walk all over Manhattan looking for it. p. 190

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies. ●

Revised 3rd May 2018 to give the Richards’ story its own review rather than a copy of the Cassutt! 

rssrss

2 thoughts on “Asimov’s Science Fiction v41n11&12, November/December 2017

  1. jameswharris

    Paul, do you get Asimov’s as a digital subscription? You give us so many quotes I wonder if you type them in or copy them. If you get digital copies, how to they come? I’m subscribing to the print copies after several years of going without, but it’s annoying me that they come beat up and have mailing labels right on the artwork. I subscribed because I nostalgically wanted the covers, but the mailing labels make me regret it.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      Hi Jim,
      I’ve got a digital sub via Amazon. Both it and Analog (but not F&SF, alas) offer the ‘enhanced’ (I’ve forgotten what the technical term is) azw/mobi file. What this means is that on my first gen Kindle the magazine reads like any other book (you can set the text size, etc.), but on my Kindle for iPad it also has the option of being read as PDF-like page images. I’m not sure it is exactly the same as the magazine (the ads may be missing) but it looks like it is very close (I’ve always meant to buy a physical copy to compare).
      Hope this helps,
      Paul Fraser

      Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Science-Fiction v21n03, May 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Fiction:
The Legion of Time (Part 1 of 3) • serial by Jack Williamson ∗∗∗+
The Incredible Visitor • short story by Clifton B. Kruse
Island of the Individualists • novelette by Nat Schachner
Procession of Suns • short story by R. R. Winterbotham
Three Thousand Years! (Part 2 of 3) • serial by Thomas Calvert McClary
Static • novelette by Kent Casey
Ra for the Rajah • short story by John Victor Peterson
Niedbalski’s Mutant • short story by Clifton B. Kruse [as by Spencer Lane]
The Brain-Storm Vibration • short story by Moses Schere

Non-fiction:
Cover • Charles Schneeman
Interior artwork • Charles Schneeman (3), Jack Binder, Elliott Dold, Jr. (5), C. R. Thomson (2), H. W. Wesso, uncredited (4)
Not ‘The’ But ‘A’ • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Catastrophe! • science essay by Edward E. Smith
Science Discussions • letters
Brass Tacks • letters
In Times to Come
The Analytical Laboratory: March 1938

_____________________

The first part of Jack Williamson’s The Legion of Time leads off this issue.1 It starts with Lanning, a college student, reading a paper on space and time in his shared undergraduate flat when a woman appears in his room:

A clear silvery voice had spoken his name. Dropping the book, he sat upright in his chair. He blinked, swallowed. A queer little shudder went up and down his spine. The door was still closed, and there had been no other sound. But a woman was standing before him on the rug.
A plain white robe swept long to her feet. Her hair, a glowing mahogany-red, was held back with a blue, brilliant band like a halo. The composure of her perfect, classic face was almost stern. But, behind it, Lanning felt agony.
Before her, in two small hands, she held a thing about the size and shape of a football—but shimmering with splendid prismatic flame, like a colossal, many-faceted diamond. p. 6
[. . .]
“I am Lethonee,” she said. Her voice, Lanning noticed, had an unfamiliar musical rhythm. “And I am not really in your room, but in my own city of Jonbar. It is only in your mind that we meet, through the chronotron,”—her eyes dropped briefly to the immense flashing gem—“and only your study of Time made possible this complete rapport.” p. 6

She shows him a vision of Jonbar, her city:

The lofty, graceful pylons of it would have dwarfed the skyscrapers of Manhattan. Of shimmering, silvery metal, they were set immensely far apart, among green park-lands and broad, many-leveled roadways. Great white ships, teardrop-shaped, slipped through the air above them. p. 7

Lethonee explains to Lanning that he will have a pivotal role in ensuring the future existence of the city, and that he should guard himself against other forces:

“There is the dark, resistless power of the gyrane, and black Glarath, the priest of its murderous horror. There are the monstrous hordes of the kothrin, and their savage commander, Sorainya.”
The white beauty of Lethonee had become almost stern. A sorrow darkened her eyes, yet they flashed with a deathless hatred.
“She is the greatest peril.” It was a battle-chant. “Sorainya, the Woman of War! She is the evil flower of Gyronchi. And she must be destroyed.”
[. . .]
“Or,” she finished, “she will destroy you. Denny.”
Lanning looked at her a long time. At last, hoarse with wonder, he said: “Whatever is going to happen, I’m willing to help—if I can. Because you are—beautiful.” p. 7-8

Before she leaves him she warns him not to go to the flying club the next day with Halloran, his friend and flatmate: the latter is killed in an accident.
The second chapter continues at an equally brisk pace. Lanning graduates and takes a job reporting in Nicaragua. He travels to his new post by ship and, while on deck one night, he receives another visit:

Velvet night had fallen on the tropical Pacific. The watch had just changed, and now the decks were deserted. Lanning, the only passenger, was leaning on the foredeck rail, watching the minute diamonds of phosphorescence that winged endlessly from the prow.
[. . .]
And it startled him strangely when a ringing golden voice [. . .] called: “Denny Lanning!”
His heart leapt and paused. He looked up eagerly, and hope gave way to awed wonderment. For, flying beside the rail, was a long golden shell, shaped like an immense shallow platter. Silken cushions made a couch of it, and lying amid them was a woman.
Sorainya—Woman of War!
Lethonee’s warning came back. For the long-limbed woman in the shell was dad in a gleaming, sleeveless crimson tunic of woven mail that yielded to her full lissom curves. A long, thin sword, in a jeweled sheath, lay beside her. She had put aside a black-plumed, crimson helmet, and thick masses of golden hair streamed down across her strong, bare arms.
The white, tapered fingers, scarlet-nailed, touched some control on the shell’s low rim, and it floated nearer the rail. Upraised on the pillows and one smooth elbow, the woman looked up at Lanning, smiling. Her eyes were long and brilliantly greenish. Across the white beauty of her face, her mocking lips were a long scarlet wound, voluptuous, malicious.
Flower of Evil—Lethonee’s words again. Lanning stood gripping the rail, and a trembling weakness shook him. Swift, unbidden desire overcame incredulity, and he strove desperately to be its master. p. 9-10

If Lethonee is Good Girlfriend then Sorainya quickly reveals herself to be Bad Girlfriend. Sorainya tries to lure him on to the craft but Lethonee arrives just as he moves towards Sorainya and tells him to look below: there is a shark is in the water, and as his hand passes through Sorainya’s he realises that she is a projection too, and that he would have fallen to his death in the water. With a final warning Sorainya departs.
Lethonee tells Lanning that if he ever yields to Sorainya then Jonbar will never exist, and explains why:

“The World is a long corridor, from the Beginning of existence to the End. Events are groups in a sculptured frieze that runs endlessly along the walls. And Time is a lantern carried steadily through the hall, to illuminate the groups one by one. It is the light of awareness, the subjective reality of consciousness.
“Again and again the corridor branches, for it is the museum of all that is possible. The bearer of the lantern may take one turning, or another. And so, many halls that might have been illuminated with reality are left forever in the darkness.
“My world of Jonbar is one such possible way. It leads through splendid halls, bright vistas that have no limit. Gyronchi is another. But it is a barren track, through narrowing, ugly passages, that comes to a dead and useless end.”
The wide solemn eyes of Lethonee looked at him, over the slumberous flame of the jewel. Lanning tensed and caught his breath, as if a light, cold hand, from nowhere, had touched his shoulder.
“And you, Denny Lanning,” came the silver rhythmic voice, “are destined, for a little time, to carry the lantern. And—yours is the choice of reality.”

It’s a breath of fresh air to find a story that explains the maguffin in such a concise and elegant way—most other stories of this period would have a lone inventor banging on about etheric potentialities for a page and a half. This part is the cherry on the top of two crackingly paced chapters.
After this eventful beginning, Williamson uses the next section to rearrange the furniture. Years pass. He is visited once more by Sorainya, who tries to make him kill himself. He receives another treatise on time from his old college roommate McLan, and then one from Chan, the fourth of his roommates, after which he leaves to join him in China.
There, Lanning and Chan work as pilots in an unspecified war. During one raid they get their aircraft airborne but it is badly damaged. As they plummet towards the surface a spectral ship—with the dead Barry Halloran aboard—materialises beside them. They are plucked from the aircraft and Lanning later wakes on board to find Halloran watching over him.
Lanning finds out he is on the Chronion, a time-ship, and meets other military men plucked from various years to fight Sorainya. He then meets the ship’s captain, who is his old friend Will McLan, but finds him much changed:

Lanning climbed metal steps. Standing behind a bright wheel, under the flawless shell of crystal, he came upon a slight, strange little man—or the shattered wreck of a man. His breath sucked in to the shock of sympathetic pain. For the stranger was hideous with the manifold print of unspeakable agony.
The hands—restlessly fumbling with an odd little tube of bright-worn silver that hung by a thin chain about his neck—were yellow, bloodless claws, trembling, twisted with pain. The whole thin body was grotesquely stooped and gnarled, as if every bone had been broken on a torture wheel.
But it was the haggard, livid face, cross-hatched with a white net of ridged scars that chilled Lanning with its horror. Beneath a tangled abundance of loose white hair, that face was a stiff, pain-graven mask, terrible to see. Dark, deep-sunken, the eyes were somber wells of agony—and of a deathless, brooding hatred.
Strangely, those dreadful orbs lit with recognition.
“Denny!” It was an eager whisper, but queerly dry and voiceless.
The little man limped quickly to meet him, thrust out a trembling hand that was thin and twisted and broken, hideous with a web of scars. His breath was a swift, whistling gasp.
Lanning tried to put down the wondering dread that shook him. He took that frail dry claw of a hand, and tried to smile.
“Wil?” he whispered. “You are Wil McLan?”
He choked back the other, fearful question: What frightful thing has happened to you, Wil?
“Yes, Denny,” hissed that voiceless voice. “But—I’ve lived forty years more than you have. And ten of them in Sorainya’s torture vault.”

The rest of this section details McLan’s torture at the hands on the Gyronchi. Lanning is also shown their brutal world, and the civil war that has destroyed humanity leaving the Gyronchi and their ant warriors in control.

McLan also tells a Lanning of his temporal work (undoing the earlier elegant explanation a little), and how atomic power eventually let him build the Chronion and travel in time. At the end, Lanning goes and swears the rest of the men to the service of Jonbar.
A pretty good start to the novel.

Most of the rest of the fiction is, sadly, not up to the standard of the Williamson. The Incredible Visitor by Clifton B. Kruse, the first of two stories from this writer in this issue, is about a tiny, incredibly dense spaceship which comes to Earth from Sirius and causes a certain amount of turmoil, including the capture of two humans. The aliens, after their observations, decide they want to communicate with us.
One of the human scientists tries to tell the military that this is what the aliens are attempting, but (spoiler) he is overruled and, when the aliens attempt to return the two captives, they are attacked with a neutron ray. The ship is unaffected, but the humans (spoiler) are only saved by being recreated with alien bodies. They will be brought back to consciousness after the long journey back to Sirius.

Island of the Individualists by Nat Schachner is the third (of five stories) in the ‘Past, Present and Future’ series. I was going to read the first two but, after reading this one, I was glad I didn’t bother. This has three characters in a rocket ship running out of fuel over the Pacific. Fortunately, there is a data dump that brings us up to date:

“How far is it to land?” asked Beltan.
“As near as I can calculate,” said Sam, “almost a thousand miles. Too far to swim, as friend Kleon has justly remarked.”
The Greek shrugged. “I never did like the sea,” he declared. “I prefer solid ground underfoot, where I can brace myself and charge the enemy with my good sword flashing. It is my fault. Had I not remarked about the sleeping Gymnosophists in the mountains of Tibet, this would never have happened.”
“No more your fault than mine,” Sam Ward told him warmly. “They were our last chance. We ranged over most of North America seeking evidences of other cities, other civilizations. Aside from Hispan we could find nothing. And always behind us, hemming us in, hunting us like rabbits, were the rocket hordes of Harg, headed by Vardu. Our only chance lay in escape across the Pacific, to find the sleepers who had given you the life-immobilizing formula.”
“It is a pity that there was a leak in the tank,” observed the Olgarch with calm indifference. “Otherwise we could have made it. As it is, I regret nothing. I have lived more completely this past six months with you two as comrades, than in all the prior years of purposeless luxury within the neutron walls of Hispan.” He smiled reflectively. “A strange thing, our association. A Greek from the time of Alexander—an American from the twentieth century—and I, an Olgarch of Hispan, who once thought myself the proud apex of the ninety-eighth century.” p. 44

They see a strange island in the distance, and are scanned as they come into land. They find a race of men with really big heads who spend their time in contemplation.

One of the Heads talks to the three but, bored, retreats behind his force screen. Another Head talks to them, and feeds them before doing the same. A third speaks but then disappears. This one returns with the pursuing forces of Harg. There is a climactic battle on the island.
A poor pulp potboiler.

In Procession of Suns by R. R. Winterbotham a female pilot lands in an isolated mountain valley where a man is hiding from the rest of the world. After he destroys her plane (to stop her escaping and revealing his whereabouts) they become engrossed in an astronomical puzzle.

“I fled to these mountains and made my home in this crater of an extinct volcano. It was here that I found among some old books I had rescued in your land, certain vague references to a science called astronomy—the study of stars.”
Banna nodded. “I know,” said she. “It was the stars and astronomy that caused the latest upheaval—the stars that promised the end of the world.”
“You mean those twenty flaming suns up there?” asked Fao with a smile, pointing to the sky. Although the sun had not set, a long streamer of stars was visible, trailing across the heavens behind the Earth’s primary—twenty flashing stars of more than first magnitude. p. 65-66

The rest of the story is little more than a lecture, ending with Fao’s deduction that the Earth is acting like an ion in a capacitor—or some such scientific nonsense, I forget. This is an awful non-story.

The second part (there are overlapping serials in this issue) of Three Thousand Years! by Thomas Calvert McClary provides a temporary respite from the dross.
This section details the first attempts by Drega’s group at organising themselves in the post-apocalyptic world into which they have awakened. Food is short, and an attempt by the mob to eat a horse is stopped when a sailor turns up with a three-pound fish. Drega starts organising the men:

The fish pools had been stretched for two miles, with lengthy necks reaching into the river. At high tide the necks were bottled up. Birch and some sugar maple had been found. A poor grade of clay yielded a few pots which did not leak too badly. Birch and maple tea were the camp drink, both made by steaming twigs. There was no way to boil as yet. The inferior clay pots couldn’t stand it. A little coal had been discovered buried beneath hard packed mud. It was dug out with sticks and broken laboriously with heavy stones.
Drega’s clan had grown to two thousand, but increasing deaths from colds and infection threatened to reduce the number. The meager diet of fish and roots and dandelion greens was not sufficient to build up starved bodies. There had been an attempt to eat green berries which proved almost fatal. Some oysters and clams had been discovered. For the first time, a bird had been caught with enough meat on its bones to eat.
No dogs had come to this camp, but five cats were protected by Drega’s order. An onslaught of rats had threatened the camp’s very existence, and not until the arrival of the cats had this menace been curbed. p. 77-78

Some of the men go out to scout, and they later return on two elephants, with grim tales of colleagues lost in accidents and to huge bands of savages. There are also reports of widespread cannibalism, including one episode among their own expedition when they were desperate.

Some of the scouts do not return and Llewelyn goes out to find them, discovering Steve trapped in an underground tunnel with a group are living there. Steve and the eight hundred survivors go back to the camp.
Drega meantime has organised food for the winter, and the defence of the camp. Lead tokens are made by a smelting pit process for use as currency. For all his planning food starts to run short as winter approaches, and riots are only just supressed.
At the end of this instalment, Gamble (who caused the three thousand-year ‘sleep’) turns up with the offer of a better life:

Passionately, [Gamble] gave them a picture of the world science could create for them—corn high as their wall in five days from planting. Clothing in such quantity they could throw it into refabrication when it grew shoddy. Cars and private baths for every member of the family, luxuries for all and poverty for none. It was a beautiful picture. It left them silent and stunned.
“It will take a little time,” Gamble said. “But not long. There is only one condition. You all work and there is no money. At least money of the kind you know. In return, you get everything you can wish for. There will be no need for money.”
A cheer rose and fell dead into stunned silence. There could be no doubt Gamble spoke at least some truth. Look at his shining boots and the presents he had brought! Even bolts of silk and woolens!
“Mr. Drega,” Gamble went on, “does not agree with my views. He will probably wish to withdraw from any part of them.”
If Gamble had expected Drega to capitulate, he was disappointed. Drega was white but firm. He said to his people, “A world cannot exist without money! There must be trade.”
His clan was silent. p. 93

Most go with Gamble but a few decide instead to go with Drega to set up their own society.
This part doesn’t have the startling events of the first instalment and is a more traditional post-apocalypse piece with some interesting parts.

Static by Kent Casey is the second of the ‘Dr. von Theil and Sgt. John West’ stories. I had hopes for this one as I liked aspects of the previous tale, but this just recycles it in another conflict with the Uranians. This time the latter’s spaceships are impenetrable to the weapons used by Earth, so the General summons von Theil to find out how their shields work. Von Theil picks up the now Lieutenant West (promoted for valour after the opening space battle scene), and they head off for Mars with one of von Thiel’s inventions. This is a very long setup for a weak and unconvincing ending that involves (spoiler) a thought scrambler. The story doesn’t really make any sense (how did Von Thiel’s thought scrambler work away from Mars?), and it has an uncomplicated and straightforward ending. The cornball humour is very weak.

Ra for the Rajah by John Victor Peterson2 is narrated by Ward Jetland, the Freshman President at Royal Astrotech College in 2039 A. D. When he is introduced to a new student who is Martian royalty, his Royal Highness Ianay Fonay, it does not go well:

I was Freshman President by virtue of what was termed brilliance in prep school polo when the exclusive Coloe Palus prep Godsped the Rajah across to Royal.
His knee bent in homage, a Sophomore Martian introduced us: “Frosh prexy Ward Jetland, this is his Royal Highness Ianay Fonay, eldest son of Lanay Fonay, Over-Rajah of Syrtis Ma—”
“I-am-a-phoney!” I punned softly and chuckled. Consciousness was concurrent with the discovery that my aching mouth tasted of Martian knuckles and the realization that even a Martian can be insulted.
Tradition went smash! For a common frosh can’t sock the prexy, even if he is a Rajah’s heir-apparent. It’s worse than mutiny on a space-trajectory; it’s worse than a privately tutored youngster prancing innocently into the Blaster’s Dive on Ganymede and asking for milk!
Naturally, I promptly recovered my pugilistic prestige, and for three years afterward we had secret rendezvous behind the polo hangars and nurtured black eyes, skinned knuckles, acid burns and whatnot. We rounded the final pylon sound-limbed and going strong. Then radium, atomic energy, rockets, thrust-dispersion, polo, and—last and most important—Rosalie Ames, came cometing into our bittersweet lives and things really got serious! p. 110

The last sentence telegraphs the arc of the story. While they are working in the same lab on a rocket thrust dispersion problem they are both introduced to Rosalie Ames, a beautiful heiress:

She swept in like a queen, surveyed the Rajah and me haughtily and then swooped to our level with an even, white smile that made my heart surge like a hypoed jet-blast and keep going faster than a Perseid. I ogled at the Rajah; he ogled at me.
“Canal frogs peeping on a June night!” he sighed, which, if you’ve been to Mars, is a beautiful thing, “a vision!”
Of course, he said it just loud enough to hear—
She dimpled prettily and I decided that those telepix didn’t do the darling justice; then Widdlemere introduced us. Simultaneously something short-circuited in the unattended cyclotron—atoms disrupted in a hot, white, snapping flash—the durite vacuum tank cracked in twain.
“Damnation!” I yelped. “Voila: my next month’s allowance gone with the proverbial wind!”
“I will pay all,” sighed the Rajah ecstatically. “It is as nothing compared with meeting the famous and beauteous Rosalie—”
Shakespeare really had nothing on Fonay! p. 110-111

After she leaves, their truce ends:

“Listen, Rajah Phoney,” I growled, “all hands clear. The deck’s mine and you’re just a third-grade blaster. She gave me the orbs first, so just arc for Callisto and keep your unlovely proboscis clear of the heart-shiverin’ until I slap an I-do around the pretty’s fin—
“Listen, Vacuity Jetland,” he snapped back, “the dame’s mine. But if you must fight over everything, I’ll make you a bargain. Seeing that you’re Captain of the Royal American Varsity and I’m Cap of the Martian Varsity—well, when the annual Commencement Game comes off, the winner takes the spoils. In other words, the beauteous Rosalie is to be escorted to the Reception by the winning Captain, and the age-old custom of the engagement announcement will be preserved, all parties willing. Okel-dokel ?” p. 111

The rest of the story is about their rivalry, and concludes with a game of rocket polo.
The story is enjoyable but a little unclear at times due to its unusual and colourful style: one wonders what readers of the time thought of passages such as those above.

Niedbalski’s Mutant by Clifton B. Kruse is his second (and pseudonymous) story in the issue, and it is narrated by a sentient plant that can ‘hear’ the thoughts of its scientist creator and later matches this to his speech. The plant teaches itself to speak and attempts to communicate, only for the scientist to react with horror and leave, never to reappear. This plot loop is repeated with a woman who comes into possession of the plant. With its third owner, a botanist, the plant remains silent until it comes into bud, at which point it needs a viola tricolour for pollination. Once again the owner disappears but this time the plant learns that its attempts at communication are blanking the minds of the recipients.
There are some interesting aspects to this story, but its tragic arc is overlong and a bit pointless.

The Brain-Storm Vibration by Moses Schere occurs after the events of his earlier story Anachronistic Optics (Astounding, February 1938), but is independent of it. This one has Joshua the handyman becoming the subject of an experiment to increase intelligence (or “ratiocinative ability” as the story puts it). After they retire to the library a burglar breaks into the house; he is subdued and later used as a test subject which, of course, turns him into a criminal mastermind. There is a lot of explanatory dialogue and hand waving science explanation in the final act of this weak piece.

The Cover by Charles Schneeman (it is uncredited but is a colour mirror image of the first internal illustration) is for Williamson’s serial and is okay, I suppose, but not as good as his internal work which is probably the best in the issue. I note in passing that the coloured banners at the top and bottom of the previous covers are absent in this issue but will be back in the next. The rest of the Interior artwork is by Jack Binder, Elliott Dold, Jr., C. R. Thomson, and H. W. Wesso. A few are uncredited (I suspect the illustrations for McClary’s serial are by Brown, as they are similar to last issue’s, which were in turn similar to the credited cover). After Schneeman’s illustrations I like Wesso’s best. They look old-fashioned but are nicely detailed. The longer I look at all the different parts of the picture (look at those immaculately drawn skyscrapers in the background, the arches under the far stand) the more I think it is the best illustration in the issue. I have a grudging appreciation of Dold’s work (who illustrates three of the stories) even though it is rather crude.
John W. Campbell, Jr.’s Not ‘The’ But ‘A’ is an editorial that focusses mainly on the time-travel plot variant in Jack Williamson’s serial:

Jack Williamson has opened up another field for time-travel plots. The Legion of Time is itself a memorable story. It has a new plot. But more than that—it has a new concept—a mutant plot. If the future can follow either of many paths—and that, I feel, must be so, if our modern science is reasonably sound—then there is a new possibility. In the year 5938, for instance, either of two civilizations might exist. A time-traveler going down the paths to Tomorrow might reach either one or the other.
But, as Williamson points out, those two cannot be real to each other. If either can exist, and if they have the power, the knowledge to see through Time—then they may struggle for existence! But they cannot attack each other! p. 107

I don’t see why the latter should necessarily pertain, or why Campbell is getting so excited about Williamson’s twist; he goes on to say that this “completely new idea” “can give rise to a hundred plots.” I hope not, I don’t want to read the same story a hundred times. 3

Catastrophe! is a science article by Edward E. (‘Doc’) Smith about the formation of our solar system. As with most of these pieces it is outdated—the nebular theory it discounts (because of angular momentum concerns) is the one that is now supported.4 Smith finishes with a lively description of another theory—a wandering star striking or coming very close to a binary system, where one of the two stars was our sun.
Science Discussions has three letters, the first from Arthur C. Clarke (Hon. Treasurer of the British Interplanetary Society) which takes issue with the rocket flight equations in Leo Vernon’s article in the January issue.
Brass Tacks has letters defending ‘Doc’ Smith’s Galactic Patrol against comments made in an earlier issue, including a letter from Doc Smith himself:

What broke through my customary lethargy is not the mere fact that these sprightly and courteous gentlemen did not like “Galactic Patrol”—I cannot even hope, and certainly do not expect, to please everybody; and their tastes are their own. Nor is it the tone of the communication, the weapons they have chosen—I have been bawled out before, by experts, without undue or unseemly urges to violence.
What got my dander up to writing pitch is the accusation—by inference, it is true, but none the less clearly connoted—that I am sailing under false colors by using the Ph. D. Since Edward E. Smith is my real name, the thing is of course on record.

He goes on to give details, and challenges the original correspondents to state which passages of this novel show scientific knowledge incompatible with holding a Ph. D.
As for the other letters, there a couple who thought (as I did) that the ending to Galactic Patrol was abrupt, and there are the usual comments about the artwork. One of the readers, Mary Rogers of Muskogee, OK, compliments Smith’s novel and the new mutant cover, and finishes with “Keep up the good work and next time I’ll send orchids.”
Campbell’s reply is, “We’ll expect orchids when the May Astounding appears.”
In Times to Come announces a new feature, the Analytical Laboratory,5 and goes into matters in some detail—I’m not entirely sure what all the symbols mean:

Once again we have an issue that has a few items of note, and a lot of what can only be described as dross. ●

_____________________

1. In Campbell’s letter of 28th February 1938 to his friend and correspondent Robert Swisher (in Fantasy Commentator #59/60—recommended, and available at Lulu.com), he talks about the writers and material of this period:

“You know. I swear….we ought to get an appreciable and real circulation increase during the next three months. I think we’ve gotten some damn good stories, along with the ones that are just a bit weak. ‘Three Thousand Years and ‘Legion of Time’ are good yarns. Those Kent Casey shorts are good and (Clifton B.) Kruse has dropped his lousy W62 series (space adventure stories) for some rather nicely handled pieces. The competition from the author’s viewpoint, is getting fierce. I’m betting a number of those who appeared begin to drop out. Eando Binder has been in a bit of a slump, and his beat was never too strong. He may be retired gradually. (R.R.) Winterbotham is improving gradually and just fast enough to keep up. But he may not.
“Gallun’s a funny one. Once in a while he hits a high-spot like ‘Old Faithful’ and deserves a lot. Most of the time he rides along. He’s gotten three accepts in the last three weeks. One weak, hut not too weak. One medium good. One that almost reaches ‘Old Faithful’, ‘Seeds of Dusk’ is the latter. p. 82-83

Later on in the same letter Campbell has this to say about the artwork the magazine uses:

“By the way, any originals (covers and interior drawings) you’d like? We pass ’em out fairly liberally because they just get thrown out. You can even get a cover original after it’s about three months old—provided you don’t ask for an astronomical cover. Schneeman’s work is really neat in the originals. Binder’s originals aren’t as good as the reproduction—because he draws for the reproduction, not the original. The April cover is already bespoke—by Tom McClary. He can have it when we have the June cover to hang in the office. Wesso is doing that original astronomical plate. p. 82

2. I couldn’t find out much about John Victor Peterson. According to his ISFDB page, he wrote eight stories (one a collaboration) in the late-1930s/early-1940s and was then out of the field for over a decade, returning in the mid-1950s with another eleven works. There was a final novel in 1970, Rock the Big Rock.
I did find one snippet in Space, Time, and Infinity: Essays on Fantastic Literature by Brian M. Stableford, Borgo Press 2007, (Amazon) which has this:

I have before me as I write a battered copy of the first-ever issue of New Worlds—not the one which Ted Carnell and Frank Arnold persuaded Stephen Frances (alias Hank Janson) to launch under the Pendulum Publications imprint in 1946, but the March 1939 issue, the first of what turned out to be a run of four produced by means of a primitive duplicator. It contains a story by John Victor Peterson, a British writer who had already made five appearances in the American SF pulps, and a discussion of his writing methods by one “Thornton Ayre.” p. 94

3. Sam Moskowitz mentions one story that may have been inspired by Williamson’s in Fantasy Commentator #59/60:

The identical plot would be used with great effectiveness and poignancy in C.L. Moore’s ‘Greater Than Gods’ (Astounding Science Fiction, January, 1939), possibly urged upon her by Campbell. It was the ‘Branches of Time’ plot used several times previously, even as early as Edward Everett Hale and Mark Twain (‘Hands Off, Harper’s, March, 1881 and ‘The Mysterious Stranger’, Harper’s, 1922, respectively). p. 68-69

4. Wikipedia’s Formation and evolution of the Solar System page.

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in July:

I agree with the top two, but the next three are among the four worst stories in this issue; the Kruse stories are better, and Peterson’s definitely so, but I can see how the latter split opinion. ●

Edited 15th November 2019: formatting, archive.org link.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Science Fantasy #66, July-August 1964

ISFDB link

Other reviews: Strange Highways: Reading Science Fantasy, 1950-1967 by John Boston & Damien Broderick (Amazon)

_____________________

Editor, Kyril Bonfiglioli

Fiction:
A Case of Identity • short story by Kenneth Bulmer
God Killer • short story by John T. Phillifent [as by John Rackham]
The Poachers • novelette by James Parkhill-Rathbone [as by James Rathbone]
Building Blocks • short story by David Beech
Dear Aunty • short story by Daphne Castell
A Dish of Devils • short story by James Goddard
No Moon To-night! • novelette by Brian W. Aldiss [as by John Runciman]
Unto All Generations • short story by Paul Jents

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Roger Harris
Editorial • by Kyril Bonfiglioli
Our Cover
Advanced Intelligence
• coming next issue
Competition Notice

_____________________

Bonfiglioli’s second issue starts off with yet another story that appears to have come from the deepest recesses of an author’s trunk. Kenneth Bulmer’s A Case of Identity starts with a police inspector investigating the murder of a young woman in the countryside. Apart from the murderer having vanished into thin air, there have been other odd occurrences: ravaged sheep, a line of holes in the ground made by an unknown machine, etc.
After his enquiries, a search of open country by the army, and a further assault on a patrolling farmer by a “dark shape,” etc., the climax of the story takes place at an isolated farmhouse. The Inspector sees a shining light in the (by then) burning house that looks like an open refrigerator: I presume the dark shape was an alien from another world/dimension/etc., but who would know?
God Killer is by another established writer, John T. Phillifent (better known as John Rackham in the UK), and this talking heads story is probably another trunk piece. A vicar who has lost his belief in God is approached after a Sunday service by a man and his two flunkies. He tells the vicar he wants to mind-scan him to get his idea of God, and then combine it those of many others. Then the man can use his machine to generate the opposite image and eradicate the diety. It has a suitably pious ending.
The Poachers by James Parkhill-Rathbone is a first sale that provides a breath of fresh air after the previous two stories—although not literally, as it concerns undersea farmers in a future over-populated Earth. It starts with Jim Pollock, who comes across miners drilling next to the aquatic settlement’s farm land and, in the process, blowing sediment over their weed farms. He asks the miners to desist, but they rudely refuse. He reports back to his colleague, and they set up blowers to do the same to the miners. They narrowly miss being caught by one of their magnetic grapples.
After the pair attends a council meeting at Triton (their undersea city) a number of ships go out to reconnect the blowers to the cables, which the miners have cut in the meantime. The situation escalates.
Running parallel to this is the work that Jim’s wife Freida has been doing with fish, a basic form of mind-control device for fish shoals, as he learns at dinner:

They ate in the glow from fish-lamps, hundreds of tiny luminescent organisms stimulated electronically from the centre of each bowl, casting a gentler radiance than the ordinary lighting. It was the normal light for love-making, but for them both at the moment it was more a symbol of their emotional unity, like the wedding-rings of the old days: there was no time to make love. Frieda suddenly began to steer the conversation, and Pollock watched her with ill-concealed amusement as she brought up the guidance of shoals, her pet subject. Torn between concern for her husband and the stage her work in the lab had reached, she was obviously working up to one of those triumphant statements of hers, in a deceptively calm tone of voice, as she tried to keep down her excitement. He gave her the opening she wanted, and she plunged in:
“We’ve got it this time, darling—a method of affecting the fish brain. We’ve had a proper circus in the big tank. The trouble is, it only affects the more complex brains; it’s no good on fry, either. With some of our equipment, you can be a proper fish-herd—move your shoal where you like without any trouble.”
“Sounds pretty good,” agreed Pollock. “Better than what we’ve got, anyhow. So this is what you’ve been keeping a secret.”
“Well, look at it, darling. It sounds a bit unlikely as a project. We’ve done it now, and nobody will be able to say it can’t be done and wasn’t worth our trying. Proper scientific spirit you need in my job . . . And an understanding husband.”
Pollock leaned over and kissed her. “You’ve been acting a bit odd lately. So that’s what it was about.”
Frieda left with: “There’s a carp named after you in that tank. I make it work harder than the others—oh!”
The rest was lost in a tussle. p. 42-43

As you can probably gather (spoiler) the device is used to end the conflict with the miners. This is a somewhat clunky deus ex machina ending, but it is mostly a well done and readable piece, and head and shoulders above the previous two. A pity that there weren’t other later stories in the magazine from this writer.1
Building Blocks by David Beech starts with a discussion between a husband and wife about an undisclosed problem with newspapers and magazines that is affecting children: they resolve to keep their son Peter away from them. Needless to say he finds a pile of newspapers hidden in the house and, while reading one, a building block on legs appears and talks to him. He is led underneath the newspaper and finds that now he too has the body of a yellow building block. In this strange world there there are various colours and shapes of blocks/people there, mostly organised into four Empires, and they either fight/defend themselves from each other, or build towers to reach the top of a wall that surrounds them on all sides.
This allegorical interlude ends when Peter’s mother picks him up in our world, upset that he has been reading a newspaper. The last inexplicable paragraph has Peter go to the sideboard, light up a cigarette, and pour himself a whiskey. A twee shading to baffling piece.
Dear Aunty by Daphne Castell2 is another début, and a promising one. It starts with Henry, the editor of a small magazine, at a party. An exchange he has with one of his writers illustrates the tone of the story:

Bouncing round, he saw Dick Hayman, correctly dressed for the occasion with a blonde and a bottle of Riesling.
“Henry, you old devil, how’s every little thing? Fatter than ever, eh, I can see that. No wonder, sitting around on your butt, while better men toil like galleyslaves for you.” Dick was already a little drunk, and apparently bent on improving his condition.
Henry’s good manners, hammered into him by a fond father at an early age, did not desert him. “Could be worse, Dick,” he replied, baring his teeth in a polite, if mirthless smile. “How’s that article on bribery in local bowls matches coming along? It should be a fizzer—aimed right at the great beating heart of the nation, eh?”
“Have to wait for it, chum. I’m busy doing a spot of research on bribery and its effects on the motivations of sex.” Dick prodded the blonde affectionately in a pneumatic section of her anatomy. She cooed at him, and batted both eyelids.
“That’s roughly what you said a fortnight ago,” complained Henry. “God knows I can’t stand the bilge you produce, but I can’t keep ‘Gaiety’ running with all its pages blank, just because my writers are feeling the urge of Nature. Last week we had to shove in a reprint of ‘The Englishwoman: Is She Really Frigid?,’ instead of Bart’s new expose of the call-girl racket in civil service offices, because Bart had left for the Bermudas with one of the call-girls.”
“Lucky Bart!” murmured Dick. “Oh, well, I suppose ‘Gaiety’ has its place in the scheme of things.”
He told Henry what he thought that place was, and the blonde squealed, “Ooh, you!”

Politically incorrect and dated perhaps, but lively.
Henry is looking for a woman to write an agony column for the magazine, and receives a suggestion from the hostess that he use a woman called Gala Dysico. He is later told by a number of people that “everyone knows Gala.” In the following days, and when all other possibilities are exhausted, he ends up going to see her:

Miss Dysico was perhaps 55 or 60, and well nourished. Her hair had been dyed a metallic green, and most of her visible teeth (a great many were visible in that welcoming smile) had been stopped with gold. She was hung with layers of mauve draperies, festooned with strings of clashing beads. Her fingernails were long and silvered, and she carried a long black cigarette holder. Her eyes, however, were wonderful, warm and violet and enormous. p. 74

During their conversation, Henry finds she has the answers to all his personal problems, or manages to make them seem irrelevant. He hires her and in the following months her columns are a huge success and Henry gets a raise. He uses the money to take a short holiday abroad, but trouble awaits him when he gets back:

He returned from the delights of sunshine, sparkling blue seas, and beaches full of exotic and lightly-clad beauties, just in time to correct the galley-proofs of the latest issue of ‘Gaiety.’ He was, in fact, stretching out his hand for them, when the telephone rang.
“Aye, well, Mr. Persimmon, ye see, there’s suthin’ gey wrang wi’ they galley-proofs,” said a voice. It was Mr. Carfrae, the foreman of the printing-room. Henry blenched at these sinister words. “There is, is there?” he muttered. “Exactly what, Mr. Carfrae?”
“Ah wisna gaun tae tell yon chiel wi’ the lang neb, ye ken, for he’d jist haver on the way a body couldna tell whit he was gabbin’ aboot.” Carfrae and Merridew [the assistant editor] had a fierce, though largely unspoken contempt for one another. They communicated mainly by means of grunts and snorts. “But jist tak’ a wee gleek at they letters o’ yon wumman—whit’s this they ca’ her, Aunty Galler?—man, that’s a fine wumman! Ay, she fair pits me in mind o’ the days when Ah was nocht but a bit laddie, rinnin’ aboot wi’oot a bawbee ahint ma sporran—” Henry put the receiver gently down. Conversations with Mr. Carfrae always reminded him rather forcibly that modern languages had not been his strong point at school. He turned to Aunty Gala’s Quiet Corner, and the relevant item leapt out and hit him in the eye.
It was about two-thirds of the way down the last column, and it read as follows:
L’tut, Orp. Hercules Cluster. This is a very unfortunate position for you, my dear, and I do not think that bripping the hixix would, as you suggest, solve the problem. You will simply have to confide in the local priest of your sub-clan. The recipe you mention has been known to Arcturans for several thousand years, but would not suit your particular life-form. If you will let me have a vibrafoil attuned to your personal wave-length, I will send details of a methane-based alternative. p. 78-79

The resolution of the story is probably fairly obvious. Henry (spoiler) goes to her office and discovers she is also working for an interplanetary publication as well as his—just before she and her niece arrive through a portal. There is a rather talky final scene where she explains everything, and that she cannot (as Henry suggests) use alien problems in her future Gaiety columns. Earth cannot know of the existence of life on other planets, not because Earth isn’t ready to join the various peoples of the Galaxy, but because they aren’t ready for Earth:

“But, my dear Henry, the astounding advances that Earth has made in every branch of civilisation that relates to her own comfort and convenience—well, quite frankly, they would be like gunpowder, let loose among the comparatively backward planets of the Federation. Take depilatories, for instance—Trenna, imagine depilatories suddenly released wholesale to those creatures on the third moon of Jupiter!”
Trenna shuddered eloquently, and Henry found it extremely difficult to take his eyes away from the resulting effect on her figure. “I know a planet in the Bootes region,” went on Gala, “where sanitary devices are the prerogative of the chief priest, whose name could be roughly translated as ‘The Divine Plumber.’ They are given only as the highest rewards for extreme courage or devotion. p. 85

This is minor stuff, and dated, but I rather enjoyed it.
A Dish of Devils by James Goddard is a first contact story between Sirian visitors and a sixteenth-century peasant. In the last paragraph the encounter is revealed as the inspiration for the nursery rhyme Hey, Diddle, Diddle.
No Moon To-night! by Brian W. Aldiss is another pseudonymous effort from the bottom of the writer’s trunk. The setup of this one is that something in space is causing an area of darkness, blocking out starlight, and the phenomenon is spreading towards Earth. When it does, the main character, Roger Furnish, a civilian on an army base, experiences complete darkness: no lights of any sort can be seen. He spends the first part of the story perilously driving home in the pitch black to get to his wife. On his arrival he is greeted not only by her but by a phone call from the colonel telling him to come back. He and his wife return.
At the camp the colonel tells Furnish that he wants to take the base’s secret amphibious tank out while it is completely dark, apparently to test it in secret. After they get going Furnish forces the colonel to reveal the real reason for the journey, which is to get to a scientist who lives in France. The colonel believes he will be able to explain the phenomenon they are experiencing.
After a journey along the bottom of the English Channel to Calais (spoiler), they go into the scientist’s house, where they can see normally again. Fergusson, the scientist, explains how the device he has built to counteract the darkness works:

“This little machine’s pretty simple. As you may have observed, it’s an old H/3 army type electric generator, rigged up. The shields really are shields, arranged about the works to produce a ‘dead’ field—the centre of the field coinciding with the centre of the armature, so that the whole contraption is virtually its own little watertight magnetic world, also its own North. The South Pole exists, of course, but over the border; that is, through the machine—in another dimension I suppose you’d call it, but whoever thinks up such terms is going to have to think up a better [one] when this spot of research gets published. I call it H-space, because it’s space plus something else—but we’ll come back to that in a minute. p. 113

. . . no, I’m fine thanks, don’t bother.
This lone-inventor lecture (a tired trope in the late 1930s) continues, and we find out about his discovery of H-space and various other related matters for the story’s last few pages.
This has little going for it, bar some sections of Fisher’s blind journey to his wife. However, even the interest that these sections arouse is fatally undermined by their lack of credibility: driving a car a couple of miles while unable to see? I don’t think so.
Unto All Generations by Paul Jents starts with a man and a woman, Cartwright and Mary, working on a nineteenth generation computer when the former recognises a circuit from a sixth generation model, a version that ran amok. Carwright reports it to his supervisor and then goes home for dinner. Here, he is served by computer controlled, lobotomised humans, similar to the ones that were assisting him in the lab.
The supervisor, meanwhile, reports the problem to a fifteenth generation computer He is told that the design will be modified and to come back later. The computer secretly decides that the problem is Cartwright and arranges for his disposal.
The rest of the story describes the (unsuccessful) trial of the completed nineteenth generation model:

The nineteenth Generation was a beautiful thing. From where Mary was sitting, some distance away, it looked like a tree of crystal. Each of the ‘leaves,’ perfectly symmetrical although varying in size, represented a different electro-chemical system complete in itself—in effect an individual, specialized brain. They fed back, in channels gradually growing larger and more closely integrated, via the ‘branches’ to the main control column, the trunk.
In turn this sub-divided again and again, into an infinite number of rootlets, in direct communication with every other computer in the world.
A tree, Mary thought again. A tree of knowledge. Of good and evil. p. 123

The creation of a twentieth generation begins after the failure of the nineteenth.
At the end of the story the twentieth generation computer awakens with a transcendent knowledge of God, which is instantly transmitted to the rest of the computer network.
There are the bones of a half decent story about computer totalitarianism here but, for the most part, it is buried under a lot of waffle.

This issue’s Cover is by Roger Harris, for David Beech’s Building Blocks. There is a short note at the end of the Rackham story crediting Harris for the cover, and stating next issue’s “will be by Haro, well-known to the readers of the Observer and Mail.” It wasn’t; Harris would provide another two covers for the magazine, and Haro was never seen.
The Editorial by Kyril Bonfiglioli has three parts. In the first he deals with circulation:

My first editorial struck a base and mercenary note: I said that what sf needed most was half-crowns, in the form of circulation. I also said that if more copies were sold we could boost the rate paid for stories and perhaps, in the end, check the drain to America of riper writers.
Well, thanks to a handier format, a new distribution network, and Roger Harris’ bold cover-design, we have broken a little ice. Latest indications suggest that around 15% more copies of the issue found good homes. NEW WORLDS, too, shows a similar healthy jump. Hoping that this is only the beginning of a sharp upward trend, I am sticking my neck out and raising the basic rate for this magazine by—to be exact—19.047%. A start, anyway. p. 2

In the second part he mentions that there will little adverse response to last issue’s editorial and his “attack on “fantasy” of the “sword and sorcery” vintage.” He goes on to add:

If sf has a future—and I wouldn’t be doing this if I didn’t believe that it has—it is not a future exhibiting all the signs of a decaying religion, with innumerable sects endlessly sub-splitting and high priests howling “heretic” at each other.
Science-fiction’s task is to abolish itself. At present it inhabits a sort of quarantine ward where it leads a sheltered but unwholesome existence. We tend to think that much sf fails to be printed because it is sf. Mr. Southworth, of Queen’s College, Cambridge, in a letter to me recently, posed the worrying question: ‘how much would get printed, purely on its literary merits, if it were not science-fiction?’ There’s a dusty answer to that one. p. 2

Bonfiglioli goes on to predict that in ten years’ time SF will have either abolished itself, be in the sick ward, or be extinct—I’d say don’t give up the editor’s job for one as a futurologist!
The last section is one of those tedious passages about manuscript preparation that non-writers semi-regularly had to sit through in some of the publications of the time. It does have this, however:

Most professionals use quarto paper and this is a great blessing: foolscap is the wrong size for most envelopes and files and is awkward to handle in hotel bars and other places where copy-reading takes place. The whole thing is stapled, clipped or pinned together and a stamped addressed envelope is always enclosed. (One doesn’t like to be mean over tenpence but there are only a couple of dozen of them in a pound note). p. 20

There are a couple of other notes apart from the one about the cover. Advanced Intelligence, which is a plug for the next issue, includes a puff for the Rudyard Kipling story, along with mentions of material from John Rackham and Thom Keyes. Competition Notice is an update stating that engineers and doctors are eligible to enter.
Finally, the inner back cover generously plugs New Worlds (this compared with Science Fantasy’s measly third of a page in New Worlds, with little more than a mention of its title and price):

This is a fairly poor issue, as I expected.3

_____________________

1. James Parkhill-Rathbone would be the assistant editor to Kyril Bonfiglioli at Science Fantasy for issues #70 to #80, before leaving to set up his own magazine called The Idler. There is a short review of this publication (and the information that Josephine Saxton was a contributor) here. When asked, they couldn’t provide any more information about his having “settled down to a life as a writer of pretty conventional science fiction.”
I found only one birth and death record for his (uncommon) name: the name of the wife, Alys, matches up with the one mentioned in “Birth of a Son” on p. 3 of Futurian War Digest #26, Feb 1943. Talking of fanzines, he also published “the first fanzine to come from Scotland” when he was a teenager, Macabre.
James Parkhill-Rathbone’s ISFDB page.

2. In the mid-sixties Daphne Castell published three stories apiece in both Science Fantasy and New Worlds (and would continue to appear in various places until her death in 1983—her ISFDB page, listing twenty-three stories is here). Initially she was best known for a notable interview with J. R. R. Tolkien which appeared in New Worlds #168 (November 1966). There is an interesting article on the Internet Archive Wayback Machine (backup screenshot here) that describes the intersection between Castell, Tolkien, Moorcock and New Worlds, as well as providing other bibliographic information (sadly, there is nothing at Science Fiction Encyclopedia, probably a result of its bias towards book publication).
There is a little more information in the afterword to her story Who’s in There With Me? on p. 123-124 of Judith Merril’s anthology England Swings SF, Doubleday, 1968:

I am over twenty-one and under forty . . . have a brilliant engineering husband and three brilliant musical children . . . Born in Southport, Lancashire, where tripe is eaten. I went to six schools before I was eleven, and ended my education peacefully with an Oxfordshire vicar, three mornings a week. This liberal education in the humanities gained me a scholarship to Oxford (St. Anne’s) and a sturdy Victorian prose style, leavened with heavy jocularity (I don’t know where “Who’s in there with me?” came from—it’s not typical). I did linguistic research under Professor Tolkien, who is a marvellously kind, helpful man . . . until I ran out of living money—a thing I do fairly often. p. 123

I became a qualified librarian, and worked with music and then with forestry literature until I had my second baby.
Interests? A lot. I used to try something different every year . . . chess, cricket, bell-ringing and music seem to stay, whatever else . . . I’ve written, produced and acted in plays, run a madrigal society, given song-recitals, conducted a village choir . . . At the moment, I look after the house and children, act as chauffeur to the family, experiment with foreign cooking, belong to a local choir, ring bells at a local church, study electricity and Grade 3 piano, and run a class for adults in English language.
[She prefers American to British SF]—though I would rather have written “Hothouse” than anything I can lay claim to.
I feel we’re all a bit besieged by the “short trot round a fevered mind” effect. If I could be my ideal writer, I would be a combination of James Blish (for plots and people), Robert Sheckley (for dialogue and situation), and Hal Clement (for background and detail). p. 124

Merril also mentions that Castell produced articles, interviews, reviews, etc. for The Guardian, Good Housekeeping, Christian Science Monitor, as well as news programs for the BBC (who also broadcast several of her stories).
Castell strikes me as one of those writers who may have produced much more short fiction if the paperback Science Fantasy and New Worlds (or a similar British F&SF-type publication) had continued publication through the late sixties, seventies and eighties.

3. I appreciated the Castell story a lot more this second time around. My scores from the first time I read the magazine (in the early 1990s?) were (scores from this review in brackets): Bulmer 0 (1), Rackham 0 (1), Rathbone 3 (3), Beech 1 (0), Castell 1 (3), Goddard 0 (1), Runciman/Aldiss 1 (0), Jents 0 (1). Consistent if nothing else, I guess. ●

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Beneath Ceaseless Skies #244-246, February & March 2017

ISFDB links: #244, #245, #246

Editor-in-Chief, Scott H. Andrews

Other Reviews:
Gardner Dozois, ScienceFictionSite, #244, #245
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank , All
Kevin P Hallett, Stephanie Wexler, Tangent Online, #244, #245, #246
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews, #244, #245, #246
Various, Goodreads, #244, #245, #246

Fiction:
#244:
The Starship and the Temple Cat • short story by Yoon Ha Lee ∗∗
El Is a Spaceship Melody • novelette by Maurice Broaddus
Where the Anchor Lies • short story by Benjamin C. Kinney
#245:
Penitents • short story by Rich Larson
Red Dreams • short story by R. Z. Held
The Last Human Child • novelette by Milo James Fowler +
Such Were the Faces of the Living Creatures • short story by Josh Pearce
#246:
Do as I Do, Sing as I Sing • novelette by Sarah Pinsker
The Emotionless, in Love • novella by Jason Sanford
Gennesaret • short story by Phoenix Alexander

Non-fiction:
Ugg • cover by Florent Llamas

As these three issues use the same cover artwork I’ve reviewed them together. These three are also the issues for ‘Science-Fantasy Month 4’.1

The Starship and the Temple Cat by Yoon Ha Lee gets #244 off to a promising start:

She had been a young cat when the Fleet Lords burned the City of High Bells.
Strictly speaking, the City had been a space station rather than a planet-bound metropolis, jewel-spinning in orbit around one of the gas giants of a system inhabited now by dust and debris and the ever-blanketing dark. While fire had consumed some of the old tapestries, the scrolls of bamboo strips, the altars of wood and bone and beaten bronze, the destruction had started when the Fleet Lords, who could not tolerate the City’s priests, bombarded it with missiles and laser fire. But the cat did not know about such distinctions.
Properly, the cat’s name was Seventy-Eighth Temple Cat of the High Bells, along with a number of ceremonial titles that needn’t concern us. But the people who had called her that no longer lived in the station’s ruins. Every day as she made her rounds in what had been the boundaries of the temple, she saw and smelled the artefacts they had left behind, from bloodstains to scorch marks, from decaying books to singed spacesuits, and yowled her grief.
To be precise, the cat no longer lived in the station, either. She did not remember her death with any degree of clarity. The ghosts of cats rarely do, even when the deaths are violent. p. 2-3

One of the starships involved in the attack returns years later. It is now a renegade and is being pursued by the Fleet Lords. While the ship talks to the cat they catch up, and battle commences. The cat (spoiler) summons other ghosts to aid the ship and, after victory, joins it on its journey.
The story does not combine the fantasy and SF elements successfully, and does not suspend disbelief.
El Is a Spaceship Melody by Maurice Broaddus, unlike the Lee, does not get off to a promising start:

The living crystals were displeased. The dissonant chords of a harried melody rocked the starship Arkestra. When Captain LeSony’ra Adisa was a young girl dreaming about one day commanding her own vessel, she had never considered it would be filled with so many day-to-day irritations. She sprang from her seat in the main bridge at the sound of the music. She was not one to be tested today.
“Overseer, we aren’t due for a command performance for another three hours.” On the verge of yelling, she opted to save her anger for the person who deserved it.
“Commander Marshall moved the performance ahead.” The timbre of the Overseer’s voice, emanating from the unseen broadcast units, vacillated somewhere between clearly male and clearly female. Its AI was integrated into every fiber along the length of the Arkestra, its calculations vital to monitoring the ship’s systems, including the harnessing energy from the kheprw crystals that powered the ship. p. 19

The warning flags here are the Star Trek-y beginning, and the weird name for the crystals. And that the starship is powered by crystals, which brings us back to the Star Trek comment. It gets worse as Captain LeSony’ra leaves the bridge with her two guards, apparently in fancy dress:

“Steppers, Chappel, you’re with me.” Cradling a small crystal ball in her hand, LeSony’ra nodded, and the two security officers flanked her. Breastplates covered chrome colored body suits. Each wore a gilded animal mask; Steppers an eagle, the Chappel a dog. They brandished shields, though their charged batons remained at their waist. The trio of women exited the bridge. p. 20

There is more of this as they arrive at the concert that has been started by Commander Marshall to, get this, recharge the kheprw crystals.

She cast a baleful glare in his direction, withdrew opaque citrus-colored glasses, and set the crystal ball on the keyboards at her station, unlocking the vintage Clavioline. Its amplifier fed directly into the kheprw crystals’ containment unit. Her voluminous black caftan whipped about her as she took her seat behind the Clavioline, its iridescent silver overlay interfaced with the keyboards. Her gold chainmail headdress lightly jingled as she began to work the instrument. Her striped platform oxfords—“moon boots” the crew called them, since they were designed for zero gravity situations—found the foot pedals.
Marshall used any opportunity to undermine her authority. Always eager to ingratiate himself to the crew, to prove who ought to be in command. He was in need of a reminder of who was in charge. It was time for a true command performance. p. 21-22

The story engine here is starship Captain LeSony’ra Adisa’s (a young, black, female martinet) conflict with Commander Marshall, her junior officer (he is older, male, white, and a ‘traditionalist’—he also has a facial twitch in case there is any remaining doubt that he is a bad ’un).
The trouble between these one-dimensional characters is telegraphed fairly early on, both in the opening paragraphs above, and in a discussion about Overseer, the ship AI—it is a pity that all the glam-rock stuff at the start disappears so quickly as they could probably have settled matters with a dance-off. As it is, the story continues on its predictable way, with Adisa showing all the emotional intelligence of a teenager who has fallen out with one of her friends. An asteroid strike, a murder and a mutiny are added to the mix, as well as the ship AI, Overseer, trying to find God.
I thought this was awful.
Where the Anchor Lies by Benjamin C. Kinney is a story that feels like an extract from a longer work (a common occurrence in Beneath Ceaseless Skies). This has a woman from the Polity on a pilgrimage to the ruins of a starship she was once bonded with. Once she arrives (spoiler) she will use the starship to warn her fellow citizens of the their leaders’ nefarious intentions. Apart from its structural deficiencies I thought this was okay.
Penitents by Rich Larson leads off #245. This story concerns two characters: Mara, who lives in the habs, and Scout, who lives in the wasteland outside. Mara has hired Scout to help her rescue her friend Io, who left the habs and was taken by an enigmatic black cube controlled by aliens:

Mara doesn’t know where to look, but then all of a sudden there’s an enormous black cube filling up the sky above them. No thunderclap, no sound at all, it just appears. A tremor runs through her whole body, and nausea hits her gut. Her ears are keening, her face is aching. There’s a rough staticky tongue licking her spinal column top to bottom.
The cube is like nothing she’s ever seen, an enormous black box composed of a thousand shifting slivers breaking and melding, rippling, almost liquid. Blinking red sensors swarm around its edges like flies. She can’t tell how close it is—one second it seems right on top of them, the next a mile away. Vertigo swamps her, and she retches.
[. . .]
As she watches, an enormous oily black bubble forms on the underside of the cube, like water beading at the end of a nozzle, then falls. It splashes apart on the slag, revealing its cargo. Mara takes a sharp breath. It’s an old man, scarecrowskinny, naked, with skin so pale it almost glows against the pebbly black rock.
But instead of a head, or perhaps enveloping it, there’s spiny black machinery, with a red sensor pulsing right where the old man’s face should be. p. 4-5

Eventually, (spoiler) they manage to rescue Io and, while they do so, we learn more about the aliens, and why they are make the captives march underneath the cube.
Another solid story from Larson, and one that wouldn’t be out-of-place in, say, Asimov’s SF.
Red Dreams by R. Z. Held has a good hook:

When Tarnish woke from her second red dream, she could deny it no longer—she had to leave, before that dreaming red became the kind of real red that drenched her hands. p. 32

It is a post-holocaust story that has two characters travelling across the country to deliver mail. One of them, Tarnish, starts having the ‘red dreams’ alluded to above, which have previously have led to violent blood-letting sprees in the afflicted. Although Tarnish feels it would be best to leave her partner Sol, the latter dissents, and they stay together. Later, when they come upon the remains of old tech, Tarnish finds her affliction is actually a need for rust not blood.
There is the seed of a good idea here but the story is another one with the feel of an extract. It also feels rather over written and consequently drags.
The Last Human Child by Milo James Fowler is another post-apocalyptic future, this time one where humans are dying out and are in conflict with the ‘spliced,’ humans produced from a mix of convict and animal DNA. Dahlia is (supposedly) the last human child, and she is fleeing through the jungle with Brawnstone, a troll ogre, while the spliced Enya, a ‘shapeshifter’ who is part of a patrol of humans, pursues her.
Just before Dahlia is caught (spoiler) she meets a man in the jungle. The acid rains do not affect him as he has as force shield, and he tells her he is part of a human community that is separate from the Elders Dahlia is trying to escape from. The resolution plays out when all the parties meet.
I enjoyed this, but it is slightly spoiled by a crude data dump start that synopsises what I presumed were earlier stories.2 This could have been more elegantly done, either as a proper prologue, or with the material worked more gradually into the story.
Such Were the Faces of the Living Creatures by Josh Pearce is yet another post-holocaust story, this time one with a hillbilly mutant vibe. A father takes one of his daughters to get medical attention but the autonomous train they attach themselves to is hijacked by humans that have a metallic skin. After they escape they end up in a convent, where the mother superior extracts genetic material from the father (in the traditional way) before explaining where he can find a group who can help the daughter. These turn out to be insect-like creatures who agree to cure one of them in exchange for the other . . . .
Although parts of this are interesting enough, it feels rather like something made up as the writer went along. I also think that it doesn’t quite get the tone right (it sometimes feels as if it is unintentionally teetering on the edge of humour).
Do as I Do, Sing as I Sing by Sarah Pinsker leads off #246. This story’s narrator is a girl called a Guerre who lives in a strange agrarian community. It seems that they only grow one main crop, koh, and this requires a ‘cropsinger.’ One day she and her brother return to the village after they finish playing and see a silver air car arrive, something that Guerre has never seen before. The occupants of the vehicle tell the villagers that the child they had sent train as a replacement cropsinger (their current one is failing) has died.
Guerre is chosen as a replacement; her brother is not impressed when he cannot go too. She leaves the village for the long trip to the training farm.
Several years later, Guerre completes the final test to become a cropsinger and returns to her village. She discovers that, after she had left, her brother went to the city. He then returns to the village with a machine he claims can do the job of a cropsinger, and proceeds to set up a demonstration for the villagers. As the machine works, Guerre and Kirren, the old cropsinger, discuss the effects the machine may have on the delicate societal system that has the lowlanders produce koh crops, and the highlanders breed goats. Later, matters take a turn for the worse when Guerre detects abnormalities in the test crop and feels compelled to act.
I liked this piece well enough but it suffers from three problems. To start with, it is obviously the first part of a longer work or series as the ending leaves matters largely unresolved; second, Guerre’s training is covered in a scant few pages when this section should have been a much longer one where, and this is the third deficiency, the strange ecology and society should have been at least partly fleshed out. No doubt we will learn more in future stories.
The highlight of the three issues is The Emotionless, in Love by Jason Sanford, a 28,000 word novella which is a sequel to the Nebula Award finalist Blood Grains Speak Through Memories (Beneath Ceaseless Skies #195, March 17th 2016). That story had as its central character Frere-Jones, who was the ‘anchor’ for her land, and this story concerns her ‘day-tripper’ son Colton. (The story takes place in a depopulated future that has ‘day-fellows’—itinerant humans—whose caravans are more or less constantly on the move across the land. The resident anchors are infected with ‘grains’—militant ecological nanotechnology which permeates the environment—and the anchors are used by the grains as environmental wardens. Should day-trippers overstay their welcome, or damage the environment, the grains are capable of swarming anchors from adjoining areas to deal with the problem and, more significantly, of transforming them into monstrous beasts to mete out anything up to lethal punishment.)
The story opens with Colton’s caravan, which is going to an area where an upcoming ‘Veil’ is expected, a rare occurrence where the grains in the land malfunction and die, allowing travellers to exploit the land for a short period without fear of attack. They come upon a tree that has been cut down with a laser, and realise that this is something that will enrage the local grains. When they catch up with the caravan responsible for this act it is being attacked by a number of anchors:

Elder Vácha and Colton watched the anchors attack the three wagons ahead. Like their caravan, these other wagons were armored boxes riding wheels two yards tall. But the other caravan’s wagons weren’t hardened ceramic like theirs. Instead, Colton saw rusty metal armor with actual rivets. The wagons looked cobbled together from previously destroyed ones, as if the people driving them hadn’t bothered to create anything better.
Only the strongest wagons could withstand an anchor’s onslaught, and the other caravan wasn’t close to that. The attacking anchors no longer looked human, their bodies rippling to massive muscles and height, to silvered fangs and claws. One of the anchors stood twice as tall as the others and towered over the wagons, her long red hair burning actual fire through the rain and her body swollen on the power and fury of her grains. Colton had never seen an anchor this big—even his mother, who’d been incredibly powerful when angry, wouldn’t have come close. p. 49

The second and third acts are a wild ride that involve, among other things: renegade grains, and Sri Sa’s resultant abilities; Ae’s neural connector; the last human city that fell in the war with the grains, which is partially buried on the site of the Veil.
Along the way, Sri Sa gives Colton grain injections that will enable him to feel individual emotions (he lost this ability when his mother killed off the grains in his body, and changed him from an anchor to a day-traveller):

“You want another emotion?” Sri Sa asked. “You can’t understand what I’m about to share without it.”
Colton nodded.
Sri Sa jumped into the stream beside Colton and grabbed his arm. “Emotions are like colors,” she whispered. “Only a few primary colors, combined, create all the others you see. It’s the same with emotions.”
A single claw grew from Sri Sa’s right index finger. She ran it from Colton’s elbow to wrist, stopping to tap the red dot there. “You need happiness this time,” she said with a grin. “Fear and happiness mix to create duty. You can’t understand why I’m angry without experiencing duty.”
Sri Sa stabbed the claw into Colton’s wrist.
Memories flooded him. He saw people laughing and loving and playing and dancing, each memory wrapping pure bliss through his body and mind. He held a newborn baby to his chest for the first time—his baby, a baby born of him and Sri Sa. He imagined kissing Sri Sa on the cheek as she whispered her love back to him.
“I created those two memories just for you,” Sri Sa said as she tapped his lips with a claw. “The next memories, though, are real. They’re my favorites.”
Colton laughed as he felt Sri Sa’s most precious memories, which came from a woman who’d lived in this city before its destruction. Colton experienced her life in the nano-built city among buildings gleaming to absolute whiteness or lost to perfect darkness. He played among gardens bursting with gene-altered flowers and cool-mist fountains. He learned in vast libraries containing all of humanity’s knowledge. He listened to innovative music flow from performance halls and theaters. He watched children play in beautiful parks and lovers hug as they walked warm-lit streets at night.
Colton grinned. He saw why Sri Sa loved these memories. p. 123-124

This all builds to an exciting climax, and one which has a fitting final line.
Although this is a very good piece overall, it does have a few minor weaknesses: it is perhaps a little too long, which causes pacing problems in the story (the section at the start of part two, for instance, drags a little); I also think that it could do with another draft as it feels a little unpolished. Notwithstanding this, those that enjoyed the previous story will love this one (and I strongly recommend you read it first): apart from the fact that we learn so much more about this world, it is a gripping story. One for the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies, and I will be interested to see how it does in the Nebula Awards.
Gennesaret by Phoenix Alexander is an evocative story that tells of a woman and her son who are fleeing a conflict:

When there is nothing left in her, when the air boils in her throat and the muscles of her limbs scream and her toes, crushed together unnaturally in thick leather boots, throb with pain: then there is sand, and the sound of the sea.
Too exhausted for relief, she lowers the child from her shoulders and sinks, herself, down. She is on her back. The sand holds her. She claws at her bindings blindly, face-up and drinking in starlight. Her fingers are blocks beating against fabric, and then, and then, the shocking bliss of cool air on her feet, of sea air ruffling the sail-like skin that connects her long delicate dactyls. The flesh is pinched red, the soft lines of scales raw highlights. She weeps tearlessly as she raises her legs, feet forming a fan of flesh above her. The sky is far too alive. Stars show through the translucent film of her toes; galaxies blink between the digits.
The child mewls.
“Umma, I’m hungry.”
Blunt, vestigial claws fumble at her cheek, walking along the flesh to her jawline. She closes her eyes. Instinct directs his hands. As he paws the sack of skin around her gullet, her mouth falls open, and her child pushes his own eagerly into it. She feels the little darting of his forked tongue about the soft flesh of her cheeks, slipping further, sliding longer, and her esophagus spasms, bringing half-digested food up to him.
There is not much. The remains of a small dustrat; the slimed husks of insects. The fires and chemicals destroyed most of the fauna from the grasslands or forced them to flee.
Theirs is a time of running.
When the child has had his fill and slides from her — only then does she swallow the meager remains. Her breath is quick and repulses her: wretched meat. p. 176-77

They plan to cross to the country that is visible on the other side of the water but, before they can do this, her husband, his friends, and their tracking animals catch up with her, and try to take her back. She manages to escape them, and runs across the water in a trance, her webbed feet and speed keeping her and the child above the surface.
When she reaches the opposite side she finds a hostile reception.
This is a promising piece but the ending didn’t work for me (spoiler: her son dies and she is taken away by the crowd. This is followed by an awkward coda that has two of the crowd stand over the boy’s body before cutting off his mutilated crest.) A pity—if the narrative arc was as strong as the writing this would be pretty good.

The cover, Ugg, is an attractively done if unfortunately named piece by Florent Llamas.3

This issue is a mixed bag, just like the previous ones I’ve read. There is some good or very good reading (the Larson and Sanders) and some of the rest is also of interest (the Fowler and Alexander, etc.). More generally I would note that the magazine has something of a writers’ workshop vibe: a number of the stories feel as if they aren’t entirely finished products, and this is amplified by a number of clumsy sentences and typos. ●

_____________________

1. There is more wordage than usual in these three issues: at just over 90,000 words there is more here than in an issue of F&SF (82k in the 9/10-2017 issue) but not Asimov’s SF (112k in the  9/10-2017 issue).

2. I had a look at Milo James Fowler’s website and ISFDB page for more information about this series but neither is much use. I eventually came upon Dahlia and the Ronin at Amazon and, as  it was only 99p, I bought and read it.

The ebook has four stories that form a prelude to the tale in this magazine (which will presumably be included once BCS’s exclusivity period expires). I say ‘stories’ but they are really four fragments, or the first four parts in a five-part novelette. They are:

While She Sleeps, Mountains Tremble (Triangulation: Morning After, 2012), 1000 words
Stone for Brains (The Fifth Dimension, 2013), 1000 words
Dahlia’s Feast (Aoife’s Kiss #44, March 2013), 3800 words
Dahlia and the Ronin (Perihelion Science Fiction, 2014), 4100 words

It would be helpful for the writer to put these details on his website (or the editor in the after-story material) for those who want to read the series from the start.

3. The full-size cover image is here. You can find more of Llamas’s work at Deviant Art. ●

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe here.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.